DISTRICT MAINTENANCE & OPERATIONS BUILDING

DISTRICT MAINTENANCE & OPERATIONS BUILDING

GALLOWAY TOWNSHIP PUBLIC SCHOOL DISTRICTGALLOWAY TOWNSHIP - ATLANTIC COUNTY - NEW JERSEY

New Jersey - PennsylvaniaW W W . F V H D P C . C O M

FVHD PROJECT #5195 / NJDOE# 1690-X01-20-1000

Consulting Engineers:Edwards Engineering GroupHarrison - Hamnett, P.C.Gillan & Hartmann, Inc.

April 15, 2020

VOLUME 2 OF 2

S P E C I F I C A T I O N Sfor

MAINTENANCE & OPERATIONS BUILDING103 South Reeds Road, Galloway, NJ 08205

for the

GALLOWAY TOWNSHIP SCHOOL DISTRICTGALLOWAY TOWNSHIP, ATLANTIC COUNTY, NEW JERSEY

FVHD PROJECT #5195 / NJDOE# 1690-X01-20-1000

FRAYTAK VEISZ HOPKINS DUTHIE, P.C.Architects – Planners1515 Lower Ferry Road, Trenton, NJ 08618Tel: 609.883.7101 - Fax: 609.883.2694 William D. Hopkins, III AIA, LEED AP, No. 21AI01706000

EDWARDS ENGINEERING GROUPCivil Consulting Engineers69 West End AvenueSomerville, NJ 08876William B. Edwards, P.E., No. GE36148

HARRISON - HAMNETT, PCConsulting Structural Engineers40 Knowles StreetPennington, NJ 08534John N. Harrison, P.E., No. 31198

GILLAN & HARTMANN, INC.Consulting Engineers140 Whitaker Avenue, Suite 300Mont Clare, PA 19453Michael S. Gillan, P.E., No. 24GE4470000

TABLE OF CONTENTSSection Title Pages

Advertisement for Bid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

BIDDING INFORMATION

00100 Instructions to Bidders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

Bidder's Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

Bid Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Proposition of Surety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Subcontractor Identification Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Ownership Disclosure Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

Performance Record Certification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

Compliance with New Jersey Prevailing Wage Act. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

Non Collusion Affidavit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Certification of No Material Change of Circumstances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Status of Present Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Political Contribution Disclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

Disclosure of Investment Activities in Iran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Equipment Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sworn Contractor Certification; Qualifications and Credentials . . . . . . . . . . 1

Certification of Insurance Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Exhibit B - Mandatory Equal Employment Opportunity Language . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

Sample Surety Disclosure Statement and Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

Performance Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Payment Bond. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Maintenance Bond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Form AA-201 Initial Project Workforce Report Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Form AA-202 Monthly Project Workforce Report Construction . . . . . . . . . . 1

AIA Document A101 - 2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between

Owner and Contractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

AIA Document A101 - 2017, Exhibit A Insurance and Bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

CONTRACT CONDITIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

00700 AIA Document A201 - 2017, General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 49

Board Resolution Designation of Proprietary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

00800 Supplementary General Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

00850 Contract Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

00860 Laws Governing Public Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

00870 Miscellaneous Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

01010 Summary of Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

01020 Allowances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

01030 Alternate Bids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

01040 Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

FVHD-5195 TOC Page 1 of 5


01050 Alterations, Cutting, Patching and Refinishing Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

01151 Unit Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

01200 Project Meetings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

01400 Material Testing/Quality Control Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

01410 References and Industry Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

01505 Temporary Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

01524 Construction Waste Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

01600 Product Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

01700 Project Closeout Documents and Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

Sample Closeout Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

01800 Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

01900 Guarantees and Warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

01950 Subsoil Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Soil and Foundation Engineering Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 36

PART 2 - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

02000 Site Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02050 Field Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

02100 Selective Site Demolition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

02110 Site Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02200 Earthwork. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

02220 Erosion Control and Sediment Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02221 Trenching, Backfilling and Compaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

02240 Dewatering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

02260 Excavation Support Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02360 Storm Drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

02400 Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

02510 Water Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

02530 Sanitary Sewerage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

02550 Traffic Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02317 Pavement Stripes and Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

02750 Landscaping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 15

02751 Cement Concrete Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 18

02800 Site Restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

02820 Chain Link Fence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

02830 Construction Fencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

04200 Unit Masonry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 19

Mock-up Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

05500 Metal Fabrications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

06650 Solid Polymer Fabrications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

07200 Building Insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

07250 Sprayed-On Fireproofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7



07600 Flashing, Sheet Metal and Roof Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

07840 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

07900 Joint Sealer Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

08110 Hollow Metalwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

08211 Wood Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

08330 Insulated Rolling Service Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

08410 FRP Door and Aluminum Framing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

08520 Aluminum Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

08524 Bullet Resistant Transaction Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

08700 Finish Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 18

08800 Glass and Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

08871 Security Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

09250 Gypsum Drywall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

09300 Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

09510 Acoustical Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

09650 Resilient Flooring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

09685 Carpet Tile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

09900 Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

10100 Dry Markerboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

10161 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

10200 Louvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

10440 Speciality Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

10522 Fire Extinguisher, Cabinets and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

10605 Wire Mesh Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

10670 Metal Shelving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

10731 Canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

10900 Miscellaneous Equipment and Furnishings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 2

11000 General Requirements - Casework and Equipment Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

11011 Casework and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

13341 Metal Building Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

13342 Erection of Metal Building Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

13400 Bullet Resistant Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

PART 3 - STRUCTURAL & MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

05120 Structural Steel Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

05310 Steel Decking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

05400 Miscellaneous Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

PART 4 - PLUMBING & DRAINAGE

220010 General Requirements Plumbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 50

220513 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

220519 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6



220523.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

220523.14 Check Valves for Plumbing Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

220523.15 Gate Valves for Plumbing Piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

220539 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

220548.13 Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

220593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

220716 Plumbing Equipment Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

220719 Plumbing Piping Insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

221116 Domestic Water Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

221123 Facility Natural-Gas Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

221123.21 Inline Domestic-Water Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

221319 Sanitary Waste and Piping Specialities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

221319.13 Sanitary Drains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 4

223400 Fuel-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

22421.13 Commercial Water Closets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

224213.16 Commercial Urinals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

224216.13 Commercial Lavatories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

224216.16 Commercial Sinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

224716 Pressure Water Coolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

PART 5 - HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING

230010 General Requirements HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 49

230513 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

230519 Meters and Gages for HVAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

230523.12 Ball Valves for HVAC Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

230523.14 Check Valves for HVAC Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

230548.13 Vibration Controls for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 27

230713 Duct Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 12

230716 HVAC Equipment Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

230719 HVAC Piping Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 16

230923 Direct Digital Control (DDC) Systems for HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 46

232113 Hydronic Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

232123 Hydronic Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

232300 Refrigerant Piping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

232500 HVAC Water Treatment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

233113 Metal Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 15

233300 Air Duct Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

233346 Flexible Ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3



233423 HVAC Power Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

233600 Air Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

233713.13 Air Diffusers Registers & Grilles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

233723 HVAC Gravity Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

235123 Gas Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 3

235216 Condensing Boilers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

236200 Packaged Compressor and Condenser Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

237313.16 Indoor, Air-Handling Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 11

238127 Ductless Split-System Air-Conditioning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 9

238239.13 Cabinet Unit Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

238239.16 Propeller Unit Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

PART 6 - ELECTRICAL

16521 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

260010 General Requirements Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 50

260050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

260060 Grounding and Bonding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

260120 Conductors and Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

260130 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 10

260140 Wiring Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

260410 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 5

260442 Panelboards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 8

260573 Overcurrent Protective Device Fault Current and Coordination Study. . . . . 1 to 6

260923 Lighting Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

263213 Packaged Engine Generators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

263600 Automatic Transfer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 7

265119 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 6

283111 Fire Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 to 14

END TABLE OF CONTENTS


PART 4 - PLUMBING WORK

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PLUMBING

1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE PLUMBING WORK 1.3 INTENT OF THE PLUMBING CONTRACT DOCUMENT 1.4 PROPOSAL PREPARATION 1.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS 1.8 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES 1.9 TESTS 1.10 CLEANING 1.11 INSTRUCTING OWNER'S PERSONNEL 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1.13 GUARANTEE 1.14 ENTRANCE OF EQUIPMENT 1.15 VISIT TO SITE 1.16 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, RFI(s) 1.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 1.18 SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1.19 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 1.20 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 1.21 CONTINUITY OF INTERIOR BUILDING SERVICE UTILITIES 1.22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND HEATING 1.23 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (GENERAL) 1.24 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1.25 BREECHING, VENT, NATURAL GAS AND EXHAUST PIPING SUBMITTALS 1.26 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S AND SUB-CONTRACTORS LIST, KEYMEN RESUMES 2.2 SUBMITTALS 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.4 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 2.5 VIBRATION ELIMINATION 2.6 NOISE CONTROL 2.7 INSERTS, HANGER SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, FASTENINGS 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 2.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS 2.10 PIPING AND CONDUIT SLEEVES 2.11 SMOKE/FIRESTOPPING (MATERIALS)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METHOD OF PROCEDURE

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 2 June 19, 2020

3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY 3.5 SUPPORTS 3.6 ESCUTCHEONS 3.7 MACHINERY GUARDS 3.8 ROOFING WORK 3.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING 3.10 LUBRICATION 3.11 PLUMBING TRADE - ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION 3.12 ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS 3.13 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 3.14 PIPING AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOORS 3.15 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 3.16 ABANDONMENT, REMOVAL AND RELOCATION 3.17 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (METHODS) 3.18 SUBSURFACE CONCEALED UNKNOWN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS 3.19 CONCRETE PATCHING (PROCEDURE) 3.20 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS 3.21 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.22 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.23 INDEMNIFICATION 3.24 ADDITIONAL PLUMBING TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES 3.25 FORMS

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PLUMBING

1.1 GENERAL

A. The conditions of Divisions 00 and 01 apply to each and every Trade Contractor or other

person or persons supplying any material or labor entering this building and/or site, either

directly or indirectly. In the event of a conflict between Section 220010 and Divisions 00

and 01, the terms of Divisions 00 and 01 shall govern.

B. One Building Trade, the Plumbing Building Trade, will be covered by these General

Requirements Plumbing.

C. For simplicity, this Building Trade will be referred to further herein as the Plumbing Trade

Contractor. The Plumbing Specifications and all Plumbing Drawings, together with all

addenda make-up the Plumbing Contract Documents, and are a part of the “Project

Contract Documents”, as described throughout these specifications.

D. The term “Electrical Trade” as used in the Contract Documents, means the Electrical

Building Trade.

E. The term “indicated” means all information included, detailed, shown and/or implied on

the Contract Documents.

F. The term “existing” is used generally in reference to renovation projects. On new

construction projects, the term “existing” is intended to mean work already in place.

1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE PLUMBING WORK

A. Scope of work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Submittals including product data, shop drawings and samples;

2. Plumbing fixtures and trim;

3. Piping, insulation and valves;

4. Domestic water heaters;

5. Domestic water pumps and trim;

6. Sanitary piping and specialties

7. Equipment start-up;

8. Owner training;

9. Testing, adjusting and balancing of plumbing systems;

10. Preparation of coordination drawings;

11. Preparation of as-built drawings in AutoCad format;

12. Periodic inspection of completed work to confirm compliance with Contract

Documents;

13. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for additional information.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 4 June 19, 2020

1.3 INTENT OF THE PLUMBING CONTRACT DOCUMENT

A. The intent of the Plumbing Contract Documents is to include all items and labor

necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work of the Plumbing Trade

Contractor. The Contract Documents of all Trades are complimentary to each other;

what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Performance of the

Plumbing Trade Contractor is required only to the extent consistent with the Project

Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce

the desired results.

B. It is expressly stipulated that neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall take

precedence over the other, and it is further stipulated that the Architect/Engineer may

interpret or construe the Drawings and Specifications so as to secure in all cases the

result most consistent with the needs and requirements of the work. In the event of such

ambiguity or discrepancy, comply with the higher cost product (material plus labor), the

more stringent requirement, and supply the better quality or greater quantity of work.

1.4 PROPOSAL PREPARATION

A. Prior to submitting a pricing quotation/proposal, proceed as follows, and include the

following:

1. Visit the site, survey, record, confirm and include in the scope of work, all material

and labor necessary to install the equipment and systems indicated. Use the

Contract Documents as diagrammatic in nature, since they are not intended to

show all details which may affect the plumbing bid proposal.

2. Include the work, as applicable, to remove and dispose of plumbing fixtures,

piping, insulation, equipment and appurtenances, not required for new work,

unless otherwise indicated to be abandoned in place.

3. Include all disconnections, removals and temporary provisions required to permit

rigging, installation, connection, testing and operation of the new equipment.

Include all such provisions whether or not shown, detailed or specified within

technical sections of the Contract Documents.

4. Include in the work, providing the labor of Keymen, including, but not limited to

the following:

a. One Project Manager;

b. One Project Foreman.

5. Foreman must refine the detail, layout, coordination and fit of all of the plumbing

equipment. Plan all disconnections, removals, offsets, temporary provisions, as

required, to fit the new equipment into the space, and as required to accommodate

maintenance accessibility and service access.

6. Project Manager must maintain and submit for approval, a written project

schedule, on a weekly basis.

7. All Project Manager must organize, administrate, control and log the RFI process

for their respective trade. Where applicable, submit all RFI(s) for master RFI log

maintained by Lead/Prime Contractor.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 5 June 19, 2020

B. In preparing a Bid Price:

1. Thoroughly review and confirm all existing conditions and Contract Document

information. Make note in writing of any exceptions, misunderstandings, unclear

areas, unclear directions, and any aspects which will prohibit completion of the

work, in total. Failing to supply such notice, all bidders will be accountable for

having accepted all conditions at the site which affect their work and their costs.

By submitting a bid price, all Trade Contractors certify that the Contract Documents

have been thoroughly reviewed and are sufficient for construction, and that the

bidding Trade Contractors have adequate information to establish and determine

their responsibility for materials, methods, costs, and schedule for their work.

2. Incorporate all requirements of all sections of the Contract Documents.

3. Include the following with the Manufacturer’s and Sub-Contractor’s Lists:

a. The name and telephone number of all Sub-Contractors.

b. The manufacturer and model numbers of all equipment proposed by the

bidder and as listed on all of the equipment schedules and specified in the

Contract Documents.

1.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

A. The use of asbestos, PCB’s or any material or product containing hazardous materials in

the performance of this contract is not permitted. Certify, in writing, that no hazardous

material or product containing a hazardous material, has been furnished or installed.

1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings to include under each item all materials,

apparatus and labor necessary to properly install, equip, adjust and put into perfect

operation the respective portions of the installations specified and to so interconnect the

various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and properly operating

whole.

B. Any apparatus, machinery, small items not mentioned in detail which are necessary to

complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner and in

compliance with the requirements stated, implied or intended must be furnished and/or

installed without extra cost to the Project. This includes all materials, devices or methods

peculiar to the machinery, apparatus or systems furnished and/or installed by the

Plumbing Trade Contractor.

C. In referring to drawings, figured dimensions take precedence over scale measurements.

Verify all wall locations, ceiling heights, elevations, dimensions, etc. on the architectural

drawings, where applicable. Discrepancies must be referred to the Engineer for decision.

Certify and verify all dimensions, routings and layouts in the field and on the

coordination drawings before ordering material or commencing work.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 6 June 19, 2020

D. Any work called for in the specifications, but not mentioned or shown on the drawings,

or called for on the drawings, but not mentioned in the specifications, must be furnished

and/or installed as though called for in both.

E. When any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, such

as "the pump" such reference is deemed to apply to as many such devices as required to

complete the installation.

F. The term "Provide" means "Furnish and Install". Neither term will be used generally in

these specifications, but will be assumed. The term "Furnish" means to obtain and deliver

to the job site for installation by other trades.

1.7 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS

A. The entire plumbing system in all and/or in part must conform to all pertinent laws,

ordinances and regulations of all bodies having jurisdiction, notwithstanding anything in

these drawings or specifications to the contrary.

B. Pay all fees and obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by any authority

having jurisdiction in connection with the work under this contract.

C. Electrical work performed by the Plumbing Trade Contractor must comply with the

requirements of the National Electrical Code, NFPA and other boards and departments

having local jurisdiction. Obtain and pay for an Independent Inspection by an authorized

Electrical Inspection Agency (EIA) and by local, municipal and state approving agencies.

Inspections performed by the local inspector do not substitute for obtaining Independent

Inspection by an authorized independent Electrical Inspection Agency.

1. Qualifications: The EIA is to be an independent company from the Plumbing Trade

Contractor, registered with the State and a Master certified member of the

International Association of Electrical Inspectors.

2. Prepare and submit for review and comment to the Engineer a schedule of

inspections to be performed in coordination with the construction schedule.

3. At a minimum, inspections shall be performed at the Rough-in, Progress and Final

levels.

4. The EIA shall submit written report for each level of inspection to the Engineer to

document compliance with current code requirements, including deficiencies and

associated required remedial action.

1.8 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES

A. Apply for and obtain services from Utility Companies and municipalities. All charges for

which Utility Companies and municipalities must be reimbursed must be paid for by the

Plumbing Trade Contractor at no additional cost to the Project.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 7 June 19, 2020

1.9 TESTS

A. The following requirements are supplementary to tests specified for individual equipment

or systems in other specification sections. Give written notice of date of test in ample

time to all concerned.

B. Concealed or insulated work must remain uncovered until all required tests have been

completed; but if construction schedule requires, arrange for partial tests on portions of

systems as approved. If a Prime Contractor covers or directs a Sub-Contractor to cover

plumbing work prior to completing the required tests, the Prime Contractor is responsible

for any additional costs related to completing the required tests.

C. As soon as conditions permit, conduct preliminary tests of equipment to ascertain

compliance with specified requirements. Make needed changes, adjustments and/or

replacements as preliminary tests may indicate, prior to acceptance tests.

D. Conduct pressure, performance and operating tests as specified or required for each

system or piece of equipment installed, modified or affected under this contract in

presence of the Engineer or Owner as well as a representative of agencies having

jurisdiction.

E. Obtain Certificates of Approval and/or Acceptance as specified or required in compliance

with regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work will not be deemed complete

until such Certificates have been delivered to the Engineer.

F. Prove conclusively, by testing, that Plumbing systems operate properly, efficiently and

quietly in accordance with intent of drawings, specifications and most widely used

construction practices.

1.10 CLEANING

A. Be responsible for the following:

1. Removal of all lumber, refuse, metal, piping and debris from site resulting from

plumbing work.

2. Cleaning drippings created by the plumbing work, from finished work of other

Trades.

3. Cleaning, polishing, waxing of plumbing work as required.

B. After testing, and acceptance of all work by the Engineer and the Owner, thoroughly

clean all plumbing equipment and material to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.11 INSTRUCTING OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. After all tests and adjustments have been made, fully instruct the representatives of the

Owner in all details of operation of the equipment installed under the Plumbing Contract

Documents.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 8 June 19, 2020

B. Operate equipment for sufficient length of time to satisfy Engineer that requirements of

Contract Documents have been fulfilled.

C. Prepare digital recording of each Owner training session on USB thumb Drive.

1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Provide in accordance with Division 01.

B. Submit digital format PDF of Operating and Maintenance Instructions to the Engineer for

review and processing.

C. Upon completion of the Engineer’s review and processing of digital format PDF of the

Operating and Maintenance Instructions, submit three (3) copies of the final version of

the printed instructions to the Owner. Bind instructions in separate, hardback, 3-ring

loose leaf binders.

D. Prepare instruction books by sections and include detailed Operating and Maintenance

Instructions for all components of all systems, including wiring, and piping diagrams

necessary for clarity. Identify the covers with the name of the project and the words

"Operating and Maintenance Instructions - Plumbing".

E. Each section must have labeled tabs and be clearly marked with equipment or system

name and contain detailed parts list data, ordering information therefore and the name,

address and telephone number of the closest supply source.

F. All instructional data must be neatly and completely prepared to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

G. Provide complete copy of all warranties in separate tab with the binder.

H. Provide copies of the as-built drawings in the manuals.

I. Provide copy of each submittal for each piece of equipment on the project, complete

with all tag numbers, Contractor’s Transmittal Cover Sheet and Engineer’s final Submittal

Review Sheet.

J. Provide USB Drive of Owner training sessions with the manuals.

K. Provide complete copy of the final Plumbing Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report.

L. All listed items are to be included in the O&M submission for the Engineer’s review.

Partial submissions are NOT acceptable.

1.13 GUARANTEE

A. All material, equipment and workmanship must be in first class operating condition in

every respect at time of acceptance by Owner. Acceptance by the Owner will be by

letter written to the Plumbing Trade Contractor.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 9 June 19, 2020

B. Unconditionally guarantee in writing all materials, equipment and workmanship for a

period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner. During the guarantee period,

repair or replace, at the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s expense, any materials, equipment

or workmanship in which defects may develop and provide free service for all equipment

and systems involved in the contract during this guarantee period. Beneficial use of any

system by the any of the Trade Contractors during construction does not constitute

acceptance by the Owner. Time period of this beneficial use cannot be included in the

guarantee period.

C. Guarantee must also include restoration to its original condition of all adjacent work that

is disturbed in fulfilling this guarantee.

D. All such repairs and/or replacements must be made without delay and at the convenience

of the Owner.

E. Guarantees furnished by Trade Contractors and/or equipment manufacturers must be

counter-signed by the related Trade Contractor for joint and/or individual responsibility

for subject item.

F. Manufacturers’ equipment guarantees or warranties extending beyond the guarantee

period described in item B above must be transferred to the Owner along with the Trade

Contractor's guarantees.

1.14 ENTRANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Determine the method of equipment entrance during initial site visit prior to bidding. Do

not scale building openings, door widths, and equipment or component sizes off the

drawings. Determine sizes from site measurements and the equipment manufacturer.

Include cost of equipment manufacturer's knockdown, use of field assembled equipment,

field assembly, all work required for access, removals, replacements, general

construction, and the like, as required. During preparation of submittals, verify whether

knocked-down or pre-disassembled equipment have been proposed all to the extent

required to permit entry of equipment to final location. Verify that the use of field

assembled (not pre-assembled) equipment complies with manufacturer’s warranty,

guarantee, listings and requirements.

B. Perform all necessary rigging required for completion of plumbing work.

C. Deliver products to the site properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels and other information needed for identification. Deliver

products and equipment to the site properly weatherproofed.

D. The Trade Contractor who furnishes or purchases the product or equipment is responsible

to provide and maintain protection from the weather, dust, dirt, construction debris, etc.

until the project is complete.

E. For all products and equipment which, when installed, have an opening into the building

must be provided with a plywood cover, or similar protection, to prevent debris, rain, etc.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 10 June 19, 2020

from entering the building. The Trade Contractor who installs the product or equipment

is responsible for such protection beginning at the time of installation.

1.15 VISIT TO SITE

A. Due to the nature of the work involved under these Contract Documents, all bidders are

recommended to thoroughly examine the site. Coordinate and schedule all site visits

with the Owner.

B. Thoroughly review Contract Documents prior to visiting the site, take Contract

Documents to site and thoroughly explore to any extent necessary, the existing

conditions as relating to fulfilling the requirements of these Contract Documents.

C. If discrepancies are noted between requirements of Contract Documents and existing

conditions, Trade Contractors must so indicate to Engineer during bidding period and

receive clarification before bidding. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in

Engineer's interpretation during the construction period such that the Engineer's decision

will be final and binding as the sole interpreter of the contract requirements.

D. Extras will not be considered for any work relating to connections with existing systems

or adaptability of new systems to existing structures.

E. Submission of proposals will be considered evidence that Trade Contractors have

complied with the requirements of this Article.

1.16 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, RFI(s)

A. Manage RFI(s) in a formal manner. Preparation and submission must comply with the

process specified herein to be of maximum benefit to the project. RFI(s) which do not

comply with this process will be returned without comment.

B. All RFI(s):

1. Must be submitted in written form to the party designated at the construction phase

kick-off meeting;

2. Must be consecutively numbered, dated, and logged as directed, during the kick-off

meeting;

3. Those which are follow-up RFI(s), must use the same RFI number, with a sequential

submission number;

4. Must list the RFI number of any reference RFI(s) used in the narrative;

5. Must present: background; related drawings; specification articles; room, space

locations (as designated on Contract Documents including wing, column line

designation, floor designation, and/or north, south, and the like), and must be

presented as complete, clearly written thoughts, in legibly printed or typed form;

6. Must be completed by the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s Designated Project

Foreman, under the control and overview of the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s

Project Manager;

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 11 June 19, 2020

7. Must include Plumbing Trade Contractor’s Project Foreman’s suggested resolution

to RFI;

8. Must evidence a high level of fluency with the Contract Documents, all job

progress correspondence, all Addenda, all Construction Bulletins, and specifically

the Mechanical/Electrical Specifications including: Section 210010; the sections of

Division 21; Division 22; Division 23; Division 26; Division 27; Division 28; and

special system and equipment divisions of the specification Divisions 02 thru 33

inclusive.

C. The Plumbing Trade Contractor’s designated Project Manager must demonstrate

familiarity with and responsibility for all RFI(s) prepared by the Project Foreman and must

periodically submit an initialed log of RFI(s) signifying control of RFI(s) relating to

specification and job scope issues.

D. Issues relating to job scope, work included, methods and means which are either clearly

discernable from the Contract Documents and/or clearly the responsibility of the

Plumbing Trade Contractor must be answered by Plumbing Trade Contractor’s Project

Manager and resolved between the Foreman and Project Manager prior to resorting to

written RFI(s). The work of the Project Manager must evidence: fluency with the

methods and means anticipated by the Plumbing Trade Contractor during the bid phase

to plan and complete the work; fluency with the Contract Documents, and all

administrative issues related thereto.

E. Items or issues which relate to non-compliance to associated codes or regulations must

reference code interpretations or the published adopted code or regulation. The

reference must be either an excerpt of the code or regulation, published addenda to the

code or regulation, a formal interpretation written by a representative of the associated

agency, or letter of non-compliance from the Authority Having Jurisdiction. All cited

code requirements must include the applicable code title, code version or date, and code

section number designation. If the RFI does not contain the required information, the RFI

will be returned without comment.

1.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Prepare reproducible (paper) and electronic (cd) record documents in AUTOCAD .dwg

format (Version 2000 or later) in accordance with the requirements in Division 01. Use

commercial CAD drafting service if Plumbing Trade Contractor does not have CAD

capabilities in-house. As an option, if requested by the Plumbing Trade Contractor, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the Plumbing Contract Drawings may be

provided by the Engineer at a cost of $55.00, billable to the requesting Contractor. In

addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate the following installed

conditions:

1. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance

located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, and the like). Valve

location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and

horizontal locations of underground piping, and the like.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent

building lines and annotated with permanent equipment number approved by

Owner. Include Code and equipment service clearances.

3. Approved substitutions, Addenda and Bulletin Contract Modifications, and actual

equipment and materials installed

B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in

which the project is located, as specified in Division 01, to record the locations and

invert elevations of the underground plumbing work.

1.18 SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. After work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and prior to

final acceptance tests, each Trade Contractor must have manufacturers or their

authorized agents of the equipment installed, completely check their equipment and put

equipment into proper operation. In each case, the respective Trade Contractor must

have the manufacturers thoroughly check the complete installation of the equipment,

furnished by the manufacturer, for proper and correct operation under the service

intended.

B. Six months after final acceptance of the work under the Contract Documents, each of the

Trade Contractors must have the manufacturers again check their equipment for proper

operation and lubrication. Coincidentally, these Trade Contractors must assure that the

Owner is properly instructed in the servicing of the equipment.

C. Prior to expiration of the guarantee period, each Trade Contractor must check all

equipment, materials and systems for which he is responsible, make necessary

adjustments and/or replacements, and leave systems in first class operating condition.

1.19 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping necessary for completion of plumbing

work. All excavation is considered classified.

B. Remove from premises or deposit as directed by Engineer all material excavated and not

required or suitable for backfilling.

C. Carefully remove and store topsoil, shrubbery and sod until underground work is

complete and trenches are backfilled and then re-install. Replace any damaged items to

the satisfaction of the Engineer.

D. Allow adequate cover over piping and conduit in trenches as applicable. Trench walls

must be perpendicular to the top of piping and conduits and trench bottoms must be

instrument graded in the direction of flow as required. Earth must be scooped out under

pipe hubs to provide a solid bearing for the pipe, duct or conduit on undisturbed earth.

Cinder fill, stones or bricks beneath piping are prohibited. Pipe, and conduits less than 6-

inches in outside diameter which do not require sloping, shall have hard trench bottoms

and shall be supported on undisturbed subgrade. Trench bottoms for sloping utilities,

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 13 June 19, 2020

pipes, and conduits over 6-inches in outside diameter shall be excavated 6-inches deeper

than elevation and a 6-inch thick tamped bedding shall be installed. Bedding shall be

naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and

natural or crushed sand; ASTM D2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve

and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Provide sheathing, shoring and bracing necessary to complete excavation and backfilling

work and exercise every precaution necessary to prevent accident, injury or death to any

human and damage to property of others. Remove all debris, sheathing, shoring and

bracing upon completion of work.

F. It is the responsibility of each Trade Contractor to check with the various Utility

Companies and make the necessary arrangements to avoid damage to their property.

Each Trade Contractor is responsible for damage during excavation to existing

underground structures including, but not limited to electric, structural, piping or

equipment. Such damage must be repaired promptly without cost to the Project. Do not

dig until all underground utilities are identified and located.

G. Backfill after inspection and approval. Backfill must be made with clean earth, free from

rocks, frozen particles, debris or other foreign materials. Deposit in uniform layers not

over six inches (6") thick with each layer mechanically tamped before the next layer is

applied. When approved backfill material is not available from the site, each Trade

Contractor, at no additional cost to the project, must provide additional select backfill to

complete installation. Partial backfill on piping leaving all joints exposed is mandatory for

all underground gas and underground domestic water systems. Final backfill only after

testing procedures have been approved.

H. All trenches that pass under wall foundations must be backfilled with lean concrete, full

height, directly under wall footing, and at a 1:1 slope away from wall or column footing.

Trenches that are parallel with and deeper than wall foundations must be backfilled with

lean concrete on a 1:1 slope away from the bottom of the wall or column footing.

I. Perform all cutting and patching to driveways, sidewalks, curbs, bituminous paving,

walls, and the like, required by performance of excavation and backfilling. Install and

maintain temporary paving as directed by Engineer. Make repairs to sidewalks in

complete blocks, partial patching will not be acceptable. Provide all materials for

patching in strict accordance with applicable Articles of Divisions 01 through 33 of the

Contract Specifications. All patching to match adjacent construction.

J. Where rock is encountered during installation of underground piping systems, carry

trenches to a point six inches (6") below invert of pipe and provide a six inch (6") layer of

crushed stone or gravel as a cushion.

K. All excavation work must include all pumping equipment, materials and labor necessary

to keep all excavations free of water. Provide well points as required with disposition of

water as directed by Architect/Engineer.

L. Provide suitable indemnity for all accidents to humans, animals or equipment caused by

excavating and backfilling work. Provide suitable guards, barricades, red lanterns, flares

and take the necessary precaution for an approved and safe installation. All trenches

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 14 June 19, 2020

must be backfilled at the end of each working day. Where a trench must be left open,

provide coverings of adequate size and strength over entire open area.

M. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6-inches (150

mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility,

with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by

metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil and dangerous materials.

3. Blue: Water systems.

4. Green: Sewer systems.

N. Trade Contractors shall engage the services of a Utility Identification Sub-Contractor to

identify all existing underground utilities in the path of the proposed trench excavation. It

shall be the Utility Identification Sub-Contractor's sole responsibility to search,

investigate, test and identify existing underground utilities such as, but not limited to the

following: gas piping, water piping, steam piping, condensate piping, electrical lines,

sanitary piping, storm water piping, data, telephone, fiber optics and any other utility

service, piping, lines or trenches. Before excavation can begin, the Trade Contractors

shall provide all utility data concerning the underground utilities to Design Professional,

and Owner. Data shall be in the form of a scaled drawing of the proposed excavation

with all utilities clearly indicated.

1.20 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES

A. Generally, no actions can be taken by the Plumbing Trade Contractor that will interrupt

any of the existing building services for these buildings or any other building until

previously arranged and scheduled with the Engineer and Owner.

B. Should any service be interrupted by the Plumbing Trade Contractor, immediately

provide all labor, including overtime if necessary, and all material and equipment

necessary for restoration of such service, at no additional cost to the Project.

1.21 CONTINUITY OF INTERIOR BUILDING SERVICE UTILITIES

A. For the purposes of this specification section, “Building Service Utilities” include, but are

not limited to:

1. Exterior: electrical; domestic water; fire protection water; sanitary; storm; chilled

water; space heating water; fuel lines; communication cable; fire alarm; remote

metering lines; telemetry lines; and the like;

2. Heating piping systems, complete;

3. Chilled water piping systems, complete;

4. Heating and process steam/condensate systems, complete;

5. Ductwork systems, complete;

6. Medical gas systems, complete;

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 15 June 19, 2020

7. Fire protection systems, complete;

8. Control systems, complete;

9. Plumbing, drainage and storm systems, complete;

10. Process piping systems, complete;

11. Electrical conduit and wiring systems, complete;

12. Electrical lighting and wiring devices, complete;

13. Electrical fire alarm and security systems, complete;

14. Electrical communication systems, complete.

B. Building Service Utilities are defined for the purposes of this project, and as used in these

specifications as:

1. TYPE A Utility System Services. New Internal Building Services, serving: new

and/or modified system functions; new and/or modified equipment;

2. TYPE B Utility System Services. Existing Internal Building Services serving:

unmodified systems; unmodified equipment; building spaces for which mechanical

and electrical systems, and internal operational equipment have not been modified

by this project;

3. TYPE C Utility System Services. Existing Utility Systems Building Services, external

to the individual building, or buildings, addressed by the work of this project;

4. TYPE D Utility System Services. New Utility Systems Building Services, external to

the individual building, or buildings, addressed by the Work of this project.

C. Plan work and schedule to prevent interruption of TYPE B, and/or TYPE C Utility System

Services. Refer to the “Scope and Objectives of the Plumbing Work,” of this Section for a

description of: unmodified systems, unmodified equipment; spaces wherein mechanical

and electrical systems are unmodified; and Utility System Services external to the

individual building or buildings addressed by the work of this project.

D. Plan work and schedule installation and connections of TYPE A and TYPE D Utilities to

minimize or prevent interruption of TYPE B, and or TYPE C Utility System Services. Refer

to “General Requirements Plumbing,” Article “Scope and Objectives of the Plumbing

Work.”

E. The work required for continuity of these systems on this project includes, but is not

limited to, providing all labor and material required for: site investigation/verification;

disconnect; removal; rerouting; reconnection; as-built drawing documentation; testing

and check out of mechanical and electrical services serving equipment which are

implied to be, or specifically indicated to be, continued in operation.

F. All materials required for relocation work must comply with these specifications.

Carefully review all phasing drawings, all Construction Trade drawings, and complete all

necessary and prudent site visits to become familiar with all existing building operations,

systems and equipment which may be continued, independent of the work of this

project, and include all required relocation work described in this section.

1.22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND HEATING

A. Refer to Division 01 of these specifications.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 16 June 19, 2020

1.23 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (GENERAL)

A. Furnish and install a material or a combination of materials to form an effective barrier

against the spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to maintain the integrity of the “fire

and/or smoke” rated construction. Refer to Division 07 of these specifications. Fire and

smoke rated construction is identified on the Architectural Drawings. Provide

firestopping in the following locations:

1. Pipe and conduit penetrations through above grade floor slabs and through “fire

and/or smoke”-rated partitions and fire walls.

2. Penetrations of vertical shafts including, but not limited to pipe chases, duct chases,

elevator shafts, and utility chutes.

3. Other locations where indicated or required.

B. Prepare submittals and submit for approval. Include manufacturer's descriptive data,

typical details, installation instructions and the fire/smoke test data and/or report as

appropriate for the time rated construction and location. The fire/smoke test data must

include a certification by a nationally recognized testing authority that the material has

been tested in accordance with ASTM E 814, or UL 1479 fire tests.

C. Deliver materials in the original unopened packages or containers showing name of the

manufacturer and the brand name. Store materials off the ground, and protect from

damage and exposure to elements. Damaged, deteriorated or outdated shelf life

materials shall not be used and must be removed from the site.

1.24 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. The HVAC Trade Contractor will initiate preparation of coordination drawings, control

original reproducibles, collect, organize and facilitate the work/input of General

Construction Trade Contractor and all other building trades, as applicable, relative to the

100% final submission of the coordination drawings. Coordination drawings will be

prepared in accordance with Division 01, to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing

major elements, components, and systems of equipment and materials in relationship

with other systems, installations, and building components. Use proposed equipment

submittals, which include certified dimensions, service clearances, etc., to assist in

preparation of the coordination drawings. If equipment is submitted for review after

completion of the coordination drawings and rejected during the submittal review

process, because the equipment fails to meet the project specifications, the HVAC Trade

Contractor is responsible to revise the coordination drawings and layout the work using

equipment which meets the project specifications. HVAC Trade Contractor will

designate all specified return air plenums, locations where space is limited for installation

and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to

the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials. The following

shall be included:

a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 17 June 19, 2020

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal,

filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic

maintenance.

c. Equipment connections and support details.

d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

g. Valve stem movement.

h. Service clearance for equipment behind access doors.

i. Location of structural columns, beams and supports.

2. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction.

3. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls and

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and

inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other

ceiling mounted items.

5. The foregoing information and coordination work must be provided by the

applicable Trade Contractor using the coordination drawings as initiated by the

HVAC Trade Contractor.

6. The HVAC Trade Contractor must submit completed coordination drawings for

record purposes, not for technical review and approval, but as proof that the

coordination drawings have been completed. The coordination drawings must be

completed and submitted for record in advance of submission of sheet metal shop

drawings.

B. Coordinate with, and provide the HVAC Trade Contractor, all plumbing system and

equipment information, locations, and clearances required, to prepare the coordination

drawings.

1.25 BREECHING, VENT, NATURAL GAS AND EXHAUST PIPING SUBMITTALS

A. Sizes specified for materials such as gas vents, natural gas piping, breeching, and

emergency generator exhaust piping are included in the Contract Documents and

intended for bidding purposes. Actual sizes required for approved system performance

depend on the actual length of runs, routing, bends, offsets, fittings and elbows, planned

by the Plumbing Trade Contractor during layout of the Plumbing work and must account

for existing/new field conditions.

B. Submit product data and shop drawings, as applicable to each Trade Contractor, for the

following; vent piping, gas piping, breeching, emergency generator coolant piping, and

exhaust piping. Submittals shall indicate all aspects of the work layout including:

materials; length; routing; bends; offsets; fittings; mufflers; elbows; and compliance with

equipment manufacturer’s directions (specifications, limitations, sizing tables, etc.

required to meet such specifications). Attach copies of manufacturer’s specifications and

performance tables to required equipment submittals.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 18 June 19, 2020

C. Processing of vent, gas, breeching and emergency generator piping submittals and piping

layout shop drawings will be handled in a manner identical to sheet metal shop drawings

(conformance to SMACNA recommendations for example) which require the Plumbing

Trade Contractor to conform to accepted standards relative to sizing, pressure drop limits,

manufacturer’s recommendations, NFPA, and Fuel Gas Code.

D. Submit Manufacturer’s or Trade Contractor’s confirming calculations of pressure drops,

and/or sizing resulting from all of the variables controlled by the Plumbing Trade

Contractor during layout of the Plumbing work for review by the Engineer as part of the

submittal review process.

1.26 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION

A. Upon final completion of all work, each Trade Contractor must provide a notarized letter

on Corporate letterhead, executed by a Corporate Officer, or Company Partner, stating

that the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents,

Addenda, Bulletins, Trade Contractor’s Punch List items and Architect’s/Engineer’s

Construction Observation Report(s). Final Payment will not be approved until the

notarized letter has been provided. Refer to the following sample letter.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 19 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S AND SUB-CONTRACTORS LIST, KEYMEN RESUMES

A. Before ordering any material or equipment unit, and not later than ten (10) working days

after signing of contracts, submit a list of Manufacturers, Sub-Contractors and Suppliers

showing make, type, manufacturer’s name and trade designation of all materials, and

equipment, proposed for use under this contract. Prepare list by reference to

specifications. Identify all long lead submittals which will require an expedited submittal

review.

B. Refer to the Article “Proposal Preparation,” in this section. Specifically designate the

labor force required of the Plumbing Trade Contractor. As part of the mobilization phase

of the work, submit resumes for each Keyman including the Project Manager and Project

Foreman.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 20 June 19, 2020

C. These lists, when approved, will be supplementary to specifications, and no variations

therefrom will be permitted except with the approval of the Engineer.

D. Prepare the list using the “PROPOSED MANUFACTURERS AND SUB-CONTRACTORS

LIST” located at the end of this section.

E. Submittals will not be processed until the requirements of this Article are satisfactorily

completed.

2.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide digital submissions (.pdf format) for all material and equipment as noted in

Proposed Manufacturer's and Sub-Contractors List, except where indicated otherwise

herein.

1. Prior to submission of product data, shop drawings, and samples, notify the

Engineer/Architect of any site conditions differing from those indicated or specified.

2. Prior to submission of product data, shop drawings and samples to the design

professional, the Plumbing Trade Contractor shall submit all submittals which

require electrical power to the Project Electrical Trade Contractor for the Plumbing

Trade Contractor’s and Electrical Trade Contractor’s coordination and review.

Electrical Trade Contractor shall provide approval of electrical power requirements

for the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s proposed equipment.

3. All submittals of equipment requiring electrical power must be accompanied by the

“PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS’ COORDINATION OF

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TRANSMITTAL COVER

SHEET” located at the end of this section. Submittals without this Cover Sheet or

an incomplete Cover Sheet will be rejected without review.

4. All submittals must be accompanied by the “PLUMBING CONTRACTOR’S

TRANSMITTAL COVER SHEET” located at the end of this section. Submittals

without this cover sheet or with an incomplete cover sheet, will be rejected without

review.

5. All submittals must be accompanied by the “PLUMBING SUBMITTAL LOG”,

located at the end of this section. Submit log after final acceptance of the proposed

Manufacturer’s and Sub-Contractor’s list. Revise and update the log with each

submittal. Submittals without these logs or without an updated log will be rejected

without review.

6. Specifically annotate and sign all exceptions, deletions and additions that vary from

the Project Contract Documents. Failing to provide signed annotations for all

deletions and additions, recognize and accept that Contract Documents will

govern, and will be used to resolve disputes.

B. Prepare submittals by careful reference to: drawings and specifications; preparatory

layout of all work; coordination with all proposed equipment; coordination with related

submittals and the work of all other Trade Contractors; space requirements; and TYPE A,

TYPE B, TYPE C, and TYPE D Utilities defined in this Section. A review of such

submittals by the Engineer/Architect, which include drawings, schedules, and catalog

cuts provided by the Trade Contractors, their Sub-Contractors, manufacturers, and

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 21 June 19, 2020

vendors, shall not relieve the Trade Contractors from the responsibility for correcting all

errors of any sort in the submittals, either identified or undetected by such review.

C. Regularly provide and update submittal log sheets listing submittal number, product,

applicable specification section, dates of submittal and receipt and status. Identify each

submittal by Job Name, log number and reference to applicable Specification Article

number.

D. All equipment submittals must include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Manufacturers' catalog designation, photographs and specifications.

2. Full electrical data, including specifically, electrical characteristics.

3. Full General Construction data, including operating weights, dimensional data

including service access space. Data shall be given to the General Construction

Trade Contractor, where applicable, for use in setting steel, supports, and

attachments.

4. Full wiring diagrams, including clearly identified power connections and control

connections. Data and diagrams shall be given to the Electrical Trade Contractor

and Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Trade Sub-Contractor for their use and

inclusion into their submittals.

5. Listing of specific performance, calculations and data.

6. Dimensions, capacities, ratings, material and finish.

7. Complete the submittal by listing all available options, accessories, configurations

and materials, and legibly strike out with single thin line all proposed deletions.

Clearly signify whether each and every manufacturer's option, accessory,

configuration and material choice is included and which is excluded by the

submission.

8. Annotation of equipment, devices, systems as indicated by the Contract Documents

(WC-1, LAV-2, etc.).

9. Certification of testing by agencies such as ETL, ARI, UL, etc.

10. Such other detailed information as required for proper evaluation.

E. Review Time:

1. Allow two (2) weeks after Engineer’s receipt for the Engineer's processing of each

submittal, exclusive of Owner’s, or other’s review in the processing chain. Allow a

longer time period where processing must be delayed for coordination with

subsequent submittals.

F. Submittals for electric motor starters must include a tabulation listing the following:

1. The equipment the starter is intended to control.

2. Horsepower and starter size.

3. Voltage.

4. Phase.

5. Full load amperes.

6. The manufacturer's number or type.

7. Heater numbers and amperage.

8. Quantity of auxiliary contacts required by ATC and fire alarm systems.

9. Pushbutton arrangement.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 22 June 19, 2020

10. Pilot light arrangement if applicable.

G. Submittals for automatic temperature controls must be coordinated with: 1) all plumbing

equipment manufacturers’ and vendors’ submittals including review of plumbing

submittals by ATC Sub-Contractor for conformance with sequences of operation for each

piece of equipment; 2) all electrical requirements of ATC System with Electrical Trade

Contractor; and 3) all fire and safety requirements of the Fire Alarm System. ATC

submittals shall include copies of all wiring diagrams for all plumbing equipment with

points of connections clearly identified. ATC submittals shall not be developed and

submitted until Plumbing Trade Contractor provides all equipment submittals for review.

H. The Engineer’s recommendation of acceptance of the equipment proposed by the

Plumbing Trade Contractor is conditional upon the Plumbing Trade Contractor fulfilling

all obligations of the Contract Documents. By furnishing the proposed equipment, the

Plumbing Trade Contractor acknowledges compliance with all of the following:

1. Field layout is completed and planning of proposed equipment has coordinated

with all related submittals, related trades and space requirements.

2. The Plumbing Trade Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittals prior to

submission. Provide all submittals with a signed approval stamp, signifying the

following: 1) all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials,

dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data have been verified; 2) the

Engineer/Architect has been notified of all site conditions which affect the work,

and which require design resolution, as opposed to resolution by trade decisions;

3) all items are approved by the Plumbing Trade Contractor, and have been

coordinated and checked with other applicable submittals, and contract

requirements; 4) submission is clearly marked to indicate which manufacturer’s

options are provided and which are not provided for the proposed equipment; and

5) manufacturers and/or equipment suppliers have been given a set of the contract

documents for their review and use as the basis of the submittals.

3. Any and all exceptions requested by the Plumbing Trade Contractor are provided

in writing with the submittals. All exceptions, deletions and additions that vary

from the Contract Documents have been specifically annotated and initialed.

Failing to provide initialed annotations for all deletions and additions, the Plumbing

Trade Contractor accepts the condition that the Contract Documents will govern,

and will be used to resolve disputes.

4. Submittals without the Plumbing Trade Contractor's signed stamp of approval will

be returned without review. Initialed approval stamps are not acceptable.

5. The Engineer’s acceptance of the proposed equipment constitutes the Engineer’s

formal approval that the engineering performance and operational utility

requirements, of the proposed equipment, match the Engineer’s specified and

designed performance requirements. By entering into these Contracts, the Trade

Contractors agree that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer

that the Trade Contractors understand the design concept and that they

demonstrate their understanding by indicating which materials and equipment they

intends to furnish, install and use.

I. Secure submittals smaller than 8-1/2 x 11 to paper of this size.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 23 June 19, 2020

J. Material and equipment fabricated, furnished and/or installed or used without the

Engineer’s review are subject to rejection by the Engineer.

K. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall prepare 1/4" minimum scale sheet metal shop

drawings at the earliest practicable time and coordinate these drawings with the other

Trade Contractors prior to erection or fabrication of the sheet metal work in order to

effect timely resolution of all conflicts with the work of other Trade Contractors. Sheet

metal shop drawings shall cover all metal work on the project, including but not limited

to environmental air, exhaust air, make-up air, and products of combustion venting

systems. Designate on sheet metal shop drawings all specified return air plenums, fire

dampers, and smoke dampers. Designate all transfer air openings specified under

General Construction, by reference to general construction drawings detailing fire rated

assemblies, and smoke dampers. Refer to Article, "Coordination Drawings," in Part 1 of

this section

L. Corrections or comments made on submittals during review by the Engineer do not

relieve the Plumbing Trade Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents. Such review will be only for general conformance with the design

concept, and the information given in the Contract Documents and does not include

review of quantities, dimensions, sizing, pressure drops, weights or gauges, fabrication

processes, construction methods, coordination with the work of other trades, or

construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Plumbing

Trade Contractor. Review of a specific item does not indicate acceptance of an

assembly of which the item is a component. The Engineer is not responsible for any

deviations from the Contract Documents that are not clearly noted by the Plumbing Trade

Contractor. The Engineer will not review partial submissions or those for which

submissions for correlated items have not been received. The Plumbing Trade Contractor

is responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities, clearance, and dimensions;

selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating work with all

other Trades, and performing his work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

M. All submittals must be able to be reproduced. The Plumbing Trade Contractor is

responsible for all reproduction and distribution to the General Construction Trade

Contractor and all other Trade Contractors as applicable.

N. If requested for the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s use in the preparation of submittals, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the Plumbing Contract Drawings may be

provided by the Engineer, after receipt of a signed indemnification agreement, at a cost of

$55.00, billable to the Plumbing Trade Contractor.

O. For additional requirements regarding submittals, refer to Article “Additional Trade

Contractor Paid fees and Expenses” in Part 3 of this section.

2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment must be new and conform to the grade, quality and

standards specified herein.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 24 June 19, 2020

B. All equipment offered under these specifications is limited to products regularly produced

and recommended for service ratings in accordance with engineering data or other

comprehensive literature made available to the public and in effect at the time of opening

of bids. Testing agency seals, decals and/or nameplate shall be attached to and visible on

all equipment.

C. Items such as valves, motors, starting equipment, vibration isolating devices, and all other

equipment and material, where applicable and practicable, must each be of one

manufacturer.

D. Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for type and

capacity of each piece of equipment used. Obtain these instructions, which will be

considered part of these specifications. Type, capacity and application of equipment

must be suitable and operate satisfactorily for the purpose intended in the plumbing

systems.

2.4 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Equipment Substitution Definition as follows:

1. A product that is neither the Basis of Design, nor one of the named Alternative

Manufacturing Sources.

2. Unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, substitutions may be

considered after the award of Contracts. Subsequent requests will be considered

only when, through no fault of the Plumbing Trade Contractor, none of the

specified products are available.

B. Equipment Variation Definition as follows:

1. A product that is not the Basis of Design, but is named as one of the specified

Alternative Manufacturing Sources.

C. The manufacturers listed in Part 2 of all technical specifications are considered

Alternative Manufacturing Sources as described in Paragraphs A and B above.

D. “Subject to compliance”, as used in these specifications, means compliance with all the

requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. The materials and products mentioned in these Contract Documents are specified to

establish a standard of: material of manufacture; independent testing agency

certifications; quality; function; design; and performance. The phrases “Basis of Design,”

“standard of design,” and “equivalent acceptable,” are used to indicate that other similar,

comparable products may be used provided such substitutes or variations are accepted

by the Engineer as meeting all the salient characteristics and standards necessary, such

as: material of manufacture; independent testing agency certifications; quality; function;

design; and performance, to meet the Owner’s needs and meet the objectives of the

Engineer’s Project Design.

F. Where Alternative Manufacturer Sources are listed for an item:

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 25 June 19, 2020

1. Selection must be either the Basis of Design or one of those listed Alternative


2. There is no guarantee implied that each and every manufacturer listed can meet or

exceed the salient characteristics, such as: material of manufacture; independent

testing agency certifications; quality; function; design; and performance of the

product specified as Basis of Design.

G. Each Trade Contractor is responsible to contact his proposed equipment manufacturer’s

representative and confirm, prior to preparing submittals, the proposed manufacturer’s

product meets or exceeds the: material of manufacture; independent testing agency

certifications; quality; function; design; and performance of the product specified as the

Basis of Design. Final acceptance will be determined by the Engineer, whose decision is

final.

H. Submittals offered as an Equipment Variation from the Basis of Design shall include a

letter, on the product manufacturer’s letterhead, certifying that the proposed product is a

Comparable Product to the product specified as the Basis of Design and conforms to all

the salient characteristics, including: material of manufacture; quality; function; design;

and performance of the product specified as the Basis of Design. If directed by the

Engineer for Products offered as an Equipment Variation, the Offerer shall provide a Letter

of Confirmation from a Registered, Professional Engineer attesting that the Proposed

Equipment Variation conforms to all the salient characteristics, including: material of

manufacture; independent testing agency certifications; quality; function; design; and

performance of the product specified as the Basis of Design.

I. Specific products specified without use of the term: equal; equivalent; comparable

product; substitution; or similar term; constitute a proprietary specification, and must be

provided as specified, unless a written request is submitted to the Engineer for approval

up to ten (10) days after the date of project award. Such requests must include a

complete description of the proposed product, along with sufficient documentation and

other information necessary for a complete evaluation of the proposed product. Such

Trade Contractor Requests shall include a letter, on the product manufacturer’s

letterhead, certifying that the proposed product is a Comparable Product and conforms to

all the salient characteristics, including: material of manufacture; independent testing

agency certifications; quality; function, design; and performance of the specified product.

If approved, the proposed product will be listed in an addendum to notify all bidders that

such acceptance has been granted by the Engineer. If not approved, provide the

specified product.

J. Provide Calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State

in which the work is taking place, engaged by the Plumbing Trade Contractor, confirming

that the equipment proposed as either a Substitution, or Variation, is a Comparable

Product to the product specified as the Basis of Design and conforms to all the salient

characteristics, including: material of manufacturer; independent testing agency


Basis of Design. Provide such calculations for major pieces of equipment (water heaters,

medical gas equipment, fire pumps, etc.). The Engineer, whose decision will be final,

will determine which products will require calculations during the submittal review

process.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 26 June 19, 2020

K. The Contract Documents have been founded upon Engineering Design selection of

materials, products, and pieces of equipment listed at the Basis of Design. In the event

that the incorporation of an approved Substitution, Variation, or assembly, into the work,

requires revisions or additions to the contractual requirements of either the Trade

Contractor proposing the substitution or variation, or any other Trade Contractor, the

Trade Contractor proposing the substitution or variation, shall bear the cost of: such

revisions or additions to the work of the Trade Contractor proposing such Substitution

and/or Variation; any expenses of all affected trades; and all engineering or architectural

services required at no change in the contract sum.

L. The equipment specifications indicated on the drawings, or in Part 2 of each of the

technical specifications, may or may not indicate or include all of the required salient

characteristics, components and accessories included with the specified product. Include

cost for all such characteristics, components and accessories required to meet or exceed

the: material of manufacture; independent testing agency certifications; quality; function;

design; and performance of the product specified as the Basis of Design.

M. For requirements regarding equipment variations after bid award, refer to Article

“Additional Trade Contractor Paid Fees and Expenses” in Part 3 of this section.

N. Each Trade Contractor negotiating for pricing advantages affecting the Trade Contractor’s

Bid shall comply with the directives included herein, bear full responsibility for the

accuracy and completeness of the submissions required of the Vendor selected by the

Trade Contractor. The Proposing Trade Contractor shall bear full responsibility for all

extra costs of the Engineer shown to have resulted from inaccurate, and/or incomplete

compliance with the directives included in this Specification Article.

O. All decisions provided by the Engineer, described herein, shall be final.

2.5 VIBRATION ELIMINATION

A. Provide vibration isolation support provisions for all moving or rotating equipment,

machinery and transformers when such provisions are not furnished and/or integrally

mounted by the equipment manufacturers. Basis of Design is Amber/Booth Company.

Comparable product by Korfund Company, Inc. or Mason Industries may be submitted

for review. Install in accordance with vibration isolation manufacturer's

recommendations unless specified otherwise herein.

B. Provide all rotating or moving machinery or equipment mounted on, or suspended from,

building structure with approved resilient suspension isolation mountings.

C. Provide vibration isolating connections between all pumps and connecting piping.

Length, size, and stiffness as recommended by vibration isolator manufacturer.

D. Use flexible metallic conduit for all electrical connections to moving or vibrating

equipment, such as motors, and the like.

E. Rigid pipes, conduit or other extended machine assemblies connected to vibration

isolated equipment are not permitted to be tied in directly with the building construction.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 27 June 19, 2020

Connect such elements to the equipment through flexible fittings, and support using

isolating equipment as required.

F. All systems must operate free from objectionable vibration and noise. Take all necessary

steps required to achieve this result without additional cost to the Project.

2.6 NOISE CONTROL

A. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed

NC 35 within the occupied room, except as follows:

TYPE OF ROOM NC LEVEL

Offices, large open 40

Lobbies, Waiting Areas 40

Corridors 40

Bath Rooms and Toilet Rooms 40

Kitchens, Locker Rooms, Warehouses, Shop, Laundries

Gymnasiums, Recreation Rooms 50

General Work Rooms 40

B. For equipment which has no sound power ratings scheduled on the plans, select

equipment such that the fore-going noise criteria, local ordinance noise levels, and

OSHA requirements are not exceeded. Selection procedure shall be in accordance with

ASHRAE 2015 HVAC Applications Handbook, Chapter 48, NOISE AND VIBRATION

CONTROL.

C. An allowance, not to exceed 5db, may be added to the measured value to compensate

for the variation of the room attenuating effect between room test condition prior to

occupancy and design condition after occupancy which may include the addition of

sound absorbing material, such as, furniture. This allowance may not be taken after

occupancy. The room attenuating effect is defined as the difference between sound

power level emitted to room and sound pressure level in room.

D. In absence of specified measurement requirements, measure equipment noise levels three

feet from equipment and at an elevation of maximum noise generation.

E. If sound levels are exceeded, provide sound reducing devices, including, but not limited

to: sound attenuators; acoustic enclosures; additional equipment insulation or vibration

isolators to conform to these specifications. Provide required material and labor at no

additional cost to the project.

2.7 INSERTS, HANGER SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, FASTENINGS

A. All materials, designs and types of inserts, hanger supports and clamps must meet the

requirements of the latest edition of the Manufacturers Standardization Society Document

MSS-SP-58, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., National Electrical Code and Factory Mutual

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 28 June 19, 2020

Engineering Division Standards where applicable. Insert, hanger support and clamp

types referenced herein are shown in MSS-SP-58.

B. Provide all necessary inserts, hanger supports, fastenings, clamps and attachments

necessary for support of the plumbing work. Select the types of all inserts, hanger

supports, fastenings, clamps and attachments to suit both new and existing building

construction conditions specifically for the purposes intended.

C. In new overhead cast-in-place concrete construction, provide type 19 steel concrete

inserts and fasten to form work before concrete is cast. For cast concrete floor or roof

sections too thin to permit the use of inserts, extend the hanger rod through the slab and

terminate with a nut and large washer, recessed into the top face of the slab as approved

by the Structural Engineer.

D. Clamps and attachments to steel beams and bar joists must be made using types 20, 21,

23, 25, 27, 28, 29 or 30 as applicable to suit conditions of construction. Clamps and

attachments must be selected on the basis of the required load to be supported. Provide

all necessary steel angle iron or channel between bar joists, or steel beams where direct

attachment cannot be made. Holes are not permitted to be drilled or burned in structural

building steel for hanger rod supports. Welding of hangers or supports to structural steel

is prohibited unless approved beforehand by the Structural Engineer.

E. Metallic masonry anchors may be provided for all pre-cast concrete, masonry and cast

concrete construction as an alternate to item (C) above. Locate in pre-cast and cast-in-

place concrete as directed by the Structural Engineer. Anchor Basis of Design: Dynabolt,

Ram-In and/or Tru-Bolt masonry anchors as manufactured by Ramset. Select and install

as recommended by the anchor manufacturer for the various applications, stresses and

services involved. Comparable products by Redhead, Hilti or Wej-It may be submitted

for review. Installation of masonry anchors must be accomplished by pre-drilling

concrete or masonry to diameters and depths required to properly accommodate anchor

bolts.

F. Toggle bolts may be used in dry wall and lath and block plaster walls. The use of toggle

bolts is restricted to the weight limitations imposed by the toggle bolt manufacturer for

the size used.

G. Except where noted otherwise herein, attachment to wood or material of similar fibrous

nature must be made with lag screws and/or wood screws of required size.

H. Screws with wooden or plastic plugs, or lead anchors are not acceptable.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. For projects which include the work of a General Construction Trade Contractor, furnish

and locate for installation under General Construction, all access doors and panels for

concealed portions of plumbing work requiring accessibility for operation and

maintenance. If project does not include a General Construction Trade Contractor,

provide access doors as required.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 29 June 19, 2020

B. Access doors and panels may not be installed without specific approval of the

Architect/Engineer as to location. The proposed location of access doors and panels must

be reviewed with the Architect/Engineer and the General Construction Trade Foreman,

where applicable, and the locations indicated on the coordination drawings prior to

installation of equipment, access doors or panels. Controversies must be resolved at no

cost to the Project.

C. Minimum size of 24" x 18" unless shown, specified or approved otherwise.

D. Sixteen (16) gauge minimum construction with concealed spring hinges, screw fasteners

and painted finish. Color by Architect.

E. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Milcor.

2. Karp.

3. Mifab.

F. For access doors in drywall, provide drywall bead flange.

G. For access doors in hard plaster or ceramic tile, provide expanded metal casing bead.

H. For access doors in unplastered masonry and concrete, provide one piece frame for flush

mounting.

I. For access doors in acoustic tile ceilings, provide recessed door panel with room to

receive acoustic tile.

J. Underwriters "B" label access doors where required for access to shafts, corridors, and

where located in fire walls and partitions.

2.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Provide and set in place at the time concrete foundations, bases or curbs are poured or

formed, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the various equipment specified herein,

with hook type anchor bolts of proper size and length to suit the apparatus as

recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Set bolts in pipe sleeves of

approximately twice the bolt diameter and of length equal to the embedded length of the

bolt, with sleeves terminating flush with finished surfaces of foundations, bases or curbs.

B. When the equipment is set in its proper position and aligned with the anchor bolts, the

space between the anchor bolts and the inside wall of the sleeves must be completely

filled with non-shrink cementitious grout. Grout Basis of Design: Crystex as manufactured

by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Comparable product by Master Builders or BASF

may be submitted for review.

C. When a General Construction Trade Contractor provides concrete foundations, bases or

curbs, the Plumbing Trade Contractor is responsible for all anchor bolts required by the

equipment he provides, under the Contract Documents. Assign a supervisory

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 30 June 19, 2020

representative to be present at the time foundations, bases or curbs are poured or formed.

For projects wherein there is no General Construction Trade Contractor, the Plumbing

Trade Contractor is responsible for pouring, locating, and setting equipment foundations,

bases and curbs and the location of anchor bolts for the equipment provided or installed

by him on this Project.

D. All anchor bolts must be of sufficient strength to withstand any loading imposed by the

attached materials or equipment.

2.10 PIPING AND CONDUIT SLEEVES

A. Provide all sleeves required for plumbing work and be fully responsible for the final and

permanent locations thereof.

B. Provide sleeves in the following locations:

1. All pipes and conduits passing through all cast-in-place concrete construction and

masonry walls.

2. All pipes and conduits passing through cast-in-place waterproof concrete

construction and waterproof masonry walls.

C. Extend through construction and finish flush with each surface except where noted

otherwise. Provide for a minimum ½" clearance around conduit, pipe or its covering in

the instance of pipe covered with insulation.

D. All sleeves in waterproof walls and floors must be fitted and sealed with positive

hydrostatic mechanical seals. Provide Basis of Design Product "Link Seal" as

manufactured by Thunderline Corporation or Comparable Product by Advance Products

and Systems, Inc. or Proco Products, Inc. Sleeves must be sized accordingly.

Mechanical seals must be placed around piping and/or conduit and inserted into void

between inner wall of sleeve and piping and/or conduit. Tighten mechanical seals as

required for watertight seal.

E. All sleeves must be Schedule 40 steel pipe finished with smooth edges. Sleeves in

waterproof walls and floors must be fabricated with minimum 1/4" thick rectangular steel

plate placed around mid-point of sleeve, continuously welded to sleeve and then place

the entire/plate assembly into proper position prior to erection of walls and floors.

Otherwise, provide sleeves with a minimum of three (3) lugs for anchoring.

F. Pack voids between sleeves, piping or conduit, where located in fire or smoke rated

assemblies, in accordance with UL Fire Resistance Directory.

G. Set all sleeves prior to or during erection of walls and floors. In the event that sleeves are

omitted or incorrectly located in new walls or slabs, submit a location plan and method

of cutting and installing sleeves to the Engineer for review prior to carrying out the work.

H. If sleeves are omitted or located incorrectly, the particular Trade Contractor who is at

fault, at no additional cost to the project, must engage the trade which originally installed

the work, to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 31 June 19, 2020

I. Provide mechanical seals and insert into voids between piping and conduits that pass

through floors, and which will be exposed in finished areas that have floor drains,

including spaces classified as “Janitors Closets,” “Toilet Rooms,” and the like.

J. Where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,

not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting

machine, such as a masonry saw or core drill, to insure a neat hole.

2.11 SMOKE/FIRESTOPPING (MATERIALS)

A. Firestopping materials and systems must consist of commercially manufactured products

complying with the following minimum requirements and be asbestos and PCB free:

1. Flame Spread Index: Twenty-five or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E

84.

2. Smoke Density Index: Fifty or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

3. Nontoxicity: Nontoxic to human beings at all stages of application and during fire

conditions.

4. Systems shall comply with Underwriter’s Laboratory Listing Requirements.

5. Fire Resistance:

a. Materials and systems used to seal penetrations in time rated assemblies must

be capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to

ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E 119 time temperature fire

conditions for 3 hours.

b. Materials must not require a rise in temperature to install or activate seal.

c. Materials must not contain solvents or require hazardous waste disposal.

d. Firestop material must not dissolve in water after curing.

B. Basis of Design for smoke and firestopping material is Rectorshield, Inc. Comparable

product by Hilti, or 3M may be submitted for review. Refer to Division 07 of these

specifications.

C. Smoke stopping materials must be approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. The drawings accompanying these specifications are diagrammatic and intended to cover

the approximate and relative locations of the building systems.

B. Installation, connection and interconnection of all components of these systems must be

complete and made in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions and best trade

practices.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 32 June 19, 2020

C. Erect all parts of equipment furnished at such time and in such manner as not to delay or

interfere with other Trade Contractors and their work.

D. Plug all piping, conduit and ductwork as required during construction to prevent entering

of dirt.

E. Before material is ordered or fabricated, or any work is performed, verify all calculations,

sizing, measurements, including lines, grades, pipes and conduit elevations at the

building, as applicable, and be responsible for the correctness thereof. No extra

compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions,

routing and measurements and those indicated in the Contract Documents. Any

discrepancies discovered must be submitted to the Engineer for consideration before

proceeding with the work.

F. Lay out work and be responsible for the establishment of heights, grades, and the like, for

all interior and exterior equipment and systems as applicable, including piping, drains,

fixtures, conduit, and the like, included in Contract Documents, in strict accordance with

the intent expressed thereby; and all the physical conditions to be met at the building and

finished grade, and be responsible for accuracy thereof. The establishment of the

location of all work must be performed in consideration of the finished work. In case of

conflict, equipment and/or materials must be relocated without cost to the Project, as

directed by the Engineer, regardless of which equipment was installed first. Refer to

Article, “Coordination Drawings”, in Part 1 of this section.

G. Cooperate with other Trade Contractors for the proper securing and anchoring of all work

included within these specifications. Use extraordinary care in the erection and

installation of all equipment and materials to avoid marring surfaces of the work of other

Trade Contractors, as each Trade Contractor will be held financially responsible for all

such injury caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of the

Trade Contractor’s work force.

H. Do not run pipe or conduit in any concrete slab three inches (3") or less in thickness. Do

not place any pipe or conduit in any slab where the outside diameter of the pipe or

conduit is more than one-quarter the thickness of the slab. The sweep of pipe or conduit

elbows emerging through concrete slabs must not create any hazard or obstructions.

I. All piping, conduit and other materials and equipment shown to be mounted below

ceilings are to be kept as close to ceiling areas as possible unless otherwise noted.

J. Install and arrange all equipment, such as valves, air vents, cleanouts, traps and the like,

which will be concealed in construction, to be fully accessible for adjustment, service

and maintenance. Furnish access doors where required for installation under the General

Construction Contract, where applicable. Otherwise, furnish and install all required

access doors.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK

A. Provide all piping, equipment, materials and accessories having polished or plated

surfaces, machined finishes or unpainted surfaces with a thick coat of a neutral protection

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 33 June 19, 2020

grease and carefully cover with thick cloth or heavy building paper held securely in place

to protect the finish against damage during the entire period of construction. Protect

equipment by the use of canvas tarps, vinyl sheeting or similar materials held securely in

place.

B. Seal all openings in pipes, fittings, conduit and all other materials to exclude dirt, sand,

and other foreign materials.

C. Exercise every precaution to exclude dust, dirt and all other foreign materials from

switchgear rooms, transformers, and all mechanical equipment rooms during

construction. Rooms and equipment contained therein must be swept and vacuum

cleaned at regular intervals. All relays, meters and plumbing equipment containing

electrical components must be protected with heavy paper held in place with approved

mastic tape to exclude fine dust and particles. Install and maintain sufficient electric

heaters in equipment rooms and transformer compartments to keep equipment dry during

construction.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. New Construction:

1. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01.

2. Provide and set all sleeves, inserts and other items required for the installation of

the Plumbing work, and take responsibility for their final and permanent locations.

3. Confer with, and give the General Construction Trade Contractor, where

applicable, complete information as to size of openings in all construction, so that

such openings may be provided as the building progresses. Otherwise, provide

openings as required for the plumbing work.

4. If openings are omitted or incorrect through failure to follow these instructions the

particular Trade Contractor must, at no additional cost to the project, engage the

trade which originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.

3.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY

A. Provide all cast-in-place concrete, pre-cast concrete and masonry work (brick and block)

required for completion of the plumbing work, including interior and exterior concrete

slabs.

B. Engineer will review and approve materials used.

C. Unless shown or specified otherwise, all equipment foundations and housekeeping pads

must be six inches (6") minimum height from floor, of sufficient mass, and secured to the

floor.

D. Refer to Division 03 for concrete specifications.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 34 June 19, 2020

E. Unless noted otherwise, concrete bases must be 4" larger than the largest dimension of

the base of the supported equipment in both directions. Use 3000 psi, 28 day

compressive strength concrete and reinforcement.

3.5 SUPPORTS

A. Except where noted otherwise in the specifications and shown on drawings, provide all

materials, including, but not limited to, equipment supports, supplies and labor necessary

as required to adequately support, brace and strengthen new and/or existing equipment

and materials installed under/or affected by the plumbing work.

B. The design, materials, fabrication and erection of structural steel supports must conform

to "Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of

the American Institute of Steel Construction, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges". Welding, where required, must conform to "Code of Arc and

Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society.

3.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Except as noted otherwise, provide heavy solid pattern, steel, cast iron or malleable iron

escutcheons with set screws and prime coat of paint on all uninsulated piping and

conduit exposed to view within structure where passing through floors, partitions, walls

or ceilings. Escutcheons are not required in equipment rooms, boiler rooms or other

unfinished areas.

B. For piping with sleeves extending above floor, provide escutcheons with deep recesses.

C. Provide solid pattern, smooth chrome plated cast brass escutcheons for all chrome plated

pipe fixture connections.

D. Provide nickel plated cast iron escutcheons where pipes pass through toilet rooms, walls

or ceilings.

3.7 MACHINERY GUARDS

A. Provide OSHA approved expanded sheet steel metal guards over all belt drives,

couplings and other moving equipment to protect personnel from injury.

B. Machinery guards shall comply with OSHA Standards 29 CFR STANDARD NUMBER

1910.212 General Requirements for all Machines; Subpart Number 0; Subtitle -

Machinery and Machine Guarding; STANDARD NUMBER 1910.219; Standard Title -

Mechanical Power - Transmission Apparatus; Subpart Number 0; Subpart Title -

Machinery and Machine Guarding.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 35 June 19, 2020

3.8 ROOFING WORK

A. Refer to the Architectural Documents for roofing Manufacturer’s and Installer’s

Warranties. HVAC Trade Contractor shall have all roofing and flashing work performed

by warranted roofing installer. Contact Owner or original installer for further

information. New penetrations through the roof shall be in full warranty condition. If

required by the roof warranty, engage the original roofing installer to perform all roofing

and flashing work. Refer to Division 07 of these specifications.

3.9 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. All painting, generally, will be provided by the General Construction Trade Contractor,

where applicable, except where specifically noted otherwise in the Plumbing

Specifications. Otherwise, all Trade Contractors are responsible for their own painting

and finishing.

B. Equipment and material furnished with factory enamel finish will not be painted unless

finish has been damaged, in which case the equipment or material must be refinished by

the Trade Contractor who furnished it, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3.10 LUBRICATION

A. Provide proper and necessary lubrication of any items of operating, rotating or moving

equipment which is furnished, installed or which must operate as part of the plumbing

system.

B. When an item of operating equipment is furnished and installed by a Trade Contractor, it

will be that Trade Contractor’s responsibility to accomplish the lubrication.

C. When an item of operating equipment is furnished by one Trade Contractor and installed

by another, it is the responsibility of the Trade Contractor furnishing the equipment to

apply the lubricants.

D. All rotating or moving equipment must be lubricated prior to energizing and operating

the equipment. Should the Trade Contractor responsible for the lubrication fail to apply

lubricants prior to initial start-up and the equipment is damaged as a result of that Trade

Contractor’s negligence, that Trade Contractor is required to provide all corrective action

necessary including replacement, if required, for the proper operation of equipment.

E. Lubrication must be accomplished in the manner prescribed or recommended by the

manufacturer of the specific item. For motor driven equipment this precaution of

lubrication will apply individually to the driver and the driven component.

F. The lubricants must be of the type, grade, specification and manufacture as prescribed or

recommended by the manufacturer of the specific equipment item.

G. Extend lubrication fittings where required to allow maintenance personnel to lubricate

the equipment easily and efficiently.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 36 June 19, 2020

H. The Trade Contractor who supplies any item of rotating equipment will have the

responsibility of securing written instructions on the lubricating procedure and must

furnish not less than one year's supply of all necessary lubricants properly identified so

they can be replaced.

I. Any moving or rotating equipment furnished by the Owner that is to be installed, reused

and/or serviced must also be lubricated. Except where noted otherwise in the Contract

Documents, the Trade Contractor installing, reusing and/or servicing all such equipment

is responsible for the proper lubrication thereof, including obtaining proper lubricating

instructions from the various manufacturers involved, furnishing and applying the

necessary lubricants and leaving the Owner with a one (1) year supply of lubricant.

3.11 PLUMBING TRADE - ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION

A. Furnish equipment with electrical current characteristics as shown on electrical drawings

and specifications.

B. The nameplate voltage of all motors furnished with mechanical equipment must be

within the range of the voltage shown for use with the motor as the upper limit, and 5%

less than this voltage as the lower limit.

C. Plumbing Trade Contractor must furnish all motors, motor starters, specialty motor

controllers, float and pressure switches, temperature control, other special automatic

controls as indicated in the Contract Documents for all equipment furnished and/or

installed under the plumbing contract except where noted otherwise.

D. All electrical equipment furnished by the Plumbing Trade Contractor must be as

recommended by the equipment manufacturers, in accordance with the Electrical

Specifications for similar items, and of such type as to work properly with automatic

temperature control sequences where required.

E. The Electrical Trade Contractor will provide all push-buttons, safety switches for motors,

and wiring from starters to motors and install all starters furnished to him by the Plumbing

Trade Contractor unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

F. Where controllers and/or starters are furnished as an integral part of any equipment, the

Trade Contractor supplying the equipment must furnish complete wiring between

controllers, starters and motors.

G. The Electrical Trade Contractor must provide disconnect switches for all equipment

furnished and/or installed by other Trade Contractors, except where such switches are an

integral part of equipment.

H. Plumbing Trade Contractor must set all motors and furnish, set and pipe as necessary,

float switches, temperature control and other special automatic temperature controls.

I. Plumbing Trade Contractor must provide all power and control wiring required by the

respective sections of the specifications. The Electrical Trade Contractor will provide all

other wiring required for the completion of the work of the Plumbing Trade Contractor.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 37 June 19, 2020

J. Plumbing Trade Contractor must furnish the Electrical Trade Contractor with complete

wiring diagrams as required.

K. Any electrical work performed by the Plumbing Trade Contractor must be performed in

accordance with the requirements of the ELECTRICAL Section of these specifications.

L. For additional coordination items, refer to Article 2.2, “Submittals”.

3.12 ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. All motors furnished by all Trade Contractors, unless specified to the contrary in Contract

Documents, must conform to the following requirements:

1. Characteristics, dimensions, tolerances, temperature rise, insulation, rating, noise,

vibration, and all other characteristics in accordance with the latest standards of

IEEE or NEMA.

2. Unless required by the driven unit, motors must have normal starting torque,

NEMA Design B characteristics. Horsepower rating of motor must be equal to or

greater than that required by driven equipment. Current density design of motor

rating must be limited so that overload protection provided by standard motor

starters will be adequate to prevent damaging overheating during stall, single

phasing or slightly prolonged acceleration.

3. Use NEMA Class A or B insulation with motor frames amply sized to provide a

1.15 service factor at an ambient of 40 deg. C maximum. Insulation systems must

be designed for an average life of 60,000 hours.

4. All motors must be high efficiency. Meet or exceed requirements in NEMA

Standard MG1, Table 12-10.

5. Running power factor must be higher than 0.85 for motors 5 HP to 30 HP and

higher than 0.90 for motors 40 HP or larger.

6. Each motor must be mounted on the same bedplate as the equipment driven and

be complete with pulleys, slide rails or flexible couplings as required.

7. Each Trade Contractor is responsible in each instance for the proper selection of

motors of suitable characteristics with details submitted for approval to the

Engineer prior to installation.

B. All starters furnished by all Trade Contractors must conform with the following

requirements, unless specified to the contrary in the Contract Documents:

1. All starters for 3-phase equipment must be fully enclosed, across-the-line type

equipped with solid state overload protection as herein specified for all three

phases, low voltage protection, all necessary auxiliary contacts as required and

indicating pilot lights. Starters which are controlled automatically must have two-

wire control with "ON-OFF-AUTO" switches. Starters which are controlled

manually must have 3-wire control with Start-Stop pushbuttons.

2. All 3-phase starters remotely controlled must have 120 volt coils and control

transformers with disconnecting means. Starters for single phase motors shall be

manual toggle switches with thermal overload protection and pilot light. Omit

pilot light for unit heaters.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 38 June 19, 2020

3. General Purpose NEMA-1 enclosure for indoor use under normal atmospheric

conditions. Watertight enclosure NEMA-4 or NEMA-5 for outdoor use or where

starters are subjected to the splashing or dripping of water. Explosion-proof

enclosure NEMA-7, 9 or 12 for dusty or hazardous locations as required by Article

500 of the National Electrical Code.

4. Individually equip all starters for three phase motors with solid state adjustable

overload protection with automatic protection to prevent single phase operation

with the following features:

a. Three phase, self-powered with current sensing, phase unbalance and phase

loss protection, visible trip indication, trip test function, and power “LED.”

b. Phase loss protection to include automatic restart with a selectable manual

switch.

C. All controllers, starters and other electrical components furnished as an integral part of

any apparatus must be furnished complete with integral wiring as required.

D. So far as is practical, all motors and starters must be of one manufacturer. Basis of

Design: General Electric Co. Comparable products by Westinghouse Co., Square-D Co.,

or Allen-Bradley Co. may be submitted for review.

E. Submittals for motors and starters must be coordinated with Electrical Trade Contractor.

3.13 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted in Plumbing Specifications, all packaged equipment furnished by

Plumbing Trade Contractor must be complete with the following electrical provisions:

1. General compliance with provisions of the preceding Article, ELECTRICAL

MOTORS AND STARTERS.

2. Starting electrical characteristics of all motors and/or starters must be approved by

local utility company and Electrical Engineer.

B. Approved, factory installed and wired starting, operating and control equipment,

terminating in terminal strip for single point power wiring connections by Electrical Trade

Contractor must conform with the ELECTRICAL Section of these specifications and must

include approved branch fuses for branch power circuits.

3.14 PIPING AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOORS

A. Wherever piping, conduit or piping enclosures are run under a floor slab on grade, the

work is to be installed after the General Construction Trade Contractor, where applicable,

has brought the sub-grade to the proper level.

B. Excavate and backfill as required for the installation of plumbing work. The excavation

of the sub-grade where required for the installation of the work must be performed,

including that for piping, conduit and piping enclosures, by the Plumbing Trade

Contractor. When the installation is completed and satisfactorily tested, the remaining

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 39 June 19, 2020

space shall be filled with crushed stone or other material similar to that to be used by the

General Construction Trade Contractor, where applicable, for the sub-base. The backfill

must be stabilized by hand or pneumatic tamping as directed by the Engineer and must

be returned to the original sub-grade level.

C. No piping, conduit or piping enclosures is to be installed in the stone sub-base which is

part of the General Construction Trade Contractor's work, where applicable, unless

specific permission is granted by the Engineer.

D. Where piping is noted to be installed in enclosures, such as split terra cotta pipe,

necessary protection of the insulation, arrangement and installation will be as hereinafter

described in the detailed technical specifications.

E. Where required by drawing notes, specifications, or applicable electrical codes, conduits

installed under floors must be encased in concrete, conforming to the Division 03

specifications.

3.15 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Basis of Design for pipe markers is Setmark snap on type SNA by Seton Nameplate

Corporation. Comparable products by Marking Services, Inc. or Brady Worldwide may

be submitted for review. Pipe markers must comply with OSHA Standards. Wording and

color coding must conform to the current edition of ANSI/ASME A13.1.

B. Mark all systems of piping with markers 12 foot maximum centers.

C. Markers must indicate the following:

1. Pipe contents in legend form.

2. Size of piping.

3. Direction of flow in piping.

D. Identify all valves, controls, dampers and other parts of plumbing systems by means of 2"

round brass, aluminum or plastic tags. Tags must have engraved or stamped letters or

numbers ½" high. Fasten tags securely with brass "S" hooks or chains. Basis of Design

for tags is Seton Corporation. Comparable products by Marking Services, Inc. or Brady

Worldwide may be submitted for review.

E. Provide ½" scale diagrams showing location, number and service or function of each

tagged item. Frame diagrams in approved frame with clear Lucite front, secured to walls

in location as directed by Owner. Provide two (2) separate copies of each diagram,

permanently framed and covered as two (2) separate items.

F. Identify all equipment as to nature, service and purpose by means of permanently

attached plastic nameplates having ½” high letters, dull black outside and white core.

Nameplates of approved size, beveled edges and engraved through black to white core.

Basis of Design for nameplates is Seton Corp. Comparable products by Marking Services,

or Brady Worldwide may be submitted for review. Nameplates shall indicate equipment

identification names and numbers as approved by the Owner.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 40 June 19, 2020

3.16 ABANDONMENT, REMOVAL AND RELOCATION

A. Removals shown on drawings are a general indication only, and may not necessarily

indicate the full extent of removals which may be required to complete this work.

B. Where existing partitions, walls, ceilings and floors are to be removed, all piping,

conduits, materials, fixtures and equipment attached or fastened thereto or within, as

applicable, must be carefully removed.

C. Where work under this contract interferes with the existing construction, ductwork,

piping, conduit or equipment, remove all such materials and route new work to clear the

obstruction. Provide additional piping, conduits and material of the same design and

quality if the piping and/or conduit is to be continued in use.

D. Disconnect and remove all accessible piping, conduit, ductwork, materials, fixtures and

equipment not required in the new systems. Plug all outlets at the main or riser

connection.

E. Removed materials not desired by the Owner and not to be reset and not specified nor

indicated to be reused, become the property of the Plumbing Trade Contractor and must

be promptly removed from site.

F. All demolition work is subject to the direction and approval of the Engineer and must be

performed in such manner as not to interfere with the normal operation of the building.

G. Relocate existing utilities and/or equipment that must remain to maintain operation of

building or parts of building outside the work area.

H. Equipment Pad Removal:

1. Remove all concrete pads and equipment support structure material related to the

Plumbing trade, not indicated or specified for reuse. Remove concrete pads to one

(1) inch below adjacent concrete floor surface. Exterior slabs shall be broken and

removed as waste materials.

2. Cut-off reinforcement and anchor bolts at or below level of pad removal.

a. Resurface area level with adjacent concrete floor surface using a heavy duty

aggregate concrete topping consisting of Portland cement Type I or Type III

conforming to ASTM C150 with aggregate graded by weight to pass sieves as

follows:

Fine (Thin Coat) or Course (Heavy Coat)

3/8" 100% 1/2" 100%

No. 4 95-100% 3/8" 30-50%

No. 8 65-80% No. 4 0-15%

No. 16 45-65% No. 8 0-5%

No. 30 25-45% No. 100 0-5%

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 41 June 19, 2020

b. Topping mix must contain a high range water reducing admixture (super

plasticizer) ASTM C494, Type F or Type G.

c. Coat surface with epoxy bonding agent prior to application of concrete

topping.

d. Produce a heavy duty concrete topping with the following characteristics:

Compressive Strength 5000 psi at 28 days

Slump 8" maximum

Water to Cement Ratio 0.44.

3.17 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (METHODS)

A. Installation of materials must be performed by applicator/installers qualified, trained and

approved by the manufacturer of the materials, and be installed in accordance with

ASTM E 814.

Install smoke and firestopping at locations required, shown, or specified in accordance

with applicable codes, manufacturer's written instructions, and test report, applying to

the specific trade equipment as applicable. Cutting and patching of construction and

providing sleeves, where required, is shown on drawings or specified in other sections.

1. Filling of Voids: Smoke and firestopping materials must completely fill void spaces

regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerances established by the

manufacturer. Smoke and firestopping for filling voids in floors in which the

smallest dimension of the void is 4 in. or more must support the same load as the

floor is designed to support or must be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent

loading or traffic in the smoke or firestopped areas.

2. Insulated Pipes: Insulated equipment penetrating rated floors and walls must be

insulated with materials which provide the same performance as the smoke and

firestopping material. This material must extend a minimum of 6 in. on each side

of the opening. Vapor barrier of such insulation must have a perm rating of 0.03

maximum.

3. Electrical Cables or Conduits: Smoke and firestopping at penetrations of electrical

cables or conduits must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70.

4. Where smoke and firestopping of penetrations in floors, walls and partitions that

will be exposed in completed construction, provide protection as necessary to

prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and provide escutcheons or

other trim.

5. Schedule the installation and required inspection of smoke and firestops for

penetrations that will be concealed in completed construction prior to erection of

floors, walls, and partitions that would permanently conceal the penetrations.

B. All areas of smoke and firestopping installation must be accessible until inspection by the

applicable code authorities.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 42 June 19, 2020

3.18 SUBSURFACE CONCEALED UNKNOWN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

A. Subsurface, or otherwise concealed physical conditions which (1) do not differ materially

from those indicated in the Project Contract Documents; (2) affect plumbing and

electrical work; (3) do not differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist, and

which are generally recognized as inherent in the mechanical and electrical construction

activities of the character provided for in the Project Contract Documents, are to be

anticipated by the Plumbing Trade Contractor, and included in the basic plumbing work.

B. Unknown physical conditions: which are of an unusual nature; which are materially

different in subsurface (otherwise concealed) physical conditions; which affect plumbing

and/or electrical work; which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and

generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character found in the

Project Contract Documents, are the basis for, and require notice by, the applicable

Trade Contractor, promptly, before such conditions are disturbed. Such conditions may

become the basis for a legitimate claim under “Changed Conditions,” affecting the cost,

and/or schedule of the work. During the work, the Plumbing Trade Contractor shall

provide reasonable, incidental on-site review, survey and measurements to assist in

quantification of such conditions.

3.19 CONCRETE PATCHING (PROCEDURE)

A. Remove any loose debris, chipped or cracked portions of concrete, and any grease, oil,

dirt or other coating materials from the concrete to be patched.

B. Apply epoxy bonding adhesive to the clean dry surface with a brush or roller to briefly

flood the surface allowing good penetration, if completely absorbed, apply additional

material. Adhesive Basis of Design: Edison Coatings Inc. Flexi-Bond 540. Comparable

product by Sika Corp. or Euclid Chemical Co. may be submitted for review. Refer to

Division 03 of these specifications.

C. Apply new cementitious mortar patch to surface immediately after applying bonding

adhesive, bonding agent should be wet while applying concrete patch. Mortar patch

equal to Moxie International 2000 Super Patch. Comparable product by Sika Corp. or

Euclid Chemical Co. may be submitted for review. Refer to Division 03 of these

specifications.

D. Work patch into any cracks or crevices with a brush, then apply remainder of patch and

trowel until level and smooth.

E. Do not apply patch below 45 deg. F.

3.20 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS

A. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread

of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. Refer to Division 01 of these specifications.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 43 June 19, 2020

3.21 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Provide the following prior to submitting the initial application for payment:

1. Copy of Plumbing Trade Contractor’s and Sub-Contractors’ licenses for the state in

which the work is being performed.

2. Resumes for the designated Project Manager and Project Foreman.

3. List of independent agencies who will be engaged by the Plumbing Trade

Contractor to perform tests, provide certifications, conduct inspections, etc. as

required by Contract Documents.

B. The initial application for payment will not be processed until the items above are

submitted.

C. Provide line items for:

1. Coordination Drawings.

2. Plumbing TAB Report.

3.22 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Provide the following prior to submitting the final application for payment:

1. Refer to Division 01 of these specifications.

2. Pipe Pressure Test Reports.

3. Equipment Start-Up Reports for each piece of plumbing equipment.

4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data.

5. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report for plumbing systems.

6. Plumbing Systems Commissioning Report.

7. Plumbing system and equipment warranties.

8. Plumbing Contractor Closeout Checklist indicating dates of submitted

requirements.

9. Plumbing Contractor’s Punch List of incomplete work items with reason why each

work item is not complete and anticipated schedule for completion. Submit at

least one week prior to Engineer’s final Construction Observation Report site visit.

10. Plumbing Trade Contractor’s notarized certification letter.

11. As-built drawings as described in Part 1 of this specification section.

B. Final payment is contingent upon completion of all items listed above.

3.23 INDEMNIFICATION

A. The drawings and specifications covering the work of Divisions 22 and 26, as applicable,

shall not be interpreted by the Plumbing Trade Contractor as quantification, and/or

classification of the construction methods, and/or construction means required to carry

out the required construction. There is no explicit or implicit representation that any

portion of this work can be installed and/or constructed through any particular normal,

reasonable, abnormal, or unusual means and methods. By submission of a pricing bid

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 44 June 19, 2020

for this work, the Plumbing Trade Contractor shall accept sole and individual

responsibility for the determination and execution of the methods and means selected to

complete this work.

B. The Plumbing Trade Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, agrees to

indemnify, hold harmless, and defend Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the

employees and agents of any of them from and against any and all claims, suits,

demands, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs (“Losses”), including but not limited to

costs of reasonable defense, arising in whole or in part out of the negligence of the

Plumbing Trade Contractor, its Sub-Contractors, the officers, employees, agents, and Sub-

Contractors of any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,

regardless of whether or not such Losses are caused in part by a party indemnified

hereunder. Specifically excluded from the foregoing are Losses arising out of (1) the

preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders,

designs, or specifications, and (2) the giving of or failure to give directions by Gillan &

Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the agents and employees of any of them, provided

such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of Loss.

C. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall name Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its agents and

consultants on the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s policy or policies of comprehensive or

commercial general liability insurance. Such insurance shall include products and

completed operations and contractual liability coverages, shall be primary and

noncontributing with any insurance maintained by Gillan & Hartmann, Inc. or its agents

and consultants, and shall provide that Gillan & Hartmann, Inc. be given thirty days,

unqualified written notice prior to any cancellation thereof.

3.24 ADDITIONAL PLUMBING TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES

A. As a material part of Plumbing Trade Contractor’s Agreement to complete the work of this

Contract, the Plumbing Trade Contractor agrees to reimburse Gillan & Hartmann, Inc.

(“Engineer”) for the below listed extra engineering work under the following conditions:

1. Engineer’s hourly billing rate shall be $250.00 per hour for all related office hours,

travel time and as applicable, on-site time;

2. Contractor’s request(s) for substitution;

a. When such requests for substitution are not the result of a bonafide delivery

problem or design related problem, and;

b. When such requests do not address items of equipment for which the

specifications list the basis of design with at least one comparable product,

and;

c. The Plumbing Trade Contractor’s request(s) for substitution must be

submitted in writing, and;

d. The Engineer will provide the Plumbing Trade Contractor with a written

budget, not to exceed quotation for the Engineer’s billing, and;

e. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the

Engineer’s extra charges, and;

f. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to

80% of the established budget for the Engineer’s extra work.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 45 June 19, 2020

g. The balance of the Engineer’s charges beyond the retainage shall be paid

upon completion of the Engineers’ extra work in reviewing the substitution(s).

Final payment is due regardless of the Engineer’s decision to accept or reject

the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s substitution request(s), and;

h. Late payments shall incur an interest rate of 1½% per month compounded

from due date to date of collection, and;

i. The Plumbing Trade Contractor’s balance due for his/her beneficial

contracted work, unpaid beyond 60 days of due date, will be deducted from

progress payments due the Plumbing Trade Contractor, and will include all

additional administrative costs incurred by the Owner, in affecting such

deductions.

3. Extra Engineering work created by the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s failure to

resolve the Engineer’s Items listed in the Construction Observation Report(s);

a. The Engineer’s basic services rendered to the Owner include periodic visits

to the site and providing written list of items (Construction Observation

Report) requiring the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s attention, reporting and

resolution;

b. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall provide written feedback and prompt

resolution of Construction Observation Items including a written schedule for

the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s completion of these Items followed by a

written confirmation of closure;

c. Should the Plumbing Trade Contractor fail to perform as described above,

and should such failure require, in the opinion of the Owner and the

Engineer, that the Engineer must expend extra work in bringing closure and

resolving the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s open Items, the Plumbing Trade

Contractor agrees pay the Engineer for all extra work required. The Engineer

will provide a written notice of the not to exceed budget for the Engineer’s

extra work in advance as a prudent notification that the extra work will be

initiated. Subsequent failure of the Plumbing Trade Contractor to resolve

these outstanding issues will result in the Engineer’s completion of the extra

work, and billing the Plumbing Trade Contractor accordingly. The Engineer’s

payment for this additional work shall be deducted from the Plumbing Trade

Contractor’s final payment for the work under this Contract. Deductions

from the Final Payment will be made to cover all the Owner’s additional

costs in affecting such deductions.

4. The Plumbing Trade Contractor’s request for substitution of specified equipment

when such specifications list a basis of design and at least one comparable product

such requests will be rejected.

5. Extra Engineering work created by the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s multiple

submissions of a single material or piece of equipment;

a. The Engineer’s basic services include two reviews for each piece of

equipment or material submittal. The Engineer’s first review takes place at

the initial Plumbing Trade Contractor’s submission of that submittal. The

Engineer’s second review takes place when the Engineer requires a

resubmission of that submittal.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 46 June 19, 2020

b. If the Engineer’s third review of a particular submittal is required for reasons

due to the Plumbing Trade Contractor, the Engineer will provide the

Plumbing Trade Contractor with a written budget, not to exceed quotation for

the Engineer’s extra work in reviewing the submittal.

c. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the

Engineer’s extra charges.

d. The Plumbing Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to


e. The balance of the Engineer’s charges beyond the retainage shall be paid

upon completion of the Engineers’ extra work in reviewing the submittal.

f. Late payments shall incur an interest rate of 1½% per month compounded

from due date to date of collection.

g. The Plumbing Trade Contractor’s balance, unpaid beyond 60 days of due

date, will be deducted from progress payments due the Plumbing Trade

Contractor for work under this Contract and will include additional

administrative costs incurred by the Owner in affecting all such deductions.

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 47 June 19, 2020

3.25 FORMS

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 48 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 49 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 4:220010 - 50 June 19, 2020

END OF SECTION 220010

FVHD 5195 4:220513 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-

current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or

shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate

connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with

indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering

service factor.

FVHD 5195 4:220513 - 2 June 19, 2020

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in

motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed

and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses

produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally

protected motors.

FVHD 5195 4:220513 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of

motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Filled-system thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Thermowells.

4. Dial-type pressure gages.

5. Gage attachments.

6. Test plugs.

7. Test-plug kits.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=1682

FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 2 June 19, 2020

a. Miljoco Corporation.

b. Trerice, H. O. Co.

c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

1. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

2. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

3. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

4. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated

in deg F.

5. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

6. Window: Glass.

7. Ring: Metal.

8. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360

degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem

and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


of the following:




2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass.

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457058264







FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee

fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


of the following:




d. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.


3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads

and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.



in psi.


9. Window: Glass.

10. Ring: Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.






FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads

and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated

piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Miljoco Corporation.

2. Trerice, H. O. Co.

3. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include

extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS


following:

1. Miljoco Corporation.


3. WATTS.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and

adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter

probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial

and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F.

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial


E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and

probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.









FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 5 June 19, 2020

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings

if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted

positions.

F. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at

the most readable position.

G. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.

3. Other locations indicated by the Drawings and applicable Division 22 Sections.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3. Other locations indicated by the Drawings and applicable Division 22 Sections.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and

maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

FVHD 5195 4:220519 - 6 June 19, 2020

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be one of the

following:

1. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type.

2. Metal case, industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be one of

the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

a. Test plugs are only permitted on the inlet side

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be one of the

following:


C. Natural Gas piping:

1. Stainless steel test plug with chloroprene based (Neoprene) rubber inserts suitable

for natural gas piping.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.


FVHD 5195 4:220523.12 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. Press-end connection: Valves suitable for connection to a pressure-sealed system.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61and NSF 372.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

FVHD 5195 4:220523.12 - 2 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.

2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.

4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made

with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective

sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing

insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide NIBCO

INC.; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

c. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

2. Description:







FVHD 5195 4:220523.12 - 3 June 19, 2020

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145.

b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

c. Body Design: Two piece.

d. Body Material: Forged brass.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Brass.

h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

i. Port: Full.

B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Press Ends:






2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145.

b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig.



e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

g. Seats: PTFE or RPTFE.

h. Stem: Brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

k. O-Ring Seal: Buna-N or EPDM.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or

Soldered Ends:





c. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145.














FVHD 5195 4:220523.12 - 4 June 19, 2020


d. Body Material: Bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Bronze or brass.


i. Port: Full.

B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends:





c. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145.




e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

g. Seats: PTFE or RTPFE.

h. Stem: Bronze or brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Full.

k. O-Ring Seal: EPDM or Buna-N.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during

shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats

made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for

proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material

composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.







FVHD 5195 4:220523.12 - 5 June 19, 2020

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow

service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for valve

tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher

CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 4 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint

valve-end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 4 and Smaller:

1. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. Provide with threaded,

solder, or press connection-joint ends.

2. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with

threaded, solder, or press connection-joint ends.

END OF SECTION 220523.12

FVHD 5195 4:220523.14 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.

2. Bronze swing check valves, press ends.

3. Iron swing check valves.

4. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. Press-end connection: Valves suitable for a pressure-sealed system.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.




2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set check valves in either closed or open position.



FVHD 5195 4:220523.14 - 2 June 19, 2020




handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:


2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.


4. ASME B16.18 for solder joint.


C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

D. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System

Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

E. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made


F. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system


G. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:




b. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

c. WATTS.

2. Description:







FVHD 5195 4:220523.14 - 3 June 19, 2020

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.


c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.

d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze.

e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends:




b. Elkhart Products Corporation.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139.




e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig

g. Disc: Brass or bronze.

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:




b. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

c. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.


c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged or threaded. See valve schedule articles.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Gasket: Asbestos free.













FVHD 5195 4:220523.14 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.4 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves, 300 CWP:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Victaulic Company; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Shurjoint-Apollo Piping Products USA Inc.

b. Tyco by Johnson Controls Company.

2. Description:

a. CWP Rating: 300 psig.

b. Body Material: ASTM A536, ductile iron.

c. Seal: EPDM.

d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

















E. Check Valves: Install check valves for proper direction of flow.





FVHD 5195 4:220523.14 - 5 June 19, 2020

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for valve

tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service

but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.




B. End Connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged or threaded.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.

4. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Grooved.



1. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded

end connections.

2. Bronze swing check valves with press-end connections.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron swing check valves with metal seats, Class 125, with threaded or flanged end

connections.

2. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves, 300 CWP.


FVHD 5195 4:220523.15 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220523.15 - GATE VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze gate valves.

2. Iron gate valves.

3. Chainwheels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NRS: Nonrising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. RS: Rising stem.



1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.





3. Set gate valves closed to prevent rattling.



FVHD 5195 4:220523.15 - 2 June 19, 2020





PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:






C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSP 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.






G. RS Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions.

H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves, RS, Class 125:


of the following:


b. NIBCO INC.

c. Stockham; a Crane brand.

2. Description:





FVHD 5195 4:220523.15 - 3 June 19, 2020



c. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Iron Gate Valves, OS&Y, Class 125:


of the following:


b. NIBCO INC.


d. WATTS.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: Gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge.

g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 CHAINWHEELS


following:

1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.

2. Roto Hammer Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, chain guides, chain, and

attachment brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to hand wheels.

1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for

valve.

2. Chain: Hot-dip galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.









FVHD 5195 4:220523.15 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

















E. Install chainwheels on operators for gate valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96

inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for valve

tags and schedules.

3.3 ADJUSTING




A. Use gate valves for shutoff service only.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher


FVHD 5195 4:220523.15 - 5 June 19, 2020



1. Bronze gate valves, RS, Class 125 with soldered or threaded ends.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron gate valves, OS&Y, Class 125 with flanged ends.


FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal hanger-shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe-positioning systems.

7. Equipment supports.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following; maximum weights supported, maximum pipe dimensions supported, support

intervals, etc. Include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

a. Shop Drawings to be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Equipment supports. Include Product Data for components.



A. Welding certificates.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 2 June 19, 2020

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2015 ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as indicated, as defined in

applicable Division 01 Sections, to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, capable of supporting combined weight of

supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-

galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-

fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated

steel.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made

from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts,

saddles, and U-bolts.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


of the following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business.

b. Flex-Strut Inc.

c. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made of steel

channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.


8. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90, Electroplated zinc, or Hot-dip galvanized.

9. Plastic Coating: PVC.

2.5 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS


following:

1. ERICO International Corporation.

2. Pipe Shields Inc.

3. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

4. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-

psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-

psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of

pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.









FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland

cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel.

2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.

2.7 PIPE-POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system composed of metal brackets, clips, and

straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial

applications.

2.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-

carbon-steel shapes.

2.9 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections for firestopping materials

and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 5 June 19, 2020

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of

supported components plus 200 lb.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports,

clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe

hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size,

or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for

individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs

less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install

fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and

waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,

nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install

additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 6 June 19, 2020

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before

concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at

top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not

exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger-

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation

inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping

insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and

equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc

welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work;

and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections, so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for

shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted

surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded, shop-painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in applicable Division

09 Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 8 June 19, 2020

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified

in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment

that will not have field-applied finishes.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal

framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper

piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F pipes

NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of


10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension

of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 9 June 19, 2020

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate,

and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for

pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base

stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from

two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and

contraction occurs.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical

adjustment is unnecessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if

small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and

vertical adjustment is unnecessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to

expansion and contraction, is required.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to

suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 10 June 19, 2020

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of

beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of

beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if

loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by

manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger

with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

FVHD 5195 4:220529 - 11 June 19, 2020

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system

from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit


from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit


from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of

stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected

equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-

adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners instead of building attachments where required in

concrete construction.

R. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply

and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


FVHD 5195 4:220548.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

2. Resilient pipe guides.

3. Elastomeric hangers.

B. Provide vibration isolation for all ceiling suspended mounted equipment, and where

indicated; provide vibration isolation rails for all roof mounted air handling unit, and

where indicated.

C. Refer to applicable Vibration Isolation Schedule Article for additional requirements.

D. Method of isolation must be coordinated with Plumbing manufacturer’s equipment

regarding internal component isolation type/method to prevent redundant isolation types

which would increase noise and vibration. Vibration isolation must be provided in

accordance to recommendation of Plumbing equipment manufacturer.

E. Plumbing Contractor must furnish all approved mechanical equipment/ systems data to

the vibration isolation manufacturer such that their calculations will be based on data of

the actual equipment to be installed on this construction project.

F. Provision of vibration isolation systems must be coordinated with all aspects of the

building Plumbing systems and other trade installations relative to clearance

requirements.

G. Plumbing Contractor must submit vibration isolation drawing to the General Construction

Contractor for review and coordination of manufacturer’s performed calculations and

system attachment requirements. Include with the submission all installation details

which will be attached to the building systems so structural requirements provided by the

General Construction Contractor can be incorporated into the building systems to

adequately support/connect the Plumbing systems.



FVHD 5195 4:220548.13 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for

each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for

plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity,

including other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent

vertical travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal

isolation in all directions.

2.2 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

FVHD 5195 4:220548.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and

reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of

motion to meet location requirements.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods.


of the following:

a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

c. Mason Industries, Inc.

d. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower

hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to

steel contact.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,

piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

A. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or in other Division 22 Sections, provide

vibration isolation method as indicated.






FVHD 5195 4:220548.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

B. For Plumbing equipment not indicated, provide vibration isolation method in accordance

with 2015 ASRHAE Handbook – Applications, Chapter 48 – Noise and Vibration Control.

EQUIPMENT TYPE ISOLATION METHOD

MINIMUM

DEFLECTION

(INCHES)

In-line pumps Elastomeric hangers **

** Minimum deflection in accordance with performance requirements indicated in this Section

and the professional engineer responsible for the vibration calculations and isolator selections.

Coordinate minimum deflection with the Equipment Manufacturer and referenced ASHRAE

Handbook.


FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Plumbing Systems:

a. Domestic Water Heaters.

b. Hot Water Recirculation Pumps.

c. Thermostatic Mixing Valves.

d. Water Pressure Reducing Valves.

e. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Balancing Valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site

after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual

understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled

meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 2 June 19, 2020

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.

e. Coordination regarding scheduling of areas for turnover to the Owner.

f. Coordination and scheduling with HVAC Commissioning.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the

qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or

TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as

a TAB technician.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before

Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize

conflicts with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and

equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,

thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings. Verify that

locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for plumbing systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including plumbing system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of

philosophies and assumptions about plumbing system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system

effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced

capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of plumbing

equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to

rate equipment performance.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 4 June 19, 2020

H. Examine plumbing equipment and verify that bearings are greased, and equipment with

functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with

indicated perforations.

J. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting

or mixing fluid flows.

K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on plumbing equipment.

M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points

if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Plumbing systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment access doors are securely closed.

5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required

and access to balancing devices is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the equipment

manufacturer’s recommended procedures and the procedures contained in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 221123 “Domestic Water

Pumps” and Section 221123.13 “Domestic Water Packaged Booster Pumps.”

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including valve position indicators, and similar

controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to

show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump

to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow

rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare plumbing systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in

addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing

device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-

displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero

flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain

approval from Architect and comply with requirements in applicable

Division 22 Sections.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge

valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for

the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated

brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions

where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as

designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in

fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 6 June 19, 2020

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-

drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage

over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over

indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm,

pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures.

H. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of

balancing.

I. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following

data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds

varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove

proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model

number, serial number, and nameplate data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS

A. For gas-fired water heaters, check and adjust burners and controls for proper operation.

B. Adjust temperature sensors to provide leaving water temperature as indicated.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES

A. Adjust leaving water temperature to setpoint indicated with flow rate in accordance with

the valve manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. For valves with recirculation setup, make adjustments until there is no increase in water

temperature with the valve operating at a no flow condition. Follow valve manufacturer’s

written procedures

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Setup and adjust to value indicated per valve manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Measure downstream pressure to confirm setpoint is accurate.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR GAS PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Setup and adjust to value indicated per valve manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Measure downstream pressure to confirm setpoint is accurate.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be

reused.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment

that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and

refurbished. Verify the following:

1. Strainers are clean.

2. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.

3. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set plumbing system's water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Domestic Water Flow Rates: Plus or minus 10 percent.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 8 June 19, 2020

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for

systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing

devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes

and additions to plumbing systems and general construction to allow access for

performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and

problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each

system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate

sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by

the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Manufacturers' test data.

3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 9 June 19, 2020

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated

values.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of plumbing distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Water flow rates.

2. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

3. Balancing stations.

4. Position of balancing devices.

E. Gas-Fired Water Heater Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup

equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification.

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and unit size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Fuel type in input data.

g. Output capacity in Btu/h.

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.

F. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves

and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm.

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 10 June 19, 2020

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

G. Thermostatic Mixing Valve Reports:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.


2. Test Data:

a. Tempered water flow rate.

b. Outlet temperature.

H. Water Pressure Reducing Valve:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.



2. Test Data:

a. Inlet Pressure in psig.

b. Outlet Pressure in psig.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 11 June 19, 2020

I. Natural Gas Pressure Reducing Valve:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.


f. Gas flow rate in CFH.

2. Test Data:

a. Inlet Pressure in psig.

b. Outlet Pressure in psig.

J. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.15 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of commissioning authority.

B. Architect shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be

rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements

recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour

business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the

final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final

report and request a second final inspection.

FVHD 5195 4:220593 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another

TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and

deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, design professional may contact AABC

Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced

conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer

and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter

conditions.


FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment that is not factory

insulated:

1. Domestic water heater breechings (for non-factory insulated breechings).

2. Domestic water, hot-water pumps.

3. Domestic water storage tanks.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections.

2. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

3. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

4. Detail field application for each equipment type.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated.

Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an

apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of

Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by

testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and

adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-

developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with

appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

applicable Division 22 Sections.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that

have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each

area of construction.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where

insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride

content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in

accordance with ASTM C795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the

manufacturing process.

F. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johns

Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company; or a comparable product by one of the

following:

a. Knauf Insulation.

b. Manson Insulation Inc.

c. Owens Corning.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply

with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. Provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ.

Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Knauf

Insulation; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation.

b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

H. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket.



following:




















FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 4 June 19, 2020

c. Owens Corning.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C1393.



following:


b. Knauf Insulation.

c. Manson Insulation Inc.

2. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ jacket.

3. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more.

4. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or

less.

5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C195.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for

bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements.

4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Solvent Based, Outdoor Use: Suitable for outdoor use on below-

ambient services.








FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 5 June 19, 2020



3. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient

services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at

manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere

fire-resistant lagging cloths over insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F.

3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be

compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


3. Color: White.

2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.

When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 6 June 19, 2020

2. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

3. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

4. Elongation: 2 percent.

5. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

6. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4

inch wide with wing seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed

for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or

Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040-inch thick, minimum 1- by 1-inch, aluminum in

accordance with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect

insulation application.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in

contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even

surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses

required for each item of equipment, as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either

wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace

insulation materials that get wet.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to

structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and

shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate

and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 8 June 19, 2020

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges

of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to

receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4

inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material

manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its

nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and

cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches

in similar fashion to butt joints.

O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure

insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates

per unit area, for minimum of 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,

including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints.

Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on

sides of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 9 June 19, 2020

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from

insulation end joints and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of

tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins, and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel

with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching

insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band

material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical

and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for

securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel

and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one

circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end.

Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a

wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and

stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest

circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of

equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for

securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and

inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open

ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide

box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges.

Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter

fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a

field-adjustable latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or stainless steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.

3. For below-ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and

penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor

barrier.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Equipment Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint

jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in applicable Division 09

Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 10 June 19, 2020

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket

material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual

inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect,

by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of

equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,

remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is

listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS (100 TO 250 DEG F)

MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS

IN INCHES

VAPOR

BARRIER REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

MINERAL FIBER BOARD OR

PIPE & TANK

2 NO NONE

DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER AND PUMPS, (100 TO 250 DEG F)


IN INCHES

VAPOR

BARRIER REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

MINERAL FIBER BOARD 2 NO NONE

FVHD 5195 4:220716 - 11 June 19, 2020

DOMESTIC HOT WATER HEATER BREECHING (FOR NON-FACTORY INSULATED)


IN INCHES

VAPOR

BARRIER REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

HIGH TEMPERATURE

MINERAL FIBER

BOARD OR

BLANKET

3 NO NONE


FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.

2. Domestic hot-water piping.

3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

4. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.

5. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.



permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each

type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation.

3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation.

4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for

each type of insulation.

5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and

access panels.







FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 2 June 19, 2020









testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable






2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-





1.7 COORDINATION



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements

for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required

for maintenance.

1.8 SCHEDULING






FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" articles for where









F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.



Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company ; Micro-Lok. or a comparable product by

one of the following:



c. Owens Corning.

2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.

3. 850 deg F.

4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.


Article.



B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with

ASTM C449.

2.3 ADHESIVES










FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 4 June 19, 2020

C. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.







4. Color: White.


ambient services.



3. Color: White.


services.




3. Color: White.


A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible

with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.


3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS



B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: White.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 5 June 19, 2020




1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered

by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and

presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and

forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints,

and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.10 TAPES



1. Width: 3 inches.






B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic

adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.


FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 6 June 19, 2020



2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


inch wide with wing seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or

Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

2.12 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosure:


Truebro, LavShield; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Or approved equal.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and

cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

3. Length: Coordinate with field conditions and trim to suit.

4. Color: Coordinate with the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



3.2 PREPARATION






FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in




surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and

specialties.


required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.



wet or dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace


H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at









4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields

over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support,

and shield.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 8 June 19, 2020

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate


L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:





3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing

lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.




5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints

and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its

nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and


O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.



P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:




4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor

insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor

insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top

of roof flashing.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 9 June 19, 2020

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation

flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing

at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire

Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections for firestopping and

fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in


3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings,

unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation made from same material

and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform

contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 10 June 19, 2020

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation of same material and thickness

as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section

closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not

less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever

is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box

studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and

thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less

than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is

thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate

strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced

without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains

vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2

times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union"

matching size and color of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with

a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather

mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing

mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible

elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,

valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers

to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes.

Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with

insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to

the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of

adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend

insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in

place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with

insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except

divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 11 June 19, 2020

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its

attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union

cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with

insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel

second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and

tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and

protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps

with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not

staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as

recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier

mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket

insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe

insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure

insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:



FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation

without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation

with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap

and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with

paint system identified below and as specified in applicable Division 09 Sections.




B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual


C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.



representative.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by

Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of

their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe,

three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of

threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves,

and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping

Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 13 June 19, 2020


inspections.


3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified

for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping

system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the

following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

C. Provide PVC fittings on all piping unless otherwise noted.

INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND RECIRC (105 TO 140 DEG F) PIPING, CONCEALED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1 NO NONE

1-1/2 AND

LARGER MINERAL FIBER 1-1/2 NO NONE

INTERIOR DOMESTIC HOT WATER AND RECIRC (105 TO 140 DEG F) PIPING, EXPOSED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1 NO P

1-1/2 AND

LARGER MINERAL FIBER 1-1/2 NO P

INTERIOR DOMESTIC COLD WATER (40 TO 60 DEG F) PIPING, CONCEALED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1/2 YES NONE

1-1/2 AND

LARGER

MINERAL FIBER 1 YES NONE

INTERIOR DOMESTIC COLD WATER (40 TO 60 DEG F) PIPING, ABOVESLAB, EXPOSED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1/2 YES P

1-1/2 AND

LARGER MINERAL FIBER 1 YES P

FVHD 5195 4:220719 - 14 June 19, 2020

PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS (FOR HOT AND COLD WATER SUPPLIES AND P-TRAP)

SINGLE

STATION YES YES

PROTECTIVE SHIELDING PIPING

ENCLOSURE


FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper tube and fittings.

2. Piping joining materials.

3. Encasement for piping.

4. Dielectric fittings.


A. Product Data:

1. Pipe and tube.

2. Fittings.

3. Joining materials.

4. Transition fittings.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items

described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.

B. System purging and disinfecting activities report.


1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then

only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements

indicated:

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water

service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

F. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Copper Tube Appurtenances:



a. Anvil International.

b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.

c. Shurjoint Piping Products USA Inc.

2. Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B75 copper tube or ASTM B584 bronze

castings.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions; rigid pattern unless

otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting, EPDM-rubber gasket, UL classified per NSF

61 and NSF 372, and rated for minimum 180 deg F, for use with ferrous housing

and steel bolts and nuts; 300 psig minimum CWP pressure rating.

G. Copper Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Viega

LLC or comparable product by one of the following:


b. NIBCO INC.

2. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each

end.











FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 3 June 19, 2020

3. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21,

nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for

general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: Sheet or tube.

C. Color: Black.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be

joined.

B. Dielectric Nipples:


of the following:

a. Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company.

b. Precision Plumbing Products.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F1545.

4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.





FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be

used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground

copper tubing.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall

be the following:

1. Annealed-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint

fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Annealed-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint

fittings; and brazed joints or copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed

joints.

F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint

fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings;

and pressure-sealed joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint

fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings;

and pressure-sealed joints.

3. Drawn-temper copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube

appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Sections for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A674 or

AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install valves according to the following applicable Division 22 Sections.

E. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements for pressure-reducing valves in applicable Division 22 Sections.

F. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and

plumb.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building

occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas

at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or

higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise

indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine,

and specialty.

O. Install pressure gauges on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump. Comply

with requirements for pressure gauges in applicable Division 22 Sections.

P. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for

thermostats in applicable Division 22 Sections.

Q. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with

requirements for thermometers in applicable Division 22 Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 6 June 19, 2020

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings

before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux to end of

tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube

Handbook."

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with

tools and procedure recommended by pressure-seal-fitting manufacturer. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to

AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes

or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in

tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type,

and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts

according to ASME B31.9.

I. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with

materials of both piping systems.

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.5 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 4 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in applicable


B. Install hangers for copper tubing and piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities

having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

D. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and piping to comply with MSS-58, locally

enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most

stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to

join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and

connect to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but

not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use

flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in applicable Division 22 Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 8 June 19, 2020

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return

piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping

during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been

inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day

before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of

authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before

concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe

tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure

compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass

tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities

having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not

air bound and that piping is full of water.

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 9 June 19, 2020

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have

been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,

submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of

piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered

and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that

was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating

pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials.

Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test

pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Hydrostatic testing and documentation of test results for polypropylene

piping to be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and

submitted to the manufacturer upon successful completion per warranty

requirements.

f. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion

thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

g. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having

jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either

AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50

ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200

ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming

from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

FVHD 5195 4:221116 - 10 June 19, 2020

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods

are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work

progresses.


FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backflow preventers.

2. Water pressure-reducing valves.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

5. Strainers for domestic water piping.

6. Wall hydrants.

7. Drain valves.

8. Water-hammer arresters.

9. Trap-seal primer device.

10. Flexible connectors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AMI: Advanced Metering Infrastructure.

B. AMR: Automatic Meter Reading.

C. FKM: A family of fluroelastomer materials defined by ASTM D1418.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.

1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Test and inspection reports.

FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 2 June 19, 2020

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Domestic water piping specialties intended to convey or dispense water for human

consumption are to comply with the SDWA, requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction, and NSF 61 and NSF 372, or to be certified in compliance with NSF 61 and

NSF 372 by an American National Standards Institute (ANSI)-accredited third-party

certification body that the weighted average lead content at wetted surfaces is less than or

equal to 0.25 percent.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless

otherwise indicated.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Zurn

Industries, LLC or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.

b. WATTS.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013.

3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; ductile or cast iron with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged

ends on inlet and outlet.





FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 3 June 19, 2020

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

B. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies:


of the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand.

b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. WATTS.


3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated.

4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; ductile or cast iron with interior lining that

complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged

ends on inlet and outlet.

2.4 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:


of the following:


b. WATTS.

c. Zurn Industries, LLC.


3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.

4. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies

with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.

6. End Connections: Threaded or solder for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged or solder for

NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:








FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 4 June 19, 2020


of the following:




2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

5. Body: Copper alloy.

6. Port: Standard or full port.

7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass or stainless steel.

8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves, MV-1:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

b. Leonard Valve Company.

c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Type: Cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water

supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle.

8. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

9. Piping Finish: Copper.

10. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for surface mounting and with hinged,

stainless steel door.

B. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves, MV-2:



a. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

b. Leonard Valve Company.

c. POWERS; A WATTS Brand.













FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 5 June 19, 2020

2. Standard: ASSE 1017 and ASSE 1070, thermostatically controlled, water tempering

valve.


4. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:


2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies

with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.


larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.033 inch.

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.062 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.8 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants, WH-1:



a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International.

b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include

wall clamp.

6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

7. Outlet, Concealed: With integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread

complying with ASME B1.20.7.

8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

9. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

10. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.





FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 6 June 19, 2020

B. Moderate-Climate Wall Hydrants, WH-2:




b. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

4. Operation: Loose key.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

6. Outlet, Concealed:

a. With integral vacuum breaker or nonremovable hose-connection vacuum

breaker complying with ASSE 1011 or backflow preventer complying with

ASSE 1052.

b. Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

9. Operating Key(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.9 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.

5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.10 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


of the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International.








FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 7 June 19, 2020

c. Josam Company.

d. WATTS.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


of the following:


b. WATTS.



3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.

4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.

2. Mason Industries, Inc.

3. Metraflex Company (The).

B. Stainless Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless steel tubing with stainless

steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.











FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 8 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers: Install in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems

and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination.

Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with

air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least

two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device

attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for

this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Water Regulators: Install with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gauges on

inlet and outlet.

C. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted. Set at indicated

design flow rates.

D. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on

inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

E. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each water pressure-reducing

valve and pump.

F. Water-Hammer Arresters: Install in water piping in accordance with PDI-WH 201.

G. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward

drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS


B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for

service and maintenance.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect wiring in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

B. Ground equipment in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 9 June 19, 2020

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in

accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

A. Connect control wiring in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each of the following:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Water pressure-reducing valves.

3. Balancing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

5. Wall hydrants.

6. Trap-seal primer device.

7. Water meters.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate

safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in

addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in other Division 22

Sections.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

D. Adjust each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check, backflow-

prevention assembly in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, authorities

having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test

and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer and double-check,

backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the

device's reference standard.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

FVHD 5195 4:221119 - 10 June 19, 2020

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.



FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.

2. Piping specialties.

3. Piping and tubing joining materials.

4. Manual gas shutoff valves.

5. Pressure regulators.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred

spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above

ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.

2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components.

3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models.

4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.


B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and

elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 2 June 19, 2020

multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the

same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion

joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot.

2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for pressure regulator assembly.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is

shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items

involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated

with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to


B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas

piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of

dirt, debris, and moisture.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid

damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.

Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to

facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions

and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply

according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's written

permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed

behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 08 Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is

more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5

psig or less.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M for butt welding and socket

welding.

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground

joint, and threaded ends.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 4 June 19, 2020

4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections,

and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1.

b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.

c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.

d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-

rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Steel Pressure Seal Fittings: Viega MegaPress for Natural Fuel Gas Systems or equal.

Fittings to conform to material requirements in ASTM A420 or ASME B16.3 and

performance criteria of ANSI/CSA LC4. Sealing elements shall be HNBR

(Hydrogenated Nitrile Butadiene Rubber). Utilize Manufacturer’s special tools and

ensure joints are rated for 180 deg F and 125 psig.”

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D3261, butt-fusion type with

dimensions matching PE pipe.

2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with

ASTM D2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A53/A53M, black

steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D2513, SDR 11 inlet.

b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black

steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering.

c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting.

d. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection.

e. Tracer wire connection.

f. Ultraviolet shield.

g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe

to PE pipe.

a. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.

c. Acetal collets.

d. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener.

5. Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE

pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

a. Fiber-reinforced plastic body.

b. PE body tube.

c. Buna-nitrile seals.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 5 June 19, 2020

d. Acetal collets.

e. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

6. Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel

pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.

a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.

b. Buna-nitrile seals.

c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.

d. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.

3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.

4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.

5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.

6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.

7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

8. Maximum Length: 72 inches

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with

50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials

appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.5 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve

type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with

ASME B16.33.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 6 June 19, 2020


2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual

Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently

marked on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with

ASME B16.38.


2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual

Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


of the following:

a. Nibco, Inc.

b. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

c. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc.

d. Perfection Corporation.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B584.

3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.

4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.

5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.

6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.

7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" Articles.


9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


of the following:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

b. Mueller Co.








FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 7 June 19, 2020

c. Xomox Corporation.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A126, Class B.

3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron.

4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic.

5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas.

6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" Articles.

7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.

8. Pressure Class: 125 psig.

9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL


10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

2.6 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas.

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.

3. Elevation compensator.

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.


Maxitrol Company; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Eaton.

b. Harper Wyman Co.

c. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.

6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint

finish.

8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved

by authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 5 psig.







FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 8 June 19, 2020




joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

d. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping

section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that

natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental

ignition.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 9 June 19, 2020

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas

piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished

grade. Comply with requirements in other Sections for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.

C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective

coating manufacturer.

3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install pressure gage downstream from service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in

other Division 22 Sections.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas

piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate

friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated

unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas



F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment

traps.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 10 June 19, 2020

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for

roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including

service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not

install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or

capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3

inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of

drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure

protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below

grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas

piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of

steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment

conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may

be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from

physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker

barriers.

3. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or

trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter

or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level

side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 11 June 19, 2020

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to

each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically

operated valve.

V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line/appliance regulator.

Pressure gages are specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with


X. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with



A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space

adequate for servicing and testing.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified.


or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes

and welding operators.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field

welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas

service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in applicable Division

22 Sections.

B. Install hangers for steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod

diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having

jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Install hangers for corrugated stainless-steel tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally


stringent.

D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

E. Support vertical runs of steel piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Support vertical runs of corrugated stainless-steel tubing to comply with manufacturer's

written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction

requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment

grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve

within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve

and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as

practical to inlet of each appliance.

FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 13 June 19, 2020

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for piping and valve

identification.

3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 09 Sections for painting interior and

exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components,

with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel.

d. Color: Yellow.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, and piping specialties, except components,

with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd.

d. Color: Yellow.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with

materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code

and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


FVHD 5195 4:221123 - 14 June 19, 2020

3.12 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion, or mechanical couplings; service-line

risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints, or pressure-sealed joints.

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints, or pressured sealed

joints.

2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the

following:


2. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:



FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221123.21 - INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. In-line pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include construction materials, rated capacities,

certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment. Show support locations,

type of support, weight on each support, required clearances, and other details, drawn to

scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using

input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which pumps will be attached.

2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For inline, domestic-water pumps to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 2 June 19, 2020

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written instructions for handling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System

Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.2 IN-LINE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line pumps.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings; or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

C. Pump Construction:

1. The pump shall be a wet rotor inline pump, in cast lead free bronze body

construction. Pump shall be constructed for 230 deg F and 175 psig working

pressures

2. Pump construction shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing the piping

connections.

3. The pump internals shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping

connections.

4. Pump shall be equipped with a water-tight seal to prevent leakage.

5. Pump volute shall be of a lead free bronze for domestic water systems. The

connection style shall be flanged.

D. Motor: Motor shall be a synchronous, permanent-magnet (PM) motor and tested with the

pump as one unit. Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable.

1. Each motor shall have an Integrated Variable Frequency Drive tested as one unit by

the manufacturer.

2. Integrated motor protection shall be verified by UL to protect the pump against

over/under voltage, over temperature of motor and/or electronics, over current,

locked rotor and dry run (no load condition).

3. Pump shall have BACnet connections built into the VFD.




FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 3 June 19, 2020

4. Provide analog inputs, such as 0-10V and 4-20mA, built into the VFD.

5. Each pump shall be factory performance tested before shipment.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven

load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

4. Operation of Pump: On or off.

5. Transformer: Provide if required.

6. Power Requirement: 120 V ac.

7. Settings: Start pump at 115 deg F and stop pump at 120 deg F.

B. Control Sequence: Vary the speed of the pump in order to maintain a constant differential

temperature between the built-in temperature sensor and external temperature sensor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support

pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in applicable

Division 22 Sections. Fabricate brackets or supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in applicable


FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 4 June 19, 2020

D. Install pressure switches in water-supply piping.

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

F. Install timers.

G. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.


A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Applicable Division 22 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service

and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line pumps.

b. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in applicable


D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected

piping. Comply with requirements for strainers specified in applicable Division 22

Sections. Comply with requirements for valves specified in other Division 22 Sections.

1. Install pressure gauge at suction of each pump and pressure gauge at discharge of

each pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install

pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply

with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in applicable



A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices.

B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices.

C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater

burner and time-delay relay.

FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

applicable Division 22 Sections for identification of pumps.








proper motor rotation and unit operation.



C. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and

inspections.


3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Set pressure switches, thermostats, timers, and time-delay relays for automatic

starting and stopping operation of pumps.

5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot

liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do

not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

7. Start motor.

8. Open discharge valve slowly.

9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.

10. Adjust timer settings.

FVHD 5195 4:221123.21 - 6 June 19, 2020

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain in-line domestic

water pumps.

1. Train maintenance personnel for 1 hour minimum on procedures and schedules for

starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals.

3. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notice.


FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.


4. Specialty pipe fittings.

5. Encasement for underground metal piping.



B. Shop Drawings: For hubless, single-stack drainage system. Include plans, elevations,

sections, and details.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities


only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written

permission.

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 2 June 19, 2020

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum

working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,

fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe

sizes.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. AB & I Foundry; a part of the McWane family of companies.

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Tyler Pipe; a part of McWane family of companies.

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

D. Caulking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS


following:

1. AB & I Foundry; a part of the McWane family of companies.

2. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.

3. Tyler Pipe; a part of McWane family of companies.

B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.









FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company; or a comparable product by one of the

following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and

tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.


A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper,

solder-joint fittings.

C. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux.

2.6 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified

piping system fitting.

2. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Standard: ASTM C 1460.

b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening

mechanism on each end.

c. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:

a. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.

2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.

4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.

5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.





FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 4 June 19, 2020

2. Dielectric Nipples:

a. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

2) Electroplated steel nipple.

3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.7 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch minimum thickness.

C. Form: Sheet or tube.

D. Color: Black.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in other

Sections.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION


piping systems.

1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations.

2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination

drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment


C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas



D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 5 June 19, 2020

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends.

1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in

direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical.

2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed

back to back or side by side with common drain pipe.

a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees.

4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are

connected.

a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system.

1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.

Place hub ends of piping upstream.

2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Waste: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3

and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or

AWWA C105/A 21.5.

N. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 6 June 19, 2020

O. Install engineered soil and waste and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having

jurisdiction.

P. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to

building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary

drainage force-main piping.

b. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

2. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping.

a. Comply with requirements for drains specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by

authorities having jurisdiction.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.


A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron

Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.

2. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and

valves as follows:

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 7 June 19, 2020

a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.

b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged.

c. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use

ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

E. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and

thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

Torque bolts in cross pattern.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs.

2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and

tubing.

2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 4 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.

3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for general-duty valve

installation requirements.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified

in applicable Division 22 Sections.

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive

environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive

environments.

3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 8 June 19, 2020

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe

rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Install hangers for cast-iron and copper soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing

and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and

authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical runs of cast iron and copper soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally


stringent.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes

indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with

cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in applicable Division

22 Sections.

6. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated.

a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection.

b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Sanitary Sewer: To exterior force main.

2. Sewage Pump: To sewage pump discharge.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance

of equipment.

F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 9 June 19, 2020

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at

final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping.

B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or

closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or

inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having

jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired.

a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test,

complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and

vent piping until it has been tested and approved.

a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside

leaders on completion of roughing-in.

a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but

not less than 10-foot head of water.

b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water

level must not drop.

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 10 June 19, 2020

c. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps

filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight.

a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave

building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg.

b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this

pressure.

c. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air

throughout period of inspection.

d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof,

until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid

clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

D. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.

2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.

4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:



coupled joints.


D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be any of the following:

FVHD 5195 4:221316 - 11 June 19, 2020



coupled joints.

3. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints.


E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be any of the following:



coupled joints.


F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.



FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backwater valves.

2. Cleanouts.

3. Air-admittance valves.

4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashing assemblies.

2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for preformed flashings.

3. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for through-penetration firestop

assemblies.

4. Section 221323 "Sanitary Waste Interceptors" for metal and concrete interceptors

outside the building, grease interceptors, grease-removal devices, oil interceptors,

and solids interceptors.

5. Section 221423 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm

water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins.

6. Section 224300 "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors.

7. Section 334200 "Stormwater Conveyance" for storm drainage piping and piping

specialties outside the building.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



B. Shop Drawings:

FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sanitary waste piping specialties to include in


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS

A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified

testing agency.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.

d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron

soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug.

6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.












FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 3 June 19, 2020

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.

4. Type: Adjustable housing.

5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

6. Clamping Device: Required.

7. Outlet Connection: Spigot.

8. Closure: Brass plug with tapered threads.

9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with setscrews or other device.

10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

12. Top-Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

13. Riser: ASTM A74, Service Class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to

cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:




b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

4. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil pipe

test tee as required to match connected piping.

5. Closure Plug:

a. Brass.

b. Countersunk or raised head.

c. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw.

d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

6. Wall Access, Cover Plate: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless steel cover

plate with screw.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected

piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.






FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 4 June 19, 2020

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-

seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap

between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated

indirect waste piping.

D. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve

for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe

extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and

galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor

slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

E. Stack Flashing Fittings:

1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for

terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

F. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.

Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

G. Frost-Resistant Vent Terminals:

1. Description: Manufactured or shop-fabricated assembly constructed of copper,

lead-coated copper, or galvanized steel.

2. Design: To provide 1-inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of

flashing collar extension, with counterflashing.

FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 5 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping.

1. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered

over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for

servicing.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the

following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping

unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush

with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.

F. Install stack air-admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping.

G. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall.

H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal

primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with

waterproof membrane.

M. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

FVHD 5195 4:221319 - 6 June 19, 2020

N. Install frost-resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-

inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

O. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for

easy access and maintenance.

P. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch

clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

Q. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

R. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap

is indicated.


A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for piping installation

requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, to allow service and maintenance.


A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate


addition to identifying unit.

1. Nameplates and signs are specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or

debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


FVHD 5195 4:221319.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 221319.13 - SANITARY DRAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Floor drains.

2. Floor sinks.

3. Trench drains.

4. Channel drainage systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene styrene.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.

D. PE: Polyethylene.

E. PP: Polypropylene.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DRAIN ASSEMBLIES

A. Sanitary drains shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

FVHD 5195 4:221319.13 - 2 June 19, 2020

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains FD-1:




b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Anchor Flange: Required.


8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Backwater Valve: Not required.

10. Sediment Bucket: Not required.

11. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

13. Top Shape: Square.

14. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

15. Funnel: Not required.

16. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-

seal primer valve connection.

17. Trap Material: Cast iron.

18. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Drains FD-2:




b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.


2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.

3. Pattern: Floor drain.

4. Body Material: Gray iron.

5. Seepage Flange: Required.

6. Anchor Flange: Not required.


8. Outlet: Bottom.

9. Backwater Valve: Not required.

10. Sediment Bucket: Not required.











FVHD 5195 4:221319.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

11. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.

12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze.

13. Top Shape: Round.

14. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty.

15. Funnel: Not required.

16. Inlet Fitting: Not required.

17. Trap Material: Cast iron.

18. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap.

19. Trap Features: Not required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush

with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage.

3. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than

1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange, so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring.

a. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

5. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for piping installation

requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22 Sections for miscellaneous sanitary

drainage piping specialties.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

FVHD 5195 4:221319.13 - 4 June 19, 2020


A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate


addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or

debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating


B. Shop Drawings:



A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room drawing or BIM model, drawn to scale, on

which the items described in this Section are shown and coordinated with all building

trades.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired, domestic-water heater.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in


FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 2 June 19, 2020

1.6 COORDINATION


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired,

domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: One year(s).

b. Expansion Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and use.

B. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to

comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial,

domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.2 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:



a. A. O. Smith Corporation.

b. Bradford White Corporation.

c. PVI; A WATTS Brand.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single

manufacturer.

3. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

4. Description: Manufacturer's proprietary design to provide at least 95 percent

combustion efficiency at optimum operating conditions.

5. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-

pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach

tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5

for steel and stainless steel flanges and in accordance with

ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for

potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank

fittings and outlets.

6. Factory-Installed, Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal with hose-end connection.

d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IES 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls.

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency

requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water heaters and

natural-gas fuel.

g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

h. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff

devices or systems.

i. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great

as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating

of domestic-water heater. Select one relief valve with sensing element that

extends into storage tank.





FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Expansion Tanks:



a. A. O. Smith Corporation.

b. AMTROL, Inc.

c. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

2. Source Limitations: Obtain domestic-water heaters from single source from single

manufacturer.

3. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-

installed, butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-

operating pressure at tank.

4. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling.

Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 barrier materials for

potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank

fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than

base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement in accordance with

ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. Comply with requirements for ball-type shutoff valves specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

1. Comply with requirements for balancing valves specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

E. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1, manually operated. Furnish for installation in

piping.

F. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off

automatic valve.

G. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least

as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than working-pressure rating of

domestic-water heater. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage

tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.





FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 5 June 19, 2020

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-

code construction, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half

times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water

heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in


1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial domestic-water heaters if

installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of

concrete base.

5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through

concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, in accordance with layout drawings,

original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended

clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters

and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff

valves specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters in accordance with NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters

without shutoff valves.

FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 6 June 19, 2020

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters

without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas

pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if

required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and

automatic gas valves specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-

water heaters with storage. Extend domestic-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain

piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by

positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open

drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-

end drain valves specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

G. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water

heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each

domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water

heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply

with requirements for valves and thermometers specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

H. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

I. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

J. Charge domestic-water expansion tanks with air to required system pressure.

K. Install dielectric fittings in all locations where piping of dissimilar metals is to be joined.

The wetted surface of the dielectric fitting contacted by potable water shall contain less

than 0.25 percent of lead by weight.


A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

FVHD 5195 4:223400 - 7 June 19, 2020

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for

service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-

water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in









proper operation.



C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water

heaters.

1. Train maintenance personnel for 2 hours on procedures and schedules for starting

and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining water heaters.




FVHD 5195 4:224213.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 224213.13 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves and tanks.

3. Toilet seats.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Effective Flush Volume: Average of two reduced flushes and one full flush per fixture.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for water closets.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and

identified with labels describing contents.

FVHD 5195 4:224213.13 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets WC-1: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.



a. American Standard.

b. Kohler Co.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standard of Design: American Standard, Madera 3043.001.

3. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Handicapped/elderly, complying with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.6 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

i. Color: White.

4. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASME A112.4.3.

5. Flushometer Valve: Refer to the Flushometer Article.

6. Toilet Seat: Refer to the Toilet Seats Article.

B. Water Closets WC-2: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, top spud.




b. Kohler Co.

c. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standard of Design: American Standard, Madera 2234.001.

3. Bowl:



c. Type: Siphon jet.









FVHD 5195 4:224213.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Standard.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated.

g. Water Consumption: 1.6 gal. per flush.

h. Spud Size and Location: NPS 1-1/2; top.

i. Color: White.

4. Bowl-to-Drain Connecting Fitting: ASME A112.4.3.


6. Toilet Seat: Refer to the Toilet Seats Article.

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Solenoid-Actuator, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:



a. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC.

b. Sloan Valve Company.


2. Standard of Design: Sloan G2 8111.


4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.

5. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device (vacuum

breaker).

6. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

7. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

8. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

9. Style: Exposed.

10. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in


application.

11. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951, and

listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and application.

12. Override Button: Required.

13. Consumption: 1.6 gal. per flush.

14. Minimum Inlet: NPS 1.

15. Minimum Outlet: NPS 1-1/4.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


of the following:






FVHD 5195 4:224213.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

a. American Standard America.

b. Bemis Manufacturing Company.

c. Kohler Co.

d. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.

3. Material: Plastic.

4. Integral Anti-Microbial Coating: Required

5. Type: Commercial (Heavy duty).

6. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

7. Hinge: Non-Self-sustaining.

8. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

9. Seat Cover: Not required].

10. Color: White.

11. Standard of Design: Bemis Model 2155CT.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to

verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments

to piping or building substrate.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install water closet flange for floor mounted, bottom discharge water closets.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.




FVHD 5195 4:224213.13 - 5 June 19, 2020

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in other Division 22 Sections.

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in applicable Division 07 Sections.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size

fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and

maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

water closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.


FVHD 5195 4:224213.16 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 224213.16 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Supports.




components and profiles, and finishes for urinals.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves and electronic sensors to

include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and

identified with labels describing contents.

1. Flushometer-Valve Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one of each type.

FVHD 5195 4:224213.16 - 2 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL-HUNG URINALS

A. Urinals UR-1: Wall hung, back outlet, washout, accessible.




b. Kohler Co.


2. Standard of Design: American Standard, Washbrook, 6590.001EC

3. Fixture:



c. Type: Washout with extended shields.

d. Strainer or Trapway: Manufacturer's standard strainer with integral trap.

e. Water Consumption: Low.

f. Spud Size and Location: NPS 3/4, top.

g. Outlet Size and Location: NPS 2, back.

h. Color: White.


5. Waste Fitting:

a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for coupling.

b. Size: NPS 2.

6. Support: Type I Urinal Carrier with fixture support plates and coupling with seal

and fixture bolts and hardware matching fixture. Include rectangular, steel uprights.

7. Urinal Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 URINAL FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Solenoid-Actuator, Diaphragm Flushometer Valves:



a. Delany Products.

b. Sloan Valve Company.



3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 125 psig.









FVHD 5195 4:224213.16 - 3 June 19, 2020

4. Features: Include integral check stop and backflow-prevention device (vacuum

breaker).

5. Material: Brass body with corrosion-resistant components.

6. Exposed Flushometer-Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

7. Panel Finish: Chrome plated or stainless steel.

8. Style: Exposed.

9. Actuator: Solenoid complying with UL 1951; listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and marked for intended location and

application.

10. Trip Mechanism: Battery-powered electronic sensor complying with UL 1951;

listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency; and


11. Override Button: Required.

12. Consumption: 0.125 gal. per flush.

13. Minimum Inlet: NPS 3/4.

14. Minimum Outlet: NPS 3/4.

15. Standard of Design: Sloan G2 8186.

2.3 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Urinal Carrier:


of the following:

a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


verify actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:






FVHD 5195 4:224213.16 - 4 June 19, 2020

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to

supports.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible

urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted

on open side of compartment.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in applicable Division 07 Sections.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match urinals.


C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in other Division 22 Sections.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

FVHD 5195 4:224213.16 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


FVHD 5195 4:224216.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 224216.13 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vitreous-china, wall-mounted lavatories.

2. Automatically operated lavatory faucets.

3. Supply fittings.

4. Waste fittings.

5. Lavatory supports.




components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring of automatic

faucets.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted

lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and


1. In addition to items specified in other Sections, include the following:

a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.

FVHD 5195 4:224216.13 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VITREOUS-CHINA, WALL-MOUNTED LAVATORIES

A. Lavatory - Vitreous China, Wall Mounted, with Back (LAV-1):




b. Kohler Co.


2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.

b. Type: For wall hanging.

c. Nominal Size: Rectangular, 20 by 18 inches.

d. Faucet-Hole Punching: Three holes, 2-inch centers.

e. Faucet-Hole Location: Top.

f. Color: White.

g. Mounting Material: Chair carrier.

3. Faucet: Refer to "Automatically Operated Lavatory Faucets" Article.

4. Support: Type II, concealed-arm lavatory carrier.

5. Lavatory Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly in accordance with ICC A117.1.

2.2 AUTOMATICALLY OPERATED LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for faucet materials that will be in

contact with potable water.

B. Lavatory Faucets - Automatic Type: Battery Powered Electronic Sensor Operated,

Mixing:








FVHD 5195 4:224216.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

a. Bradley Corporation.

b. Moen Incorporated.

c. Sloan Valve Company.

d. TOTO USA, INC.

2. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and UL 1951.

3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

4. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture

receptor.

5. Body Type: Single hole.

6. Body Material: Commercial, solid-brass, or die-cast housing with brazed copper

and brass waterway.

7. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

8. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm.

9. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed.

10. Spout: Rigid type.

11. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow.

12. Drain: Not part of faucet.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be

in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-

supply piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with

inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Wheel handle.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2.

2. ASME A112.18.6/CSA B125.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless steel, flexible hose

riser.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.





FVHD 5195 4:224216.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material:

a. Chrome-plated, one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch-thick

tubular brass wall bend; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

b. Stainless steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch thick

stainless steel tube to wall, and stainless steel wall flange.

2.5 LAVATORY SUPPORTS

A. Lavatory Carrier:


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb in accordance with roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for

people with disabilities or the elderly, in accordance with ICC A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

E. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant

requirements specified in applicable Division 07 Sections.

F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste

piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 22

Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:224216.13 - 5 June 19, 2020


A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and

vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



Sections.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

lavatories, fittings, and controls.

B. Install new batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning

methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.


FVHD 5195 4:224216.16 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 224216.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service basins.

2. Sink faucets.

3. Supply fittings.

4. Waste fittings.

B. Refer to the Architectural Documents for non-service sink and faucet manufacturer/model

requirements.




components and profiles, and finishes for sinks.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and

accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted

lavatories.


A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.




FVHD 5195 4:224216.16 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SERVICE BASINS

A. Service Basins (MR-1): Terrazzo, floor mounted.



a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International.

b. Fiat Products.

c. Florestone Products Co., Inc.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 99.

b. Shape: Square.

c. Nominal Size: 24 by 24 inches.

d. Height: 6 inches.

e. Tiling Flange: On two sides.

f. Rim Guard: On all top surfaces.

g. Color: Not applicable.

h. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet.

3. Mounting: On floor and flush to wall.

4. Faucet: MR-1 faucet.

2.2 SINK FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact

with potable water.

B. MR-1 Sink Faucets: Manual type, two lever handle mixing valve.

1. Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the

following:

1) Chicago Faucets; Geberit Company.

2) Kohler Co.

3) Sloan Valve Company.









FVHD 5195 4:224216.16 - 3 June 19, 2020

4) T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with

supplies and fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor.

4. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass.

5. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

6. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm.

7. Handle(s): Lever.

8. Mounting Type: Back/wall, exposed.

9. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass with wall brace.

10. Vacuum Breaker: Required for hose outlet.

11. Spout Outlet: Hose thread according to ASME B1.20.7.

2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 372 for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact

with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-

supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with

inlet connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Wheel handle.

F. Risers (for non-service sinks):

1. NPS 1/2.

2. ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel flexible hose.

2.4 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch-thick

tubular brass wall bend; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.


FVHD 5195 4:224216.16 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.5 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according

to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.

Comply with valve requirements specified in applicable Division 22 Sections.

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.


G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with

sealant requirements specified in applicable Division 07 Sections.

FVHD 5195 4:224216.16 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



Sections.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning

methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


FVHD 5195 4:224716 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 224716 - PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pressure water coolers and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of pressure water cooler.


components and profiles, and finishes.





A. Maintenance Data: For pressure water coolers to include in maintenance manuals.




1. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each type and size

indicated, but no fewer than 2 of each.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of water cooler that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period


FVHD 5195 4:224716 - 2 June 19, 2020

a. Refrigeration System.

b. Electrical components and water system.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Water coolers:

1) Refrigeration System: Five years.

2) Electrical components and water system: One year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE WATER COOLERS

A. Pressure Water Coolers EWC-1: Wall mounted, wheelchair accessible, with bottle filler.



a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.

b. Halsey Taylor.

c. Haws Corporation.

2. Standard of Design: Elkay LVRCGRN8WSK.

3. Standards:

a. Comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

b. Comply with ASHRAE 34, "Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants," for water coolers. Provide HFC 134a (tetrafluoroethane)

refrigerant unless otherwise indicated.

c. Comply with ICC A117.1.

4. Cabinet: Single, all stainless steel.

5. Bubbler: One, with adjustable stream regulator, located on each cabinet deck.

6. Control: Push button.

7. Bottle Filler: Sensor activation with automatic shutoff timer. Fill rate 0.5 to 1.5

gpm.

8. Drain: Grid with NPS 1-1/4 tailpiece.

9. Supply: NPS 3/8 with shutoff valve.

10. Waste Fitting: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2, NPS 1-1/4 brass P-trap.

11. Filter: One or more water filters complying with NSF 42 and NSF 53 for cyst and

lead reduction to below EPA standards; with capacity sized for unit peak flow rate.

12. Cooling System: Electric, with hermetically sealed compressor, cooling coil, air-

cooled condensing unit, corrosion-resistant tubing, refrigerant, corrosion-resistant-

metal storage tank, and adjustable thermostat.





FVHD 5195 4:224716 - 3 June 19, 2020

a. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended

location and application.

13. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Cooled Water: 8 gph.

b. Ambient-Air Temperature: 90 deg F.

c. Inlet-Water Temperature: 80 deg F.

d. Cooled-Water Temperature: 50 deg F.

14. Support: Type I Water Cooler Carrier.

15. Water Cooler Mounting Height: Handicapped/elderly according to ICC A117.1.

2.2 SUPPORTS

A. Type I Water Cooler Carrier:


of the following:

a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.

b. Josam Company.

c. WATTS.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to

verify actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated

for children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted

fixtures.






FVHD 5195 4:224716 - 4 June 19, 2020

C. Install mounting frames, affixed to building construction, and attach recessed, pressure

water coolers, and in-wall bottle filling stations to mounting frames.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball valve. Install valves in locations where they

can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary

drainage system.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings.


G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant,

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements

specified in applicable Division 07 Sections.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and

vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


C. Install ball shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Install valve upstream from filter

for water cooler. Comply with valve requirements specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in applicable Division 22

Sections.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

B. Adjust pressure water-cooler temperature settings.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installing fixture, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and

debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

FVHD 5195 4:224716 - 5 June 19, 2020

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


PART 5 - HVACR WORK

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230010 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC

1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE HVAC WORK 1.3 INTENT OF THE HVAC CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.4 PROPOSAL PREPARATION 1.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS 1.8 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES 1.9 TESTS 1.10 CLEANING 1.11 INSTRUCTING OWNER'S PERSONNEL 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1.13 GUARANTEE 1.14 ENTRANCE OF EQUIPMENT 1.15 VISIT TO SITE 1.16 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, RFI(s) 1.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 1.18 SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1.19 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 1.20 CONTINUITY OF INTERIOR BUILDING SERVICE UTILITIES 1.21 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND HEATING 1.22 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (GENERAL) 1.23 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1.24 BREECHING, VENT, NATURAL GAS AND EXHAUST PIPING SUBMITTALS 1.25 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S AND SUB-CONTRACTORS LIST, KEYMEN RESUMES 2.2 SUBMITTALS 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.4 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 2.5 VIBRATION ELIMINATION 2.6 NOISE CONTROL 2.7 INSERTS, HANGER SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, FASTENINGS 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 2.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS 2.10 PIPING AND CONDUIT SLEEVES 2.11 SMOKE/FIRESTOPPING (MATERIALS) 2.12 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, SMOKE DETECTORS/SMOKE DETECTOR CONTROL 2.13 COMPRESSORS 2.14 REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 3 - EXECUTION

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 2 June 19, 2020

3.1 METHOD OF PROCEDURE 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY 3.5 SUPPORTS 3.6 LINTELS 3.7 ESCUTCHEONS 3.8 MACHINERY GUARDS 3.9 ROOFING WORK 3.10 PAINTING AND FINISHING 3.11 LUBRICATION 3.12 HVAC TRADE - ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION 3.13 ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS 3.14 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT 3.15 PIPING, DUCTS AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOORS 3.16 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 3.17 ABANDONMENT, REMOVAL AND RELOCATION 3.18 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (METHODS) 3.19 SUBSURFACE CONCEALED UNKNOWN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS 3.20 CONCRETE PATCHING (PROCEDURE) 3.21 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS 3.22 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.23 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.24 INDEMNIFICATION 3.25 ADDITIONAL HVAC TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES 3.26 FORMS

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS HVAC

1.1 GENERAL

A. The conditions of Divisions 00 and 01 apply to each and every Trade Contractor or other

person or persons supplying any material or labor entering this building and/or site, either

directly or indirectly. In the event of a conflict between Section 230010 and Divisions 00

and 01, the terms of Divisions 00 and 01 shall govern.

B. One Building Trade, the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Building

Trade, will be covered by these General Requirements HVAC.

C. For simplicity, this Building Trade will be referred to further herein as the HVAC Trade

Contractor. The HVAC Specifications and all HVAC Drawings, together with all addenda

make-up the HVAC Contract Documents, and are a part of the “Project Contract

Documents”, as described throughout these specifications.


Building Trade.





1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE HVAC WORK

A. The Scope and Objectives of the HVAC Work of this Project include, but are not limited

to:

1. Gas-fires boilers and associated piping;

2. Ductwork;

3. Piping;

4. Ductwork and piping insulation;

5. Automatic temperature controls;

6. Owner training;

7. Preparation of coordination drawings;

8. Preparation of as-built drawings in AutoCad format;

9. Periodic inspection of completed work to confirm compliance with Contract

Documents;

10. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for additional information.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 4 June 19, 2020

1.3 INTENT OF THE HVAC CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The intent of the HVAC Contract Documents is to include all items and labor necessary

for the proper execution and completion of the Work of the HVAC Trade Contractor.

The Contract Documents of all Trades are complimentary to each other; what is required

by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Performance of the HVAC Trade

Contractor is required only to the extent consistent with the Project Contract Documents

and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the desired results.





ambiguity or discrepancy, comply with the higher cost product (material plus labor), the

more stringent requirement, and supply the better quality or greater quantity of work.



following:


and labor necessary to install the equipment and systems indicated. Use the


show all details which may affect the HVAC bid proposal.

2. Include the work, as applicable, to remove and dispose of conduit, piping,

insulation, ductwork, equipment and appurtenances not required for new work,

unless otherwise indicated to be abandoned in place.






the following:


b. One Project Foreman;

c. Sheet Metal Sketcher.

1) It is recommended that the Sheet Metal Sketcher have a minimum of

10 years of applicable experience. Sheet Metal Sketcher shall prepare

all equipment arrangements and layout drawings, and initiate

coordination drawings.

5. Foreman must refine the detail, layout, coordination and fit of all of HVAC




FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 5 June 19, 2020



7. All Project Managers must organize, administrate, control and log the RFI process

for their respective trade. Where applicable, submit all RFI(s) for master RFI log

maintained by Lead/Prime Contractor.







By submitting a bid price, all Trade Contractors certify that the Contract Documents

have been thoroughly reviewed and are sufficient for construction, and that the

bidding Trade Contractors have adequate information to establish and determine

their responsibility for materials, methods, costs, and schedule for their work.






Contract Documents.










whole.





peculiar to the machinery, apparatus or systems furnished and/or installed by the HVAC

Trade Contractor.



FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 6 June 19, 2020














A. The entire HVAC system in all and/or in part must conform to all pertinent laws,





C. Electrical work performed by the HVAC Trade Contractor must comply with the






1. Qualifications: The EIA is to be an independent company from the HVAC Trade

Contractor, registered with the State and a Master certified member of the

International Association of Electrical Inspectors.




levels.







HVAC Trade Contractor at no additional cost to the Project.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 7 June 19, 2020

1.9 TESTS







HVAC work prior to completing the required tests, the Prime Contractor is responsible for

any additional costs related to completing the required tests.







jurisdiction.




F. Prove conclusively, by testing, that HVAC systems operate properly, efficiently and



1.10 CLEANING



HVAC work.

2. Cleaning drippings created by the HVAC work, from finished work of other Trades.

3. Cleaning, polishing, waxing of HVAC work as required.


clean all HVAC equipment and material to the satisfaction of the Engineer.



Owner in all details of operation of the equipment installed under the HVAC Contract

Documents.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 8 June 19, 2020

B. Operate HVAC equipment for sufficient length of time to satisfy Engineer that

requirements of Contract Documents have been fulfilled.

C. Prepare digital recording of each Owner training session on USB thumb Drive.






Operating and Maintenance Instructions, submit three (3) copies of the final version of

the printed instructions to the Owner. Bind instructions in separate, hardback, 3-ring

loose leaf binders.




"Operating and Maintenance Instructions - HVAC".





Engineer.


H. Provide copies of the as-built drawings in the manuals. (As-built drawings to be submitted

for review prior to O&M Submission).



Review Sheet.


K. Provide complete copy of the final HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report.

(HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Report to be submitted for review prior to O&M

Submission).

L. Provide complete copy of the HVAC System Commissioning Report, if applicable.

M. Provide complete copy of the final Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) System

Commissioning Report, if applicable.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 9 June 19, 2020

N. All listed items are to be included in the O&M submission for the Engineer’s review.


1.13 GUARANTEE



letter written to the HVAC Trade Contractor.



repair or replace, at the HVAC Trade Contractor’s expense, any materials, equipment or

workmanship in which defects may develop and provide free service for all equipment


system by any of the Trade Contractors during construction does not constitute


guarantee period.




of the Owner.



for subject item.






not scale building openings, door widths and equipment or component sizes off the

drawings. Determine sizes from site measurements and equipment manufacturer.








B. Perform all necessary rigging required for completion of HVAC work.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 10 June 19, 2020











1.15 VISIT TO SITE



with the Owner.

















B. All RFI(s):

1. Must be submitted in written form to the party designated at the construction phase

kick-off meeting;

2. Must be consecutively numbered, dated, and logged as directed, during the kick-off

meeting;

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 11 June 19, 2020

3. Those which are follow-up RFI(s), must use the same RFI number, with a sequential

submission number;

4. Must list the RFI number of any reference RFI(s) used in the narrative;

5. Must present: background; related drawings; specification articles; room, space




6. Must be completed by the HVAC Trade Contractor’s Designated Project Foreman,

under the control and overview of the HVAC Trade Contractor’s Project Manager;

7. Must include HVAC Trade Contractor’s Project Foreman’s suggested resolution to

RFI;

8. Must evidence a high level of fluency with the Contract Documents, all job


the Mechanical/Electrical Specifications including: Section 230010; the sections of

Division 21; Division 22; Division 23; Division 26; Division 27; Division 28; and

special system and equipment divisions of the specification Divisions 02 thru 33

inclusive.

C. The HVAC Trade Contractor’s designated Project Manager must demonstrate familiarity

with and responsibility for all RFI(s) prepared by the Project Foreman and must




discernable from the Contract Documents and/or clearly the responsibility of the HVAC

Trade Contractor must be answered by the HVAC Trade Contractor’s Project Manager

and resolved between the Foreman and Project Manager prior to resorting to written

RFI(s). The work of the Project Manager must evidence: fluency with the methods and

means anticipated by the HVAC Trade Contractor during the bid phase to plan and

complete the work; fluency with the Contract Documents, and all administrative issues

related thereto.












commercial CAD drafting service if HVAC Trade Contractor does not have CAD

capabilities in-house. As an option, if requested by the HVAC Trade Contractor, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the Division 23 Contract Drawings may

be provided by the Engineer at a cost of $55.00, billable to the requesting Contractor. In

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 12 June 19, 2020


conditions:

1. Ductwork mains and branches, gas and oil fired equipment vents, boiler breeching,

size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of dampers and other

control devices; filters, boxes and terminal units requiring periodic maintenance or

repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and

numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance

located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, and the like). Valve

location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Indicate actual inverts and

horizontal locations of underground piping, and the like.



Owner. Include code and equipment service clearances.


equipment and materials installed.

B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer registered in the state in

which the project is located, as specified in Division 01, to record the locations and

invert elevations of the underground HVAC work.








intended.









A. Generally, no actions can be taken by the HVAC Trade Contractor that will interrupt any

of the existing building services for these buildings or any other building until previously

arranged and scheduled with the Engineer and Owner.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 13 June 19, 2020

B. Should any service be interrupted by the HVAC Trade Contractor, immediately provide

all labor, including overtime if necessary, and all material and equipment necessary for

restoration of such service, at no additional cost to the Project.


A. For the purposes of this specification section, “Building Service Utilities” include, but are

not limited to:








6. Medical gas systems, complete;









specifications as:






by this project;






Services. Refer to the “Scope and Objectives of the HVAC Work,” of this Section for a






to “General Requirements HVAC,” Article “Scope and Objectives of the HVAC Work.”

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 14 June 19, 2020



















1. Pipe, ductwork and conduit penetrations through above grade floor slabs and

through “fire and/or smoke”-rated partitions and fire walls.














A. The HVAC Trade Contractor must initiate preparation of coordination drawings, control


Construction Trade Contractor and all other building trades, as applicable, relative to the

100% final submission of the coordination drawings. Prepare coordination drawings in

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 15 June 19, 2020

accordance with Division 01, to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements,

components, and systems of equipment and materials in relationship with other systems,

installations, and building components. Use proposed equipment submittals, which

include certified dimensions, service clearances, etc., to prepare the coordination

drawings. If equipment is submitted for review after completion of the coordination

drawings and rejected during the submittal review process, because the equipment fails

to meet the project specifications, the HVAC Trade Contractor is responsible to revise the

coordination drawings and layout the work using equipment which meets the project

specifications. Designate all specified return air plenums, locations where space is

limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations

are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited

to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, and materials.

Include the following:

a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal,

filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic

maintenance.



e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.


g. Valve stem movement.

h. Service clearance for equipment behind access doors.

i. Location of structural columns, beams and supports.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment

into the building during construction.

3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls

and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets

and inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other









drawings.

1.24 BREECHING, VENT, NATURAL GAS AND EXHAUST PIPING SUBMITTALS

A. Sizes specified for materials such as gas vents, natural gas piping, breeching, and

emergency generator exhaust piping are included in the Contract Documents and

intended for bidding purposes as applicable to each Trade Contractor. Actual sizes

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 16 June 19, 2020

required for approved system performance depend on the actual length of runs, routing,

bends, offsets, fittings and elbows, planned by the HVAC Trade Contractor during the

layout of the HVAC work and must account for existing/new field conditions.

B. Submit product data and shop drawings, as applicable to each Trade Contractor, for the

following; vent piping, gas piping, breeching, emergency generator coolant piping, and

exhaust piping. Submittals shall indicate all aspects of the work layout including:

materials; length; routing; bends; offsets; fittings; mufflers; elbows; and compliance with

equipment manufacturer’s directions (specifications, limitations, sizing tables, etc.

required to meet such specifications). Attach copies of manufacturer’s specifications and

performance tables to required equipment submittals.

C. Processing of vent, gas, breeching and emergency generator piping submittals and piping

layout shop drawings will be handled in a manner identical to sheet metal shop drawings

(conformance to SMACNA recommendations for example) which requires the HVAC

Trade Contractor to conform to accepted standards relative to sizing, pressure drop limits,

manufacturer’s recommendations, NFPA, and Fuel Gas Code.

D. Submit Manufacturer’s or Trade Contractor’s confirming calculations of pressure drops,

and/or sizing resulting from all of the variables controlled by the HVAC Trade Contractor

during layout of the HVAC work for review by the Engineer as part of the submittal

review process.








FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 17 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS







review.


labor force required of the HVAC Trade Contractor. As part of the mobilization phase of

the work, submit resumes for each Keyman including the Project Manager, Project

Foreman and Sheet Metal Sketcher. The Sheet Metal Sketcher’s resume must be

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 18 June 19, 2020

submitted and approved by the engineer prior to the preparation of sheet metal shop

drawings.






completed.

2.2 SUBMITTALS



herein.




professional, the HVAC Trade Contractor shall submit all submittals which require

electrical power to the Project Electrical Trade Contractor for the HVAC Trade

Contractor’s and the Electrical Trade Contractor’s coordination and review.

Electrical Trade Contractor shall provide approval of electrical power requirements

for the HVAC Trade Contractor’s proposed equipment.


“HVAC AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS’ COORDINATION OF HVAC

EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TRANSMITTAL COVER SHEET”

located at the end of this section. Submittals without this Cover Sheet or an

incomplete Cover Sheet will be rejected without review.

4. All submittals must be accompanied by the “HVAC CONTRACTOR’S



review.

5. All submittals must be accompanied by the “HVAC SUBMITTAL LOG”, located at

the end of this section. Submit log after final acceptance of the proposed



without review.









FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 19 June 19, 2020








number.






Trade Contractor, where applicable, for use in setting steel, supports, and

attachments.


connections. Data and diagrams shall be given to the Electrical Trade Contractor

and Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Trade Sub-Contractor for their use and

inclusion into their submittals.

5. Listing of specific HVAC performance, calculations and data.






submission.


(EF-1, AHU-2, etc.).



E. Review Time:








3. Voltage.

4. Phase.




FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 20 June 19, 2020




G. Submittals for automatic temperature controls must be coordinated with: 1) all HVAC

equipment manufacturers’ and vendors’ submittals including review of HVAC submittals

by ATC Sub-Contractor for conformance with sequences of operation for each piece of

equipment; 2) all electrical requirements of ATC System with Electrical Trade Contractor;

and 3) all fire and safety requirements of the Fire Alarm System. ATC submittals shall

include copies of all wiring diagrams for all HVAC equipment with points of connections

clearly identified. ATC submittals shall not be developed and submitted until HVAC

Trade Contractor provides all equipment submittals for review.

H. The Engineer’s recommendation of acceptance of the equipment proposed by the HVAC

Trade Contractor is conditional upon the HVAC Trade Contractor fulfilling all obligations

of the Contract Documents. By furnishing the proposed equipment, the HVAC Trade

Contractor acknowledges compliance with all of the following:



2. The HVAC Trade Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittals prior to






3) all items are approved by the HVAC Trade Contractor, and have been






3. Any and all exceptions requested by the HVAC Trade Contractor are provided in

writing with the submittals. All exceptions, deletions and additions that vary from

the Contract Documents have been specifically annotated and initialed. Failing to

provide initialed annotations for all deletions and additions, the HVAC Trade

Contractor accepts the condition that the Contract Documents will govern, and will

be used to resolve disputes.

4. Submittals without the HVAC Trade Contractor's signed stamp of approval will be

returned without review. Initialed approval stamps are not acceptable.




designed performance requirements. By entering into these Contracts, the Trade

Contractors agree that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer

that the Trade Contractors understand the design concept and that they

demonstrate their understanding by indicating which materials and equipment they

intend to furnish, install and use.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 21 June 19, 2020




K. Prepare 1/4" minimum scale sheet metal shop drawings at the earliest practicable time

and coordinate these drawings with the other Trade Contractors prior to erection or

fabrication of the sheet metal work in order to effect timely resolution of all conflicts with

the work of other Trade Contractors. Do not initiate sheet metal shop drawing

preparation until the resume for the Sheet Metal Sketcher has been reviewed and

approved by the Engineer. See Article “Initial Application for Payment” in this section.

Sheet metal shop drawings shall cover all metal work on the project, including but not

limited to environmental air, exhaust air, make-up air, and products of combustion

venting systems. Designate on sheet metal shop drawings all specified return air

plenums, fire dampers, and smoke dampers. Designate all transfer air openings specified

under General Construction, by reference to general construction drawings detailing fire

rated assemblies, and smoke dampers. Refer to Article “Coordination Drawings,” in Part

1 of this section.

L. Corrections or comments made on submittals during review by the Engineer do not

relieve the HVAC Trade Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the





construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the HVAC



deviations from the Contract Documents that are not clearly noted by the HVAC Trade


submissions for correlated items have not been received. The HVAC Trade Contractor is

responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities, clearance, and dimensions;



M. All submittals must be able to be reproduced. The HVAC Trade Contractor is responsible

for all reproduction and distribution to the General Construction Trade Contractor and all

other Trade Contractors as applicable.

N. If requested for the HVAC Trade Contractor’s use in the preparation of submittals, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the HVAC Contract Drawings may be


$55.00, billable to the HVAC Trade Contractor.

O. For additional requirements regarding submittals, refer to Article “Additional Trade


FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 22 June 19, 2020








all equipment.



manufacturer.




must be suitable and operate satisfactorily for the purpose intended in the HVAC systems.







only when, through no fault of the HVAC Trade Contractor, none of the specified

products are available.















FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 23 June 19, 2020



F. Where Alternative Manufacturer Sources are listed for an item:







G. Each Trade Contractor is responsible to contact each proposed equipment manufacturer’s





final.











I. Specific products specified without use of the term: equal; equivalent; comparable

product; substitution; or similar term; constitute a proprietary specification, and must be

provided as specified, unless a written request is submitted to the Engineer for approval

up to ten (10) days after the date of project award. Such requests must include a

complete description of the proposed product, along with sufficient documentation and

other information necessary for a complete evaluation of the proposed product. Such

Trade Contractor Requests shall include a letter, on the product manufacturer’s

letterhead, certifying that the proposed product is a Comparable Product and conforms to

all the salient characteristics, including: material of manufacture; independent testing

agency certifications; quality; function, design; and performance of the specified product.

If approved, the proposed product will be listed in an addendum to notify all bidders that

such acceptance has been granted by the Engineer. If not approved, provide the

specified product.


in which the work is taking place, engaged by the HVAC Trade Contractor, confirming





FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 24 June 19, 2020

Basis of Design. Provide such calculations for major pieces of equipment (boilers, air

handling units, chillers, etc.). The Engineer, whose decision will be final, will determine

which products will require calculations during the submittal review process.




























mounted by the equipment manufacturers. Basis of Design is Amber/Booth Company.

Comparable product by Korfund Company, Inc. or Mason Industries may be submitted

for review. Install in accordance with vibration isolation manufacturer's

recommendations unless specified otherwise herein.





FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 25 June 19, 2020


equipment, such as motors, pumps, fans and the like.

E. Rigid pipes, ducts, conduit or other extended machine assemblies connected to vibration






2.6 NOISE CONTROL

A. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and duct systems shall not exceed

NC 35 within the occupied room, except as follows:




Corridors 40


Kitchens, Locker Rooms, Warehouses, Shop, Laundries


General Work Rooms 40





CONTROL.










to: sound attenuators; acoustic enclosures; duct lining; additional equipment insulation

or vibration isolators to conform to these specifications. Provide required material and

labor at no additional cost to the project.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 26 June 19, 2020








necessary for support of the HVAC work. Select the types of all inserts, hanger supports,

fastenings, clamps and attachments to suit both new and existing building construction

conditions specifically for the purposes intended.





by the Structural Engineer.










place concrete as directed by the Structural Engineer. Anchor Basis of Design: Dynabolt,

Ram-In and/or Tru-Bolt masonry anchors as manufactured by Ramset. Select and install

as recommended by the anchor manufacturer for the various applications, stresses and




bolts.



the size used.




FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 27 June 19, 2020




concealed portions of HVAC work requiring accessibility for operation and maintenance.

If project does not include a General Construction Trade Contractor, provide access

doors as required.

B. Access doors and panels may not be installed without specific approval of the

Architect/Engineer as to location. The proposed location of access doors and panels must

be reviewed with the Architect/Engineer and the General Construction Trade Foreman,

where applicable, and the locations indicated on the coordination drawings prior to

installation of equipment, access doors or panels. Controversies must be resolved at no

cost to the Project.

C. Minimum size of 24" x 18" unless shown, specified or approved otherwise.

D. Sixteen (16) gauge minimum construction with concealed spring hinges, screw fasteners

and painted finish. Color by Architect.

E. Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Milcor.

2. Karp.

3. Mifab.

F. For access doors in drywall, provide drywall bead flange.

G. For access doors in hard plaster or ceramic tile, provide expanded metal casing bead.

H. For access doors in unplastered masonry and concrete, provide one piece frame for flush

mounting.

I. For access doors in acoustic tile ceilings, provide recessed door panel with room to

receive acoustic tile.

J. Underwriters "B" label access doors where required for access to shafts, corridors, and









FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 28 June 19, 2020



filled with non-shrink cementitious grout. Grout Basis of Design: Crystex as

manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Comparable product by Master

Builders or BASF may be submitted for review.


curbs, the HVAC Trade Contractor is responsible for all anchor bolts required by the



For projects wherein there is no General Construction Trade Contractor, the HVAC Trade

Contractor is responsible for pouring, locating, and setting equipment foundations, bases

and curbs and the location of anchor bolts for the equipment provided or installed by

him on this Project.




A. Provide all sleeves required for HVAC work and be fully responsible for the final and




masonry walls.


















FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 29 June 19, 2020







fault, at no additional cost to the project, must engage the trade which originally installed

the work, to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

I. Provide mechanical seals and insert into voids between piping and conduits that pass










84.



conditions.


5. Fire Resistance:








B. Basis of Design for smoke and firestopping materials is Rectorshield, Inc. Comparable

product by Hilti, or 3M may be submitted for review. Refer to Division 07 of these

specifications.


FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 30 June 19, 2020

2.12 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, SMOKE DETECTORS/SMOKE DETECTOR CONTROL

A. All fire/smoke dampers for the project must be provided by the HVAC Trade Contractor.

B. Provide dynamic fire dampers or static fire dampers in all penetrations, transfer ducts and

openings, existing or new, in fire rated walls and where required by system operations or

applicable codes.

C. Refer to the Architectural Drawings, where applicable, for locations and classification

ratings for all smoke and fire rated walls, floors and assemblies, new and existing and

incorporate new dampers accordingly.

D. Duct mounted smoke detectors will be used to activate smoke dampers unless area

detectors are used to activate smoke damper. Tie detectors into the Building Automation

System (BAS) where applicable.

E. All new duct mounted smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Electrical Trade

Contractor and installed by the HVAC Trade Contractor, and shall be installed generally

as located on the HVAC drawings.

F. Wiring and connections for automatic shutdown of all air handling equipment shall be

provided by the HVAC Trade Contractor, and shall be in compliance with the ATC

Section of these specifications. Wiring and connections for fire alarm system shall be

provided by the Electrical Trade Contractor.

G. HVAC Trade Contractor shall clearly indicate location of all new smoke detectors

required in ductwork on sheet metal shop drawing submissions.

H. Area actuation signals and connections for smoke dampers shall be provided by the

Electrical Trade Contractor. Locate signal where visible to Building Personnel.

2.13 COMPRESSORS

A. For all equipment equipped with refrigerant compressors, provide equipment, options,

and accessories (cylinder unloaders, multiple compressors, etc.) to achieve the maximum

number of cooling steps available for the particular piece of equipment.

B. Include the required equipment, options, and accessories in the bid proposal. Extras for

these items after the submission of bids will not be considered.

2.14 REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Refrigerant piping indicated on the drawings is diagrammatic. Based on the equipment

manufacturer’s performance requirements and recommendations, additional equipment,

accessories, options or components (piping, insulation, hot gas bypass, multiple sets of

refrigerant lines, sight glasses, solenoid valves, filter/driers, traps, etc.) may be required to

obtain a complete, fully operational system. Include the cost (labor and materials) to

provide these items in the bid proposal.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 31 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION






practices.




of dirt.


sizing, measurements, including lines, grades, pipes, conduit and ductwork elevations at

the building, as applicable, and be responsible for the correctness thereof. No extra







fixtures, conduit, ductwork, and the like, included in Contract Documents, in strict

accordance with the intent expressed thereby; and all the physical conditions to be met

at the building and finished grade, and be responsible for accuracy thereof. The

establishment of the location of all work must be performed in consideration of the

finished work. In case of conflict, equipment and/or materials must be relocated without

cost to the Project, as directed by the Engineer, regardless of which equipment was

installed first. Refer to Article, “Coordination Drawings”, in Part 1 of this section.





such injury caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of the

Trade Contractor’s work force.





I. All piping, ductwork, conduit and other materials and equipment shown to be mounted

below ceilings are to be kept as close to ceiling areas as possible unless otherwise noted.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 32 June 19, 2020

J. Install and arrange all equipment, such as valves, air vents, dampers, cleanouts, traps,

junction boxes, and the like, which will be concealed in construction, to be fully

accessible for adjustment, service and maintenance. Furnish access doors where

required for installation under the General Construction Contract, where applicable.

Otherwise, furnish and install all required access doors.


A. Provide all piping, equipment, materials and accessories having polished or plated

surfaces, machined finishes or unpainted surfaces with a thick coat of a neutral protection

grease and carefully cover with thick cloth or heavy building paper held securely in place

to protect the finish against damage during the entire period of construction. Protect

equipment by the use of canvas tarps, vinyl sheeting or similar materials held securely in

place.

B. Seal all openings in pipes, fittings, ductwork, conduit and all other materials to exclude

dirt, sand, and other foreign materials.



construction. Rooms and equipment contained therein must be swept and vacuum

cleaned at regular intervals. All relays, meters and HVAC equipment containing electrical

components must be protected with heavy paper held in place with approved mastic tape

to exclude fine dust and particles. Install and maintain sufficient electric heaters in

equipment rooms and transformer compartments to keep equipment dry during

construction.





the HVAC work, and take responsibility for their final and permanent locations.




openings as required for the HVAC work.


particular Trade Contractor must, at no additional cost to the project, engage the

trade which originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the

Engineer.



required for completion of the HVAC work, including interior and exterior concrete slabs.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 33 June 19, 2020




floor.





3.5 SUPPORTS




and materials installed under/or affected by the HVAC work.






3.6 LINTELS

A. Lintel work to be performed in strict accordance with Division 01, and Architectural and

Structural drawings. Refer to Architectural and Structural Contract Documents for lintel

schedules and details.

B. Where lintels are not indicated as being provided by General Construction or Structural

Trade Contractors, the HVAC Trade Contractor must provide lintels required for the

installation and completion of HVAC work.

3.7 ESCUTCHEONS


escutcheons with set screws and prime coat of paint on all uninsulated piping and

conduit exposed to view within structure where passing through floors, partitions, walls

or ceilings. Escutcheons are not required in equipment rooms, boiler rooms or other

unfinished areas.

B. For piping with sleeves extending above floor, provide escutcheons with deep recesses.

C. Provide solid pattern, smooth chrome plated cast brass escutcheons for all chrome plated

pipe fixture connections.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 34 June 19, 2020

D. Provide nickel plated cast iron escutcheons where pipes pass through toilet rooms, walls

or ceilings.

E. Provide collars of angle fabrication for duct passing through floors, walls and ceilings in

finished areas.









3.9 ROOFING WORK


Warranties. HVAC Trade Contractor shall have all roofing and flashing work performed

by warranted roofing installer. Contact Owner or original installer for further






where applicable, except where specifically noted otherwise in the HVAC Specifications.

Otherwise, all Trade Contractors are responsible for their own painting and finishing.




3.11 LUBRICATION


equipment which is furnished, installed or which must operate as part of the HVAC

system.


will be that Trade Contractor’s responsibility to accomplish the lubrication.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 35 June 19, 2020






lubricants prior to initial start-up and the equipment is damaged as a result of that Trade

Contractor’s negligence, that Trade Contractor is required to provide all corrective action

necessary including replacement, if required, for the proper operation of equipment.



lubrication will apply individually to the driver and the driven component.















3.12 HVAC TRADE - ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION

A. Furnish equipment with electrical current characteristics as shown on electrical drawings

and specifications.




C. HVAC Trade Contractor must furnish all motors, motor starters, specialty motor



installed under the HVAC contract except where noted otherwise.

D. All electrical equipment furnished by the HVAC Trade Contractor must be as

recommended by the equipment manufacturers, in accordance with the Electrical

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 36 June 19, 2020

Specifications for similar items, and of such type as to work properly with automatic

temperature control sequences where required.

E. The Electrical Trade Contractor will provide all push-buttons, safety switches for motors,

and wiring from starters to motors and install all starters furnished to him by the HVAC

Trade Contractor unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.







H. HVAC Trade Contractor must set all motors and furnish, set and pipe as necessary, float

switches, temperature control and other special automatic temperature controls.

I. HVAC Trade Contractor must provide all power and control wiring required by the

respective sections of the specifications. The Electrical Trade Contractor will provide all

other wiring required for the completion of the work of the HVAC Trade Contractor.

J. HVAC Trade Contractor must furnish the Electrical Trade Contractor with complete


K. Any electrical work performed by the HVAC Trade Contractor must be performed in








IEEE or NEMA.












FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 37 June 19, 2020
















2. All 3-phase starters remotely controlled must have 120 volt coils and control















switch.







3.14 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED HVAC EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted in HVAC Specifications, all packaged equipment furnished by

HVAC Trade Contractor must be complete with the following electrical provisions:

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 38 June 19, 2020









3.15 PIPING, DUCTS AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOORS

A. Wherever piping, conduit, ducts or piping enclosures are run under a floor slab on grade,

the work is to be installed after the General Construction Trade Contractor, where

applicable, has brought the sub-grade to the proper level.

B. Excavate and backfill as required for the installation of HVAC work. The excavation of

the sub-grade where required for the installation of the work must be performed,

including that for piping, conduit, ducts and piping enclosures, by the HVAC Trade

Contractor. When the installation is completed and satisfactorily tested, the remaining

space shall be filled with crushed stone or other material similar to that to be used by the

General Construction Trade Contractor, where applicable, for the sub-base. The backfill

must be stabilized by hand or pneumatic tamping as directed by the Engineer and must

be returned to the original sub-grade level.

C. No piping, conduit, ducts or piping enclosures is to be installed in the stone sub-base

which is part of the General Construction Trade Contractor's work, where applicable,

unless specific permission is granted by the Engineer.

D. Where piping is noted to be installed in enclosures, such as split terra cotta pipe,

necessary protection of the insulation, arrangement and installation will be as hereinafter

described in the detailed technical specifications.

E. Where required by drawing notes, specifications, or applicable electrical codes, conduits

installed under floors must be encased in concrete, conforming to the Division 03

specifications.

3.16 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Basis of Design for pipe markers is Setmark snap on type SNA by Seton Nameplate

Corporation. Comparable products by Marking Services, Inc. or Brady Worldwide may

be submitted for review. Pipe markers must comply with OSHA Standards. Wording and

color coding must conform to the current edition of ANSI/ASME A13.1.

B. Mark all systems of piping with markers 12 foot maximum centers.

C. Markers must indicate the following:

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 39 June 19, 2020

1. Pipe contents in legend form.

2. Size of piping.

3. Direction of flow in piping.

D. Identify all valves, controls, dampers and other parts of HVAC systems by means of 2"

round brass, aluminum or plastic tags. Tags must have engraved or stamped letters or

numbers ½" high. Fasten tags securely with brass "S" hooks or chains. Basis of Design

for tags is Seton Corporation. Comparable products by Marking Services, Inc. or Brady

Worldwide may be submitted for review.

E. Provide ½" scale diagrams showing location, number and service or function of each

tagged item. Frame diagrams in approved frame with clear Lucite front, secured to walls

in location as directed by Owner. Provide two (2) separate copies of each diagram,

permanently framed and covered as two (2) separate items.

F. Identify all equipment as to nature, service and purpose by means of permanently




Inc. or Brady Worldwide may be submitted for review. Nameplates shall indicate

equipment identification names and numbers as approved by the Owner.


A. Perform all abandonment, removal and relocation work required for completion of

HVAC systems.

B. Removals shown on drawings are a general indication only, and may not necessarily


C. Where existing partitions, walls, ceilings and floors are to be removed, all ducts, piping,

conduits, materials and equipment attached or fastened thereto or within, as applicable,

must be carefully removed.

D. Where work under this contract interferes with the existing construction, ductwork,


obstruction. Provide additional piping, conduits, ducts, and material of the same design

and quality if the piping and/or conduit is to be continued in use.

E. Disconnect and remove all accessible piping, conduit, ductwork, materials, fixtures and


connection.

F. Removed materials not desired by the Owner and not to be reset and not specified nor

indicated to be reused, become the property of the HVAC Trade Contractor and must be

promptly removed from site.

G. All demolition work is subject to the direction and approval of the Engineer and must be


FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 40 June 19, 2020

H. Relocate existing utilities and/or equipment that must remain to maintain operation of


I. Equipment Pad Removal:


HVAC trade, not indicated or specified for reuse. Remove concrete pads to one (1)

inch below adjacent concrete floor surface. Exterior slabs shall be broken and






follows:


3/8" 100% 1/2" 100%

No. 4 95-100% 3/8" 30-50%

No. 8 65-80% No. 4 0-15%

No. 16 45-65% No. 8 0-5%

No. 30 25-45% No. 100 0-5%




topping.



Slump 8" maximum





ASTM E 814.

B. Install smoke and firestopping at locations required, shown, or specified in accordance








FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 41 June 19, 2020



2. Insulated Ductwork and Pipes: Insulated equipment penetrating rated floors and

walls must be insulated with materials which provide the same performance as the

smoke and firestopping material. This material must extend a minimum of 6 in. on

each side of the opening. Vapor barrier of such insulation must have a perm rating

of 0.03 maximum.


cables or conduits must comply with the requirements of NFPA 70.




other trim.




C. All areas of smoke and firestopping installation must be accessible until inspection by the




from those indicated in the Project Contract Documents; (2) affect HVAC work; (3) do not

differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist, and which are generally recognized

as inherent in HVAC construction activities of the character provided for in the Project

Contract Documents, are to be anticipated by the HVAC Trade Contractor, and included

in the basic HVAC work.


different in subsurface (otherwise concealed) physical conditions; which affect the HVAC

work; which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally

recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character found in the Project

Contract Documents, are the basis for, and require notice by, the applicable Trade

Contractor, promptly, before such conditions are disturbed. Such conditions may

become the basis for a legitimate claim under “Changed Conditions,” affecting the cost,

and/or schedule of the work. During the work, the HVAC Trade Contractor shall provide

reasonable, incidental on-site review, survey and measurements to assist in quantification

of such conditions.







FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 42 June 19, 2020







specifications.








A. Provide the following prior to submitting the initial application for payment:

1. Copy of the HVAC Trade Contractor’s and Sub-Contractors’ licenses for the state in

which the work is being performed.


3. Resume for the Sheet Metal Sketcher. This resume must be provided in advance of

the initiation of preparation of sheet metal shop drawings.

4. List of independent agencies who will be engaged by the HVAC Trade Contractor

to perform tests, provide certifications, conduct inspections, etc. as required by

Contract Documents.


submitted.

C. Provide line items for:


2. HVAC TAB Report.

3. ATC Commissioning Report.


A. Provide the following prior to submitting the final application for payment:


2. Duct Leakage Test Report.

3. Pipe Pressure Test Reports.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 43 June 19, 2020

4. Equipment Start-Up Reports for each piece of HVAC equipment.

5. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data.

6. Automatic Temperature Control System Commissioning Report.

7. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Report for HVAC systems.

8. HVAC system and equipment warranties.

9. HVAC Contractor Closeout Checklist indicating dates of submitted requirements.

10. HVAC Contractor’s Punch List of incomplete work items with reason why each

work item is not complete and anticipated schedule for completion. Submit at

least one week prior to Engineer’s final Construction Observation Report site visit.

11. HVAC Trade Contractor’s notarized certification letter.




A. The drawings and specifications covering the work of Divisions 23 and 26 as applicable,

shall not be interpreted by the HVAC Trade Contractor as quantification, and/or

classification of the construction methods, and/or construction means required to carry

out the required construction. There is no explicit or implicit representation that any

portion of this work can be installed and/or constructed through any particular normal,

reasonable, abnormal, or unusual means and methods. By submission of a pricing bid

for this work, the HVAC Trade Contractor shall accept sole and individual responsibility

for the determination and execution of the methods and means selected to complete this

work.

B. The HVAC Trade Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, agrees to indemnify,

hold harmless, and defend Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the employees

and agents of any of them from and against any and all claims, suits, demands, liabilities,

losses, damages, and costs (“Losses”), including but not limited to costs of reasonable

defense, arising in whole or in part out of the negligence of the HVAC Trade Contractor,

its Sub-Contractors, the officers, employees, agents, and Sub-Contractors of any of them,

or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not such

Losses are caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Specifically excluded from

the foregoing are Losses arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings,

opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications, and (2) the giving of

or failure to give directions by Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the agents

and employees of any of them, provided such giving or failure to give is the primary

cause of Loss.

C. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall name Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its agents and

consultants on the HVAC Trade Contractor’s policy or policies of comprehensive or






FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 44 June 19, 2020

3.25 ADDITIONAL HVAC TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES

A. As a material part of the HVAC Trade Contractor’s Agreement to complete the work of

this Contract, the HVAC Trade Contractor agrees to reimburse Gillan & Hartmann, Inc.




2. HVAC Trade Contractor’s request(s) for substitution;





and;

c. The HVAC Trade Contractor’s request(s) for substitution must be submitted in

writing, and;

d. The Engineer will provide the HVAC Trade Contractor with a written budget,

not to exceed quotation for the Engineer’s billing, and;

e. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the


f. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to 80%

of the established budget for the Engineer’s extra work.




the HVAC Trade Contractor’s substitution request(s), and;



i. The HVAC Trade Contractor’s balance due for his/her beneficial contracted

work, unpaid beyond 60 days of due date, will be deducted from progress

payments due the HVAC Trade Contractor, and will include all additional

administrative costs incurred by the Owner, in affecting such deductions.

3. Extra Engineering work created by the HVAC Trade Contractor’s failure to resolve

the Engineer’s Items listed in the Construction Observation Report(s);



Report) requiring the HVAC Trade Contractor’s attention, reporting and

resolution;

b. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall provide written feedback and prompt


the HVAC Trade Contractor’s completion of these Items followed by a


c. Should the HVAC Trade Contractor fail to perform as described above, and

should such failure require, in the opinion of the Owner and the Engineer,

that the Engineer must expend extra work in bringing closure and resolving

the HVAC Trade Contractor’s open Items, the HVAC Trade Contractor agrees

pay the Engineer for all extra work required. The Engineer will provide a

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 45 June 19, 2020

written notice of the not to exceed budget for the Engineer’s extra work in

advance as a prudent notification that the extra work will be initiated.

Subsequent failure of the HVAC Trade Contractor to resolve these

outstanding issues will result in the Engineer’s completion of the extra work,

and billing the HVAC Trade Contractor accordingly. The Engineer’s payment

for this additional work shall be deducted from the HVAC Trade Contractor’s

final payment for the work under this Contract. Deductions from the Final

Payment will be made to cover all the Owner’s additional costs in affecting

such deductions.

4. The HVAC Trade Contractor’s request for substitution of specified equipment when

such specifications list a basis of design and at least one comparable product such

requests will be rejected.

5. Extra Engineering work created by the HVAC Trade Contractor’s multiple




the initial HVAC Trade Contractor’s submission of that submittal. The




due to the HVAC Trade Contractor, the Engineer will provide the HVAC

Trade Contractor with a written budget, not to exceed quotation for the

Engineer’s extra work in reviewing the submittal.

c. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the


d. The HVAC Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to 80%

of the established budget for the Engineer’s extra work.





g. The HVAC Trade Contractor’s balance, unpaid beyond 60 days of due date,

will be deducted from progress payments due the HVAC Trade Contractor for

work under this Contract and will include additional administrative costs

incurred by the Owner in affecting all such deductions.

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 46 June 19, 2020

3.26 FORMS

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 47 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 48 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 5:230010 - 49 June 19, 2020


FVHD 5195 5:230513 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on alternating-

current power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or

shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible

with the following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet

above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate

connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with

indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering

service factor.

FVHD 5195 5:230513 - 2 June 19, 2020

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller Than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring

connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in

motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed

and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses

produced by pulse-width-modulated inverters.

2. Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally

protected motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

FVHD 5195 5:230513 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial

and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of

motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor

temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Filled-system thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Duct-thermometer mounting brackets.

4. Thermowells.

5. Dial-type pressure gages.

6. Gage attachments.

7. Test plugs.

8. Test-plug kits.



1. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves for each meter,

gage, fitting, specialty, and accessory specified.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and


FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 2 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Weiss

Instruments, Inc; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Marsh Bellofram.



3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and

connection to pointer.


in deg F.


8. Window: Glass.

9. Ring: Metal.

10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360

degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem

and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:



a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

b. Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.


3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale

markings graduated in deg F.











FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 3 June 19, 2020

7. Window: Glass.

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a

maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to

hold thermometer stem.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee

fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.5 DIAL-TYPE PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:



a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

b. WATTS.


3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal

diameter.






FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 4 June 19, 2020

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads

and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.



in psi.


9. Window: Glass.

10. Ring: Metal.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads

and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated

piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.7 TEST PLUGS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Weiss


1. Flow Design, Inc.


3. WATTS.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include

extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: EPDM self-sealing rubber.

2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Weiss


1. Flow Design, Inc.


3. WATTS.













FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 5 June 19, 2020

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing two thermometer(s), one pressure gage and

adapter, and carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter

probes shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial


D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch-diameter dial


E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch-diameter dial and

probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig.

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings

if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted

positions.

F. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at

the most readable position.

H. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

I. Install test plugs in piping tees.

J. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring

elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

K. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.

3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 6 June 19, 2020

4. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.

5. Where indicated on the Drawings and other Division 23 Sections.

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3. Where indicated on the Drawings and other Division 23 Sections.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service

and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be the following:


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up

central systems shall be the following:

1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type (units with flow rates greater than or equal to 10

GPM).

2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts (for units with a flow rate less than

10 GPM).

D. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be one of the

following:

1. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type.


E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

FVHD 5195 5:230519 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 110 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:


B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:


C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each hydronic coil in air-handling units (units

with flow rates greater than or equal to 10 GPM) and built-up central systems shall

be one of the following:


D. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each small HVAC equipment (units with flow

rates less than 10 GPM) shall be the following:

1. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.


FVHD 5195 5:230523.12 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Press-end connection: Valves suitable for connection to a pressure-sealed system.






2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.






operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

FVHD 5195 5:230523.12 - 2 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.


3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.

4. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made


D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.




G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.

2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.

2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective

sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or

disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded Ends:



a. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.







FVHD 5195 5:230523.12 - 3 June 19, 2020

c. Red-White Valve Corp.

d. Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.

e. WATTS.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.




e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Brass.


i. Port: Full.

B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Press Ends:






2. Description:





e. Ends: Press.

f. Seats: PTFE or RPTFE.

g. Stem: Brass.


i. Port: Full.

j. O-Ring Seal: Buna-N or EPDM.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded Ends:




b. Hammond Valve.


d. Red-White Valve Corp.

















FVHD 5195 5:230523.12 - 4 June 19, 2020

2. Description:





e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Bronze.


i. Port: Full.

B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends:




b. Hammond Valve.

c. Red White Valve Corp.

d. WATTS.

2. Description:





e. Ends: Press.

f. Seats: PTFE.

g. Stem: Bronze.


i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION














FVHD 5195 5:230523.12 - 5 June 19, 2020











E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections for valve

tags and schedules.




B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint

valve-end option or press-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Brass or bronze ball valves, two piece with brass or bronze

trim, full port, and threaded, solder, or press connection-joint ends.


FVHD 5195 5:230523.14 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze swing check valves.

2. Iron swing check valves.

3. Iron, grooved-end swing check valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. Press-end connection: Valves suitable for a pressure-sealed system.







3. Block check valves in either closed or open position.



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If


FVHD 5195 5:230523.14 - 2 June 19, 2020



PART 2 - PRODUCTS



manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.




5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.


C. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.






G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125:






2. Description:











FVHD 5195 5:230523.14 - 3 June 19, 2020

e. Ends: Threaded.

f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends:




b. Elkhart Products Corporation.


2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139.




e. Ends: Press.

f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig

g. Disc: Brass or bronze.

2.3 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125:






2. Description:


b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway.

e. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

f. Ends: Flanged.

g. Trim: Bronze.

h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.4 IRON, GROOVED-END SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Iron, Grooved-End Swing Check Valves, 300 CWP:













FVHD 5195 5:230523.14 - 4 June 19, 2020



a. Grinnell G-Fire by Johnson Controls Company.

b. Shurjoint-Apollo Piping Products USA Inc.

2. Description:

a. CWP Rating: 300 psig.

b. Body Material: ASTM A536, ductile iron.

c. Seal: EPDM.

d. Disc: Spring operated, ductile iron or stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

















E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.





FVHD 5195 5:230523.14 - 5 June 19, 2020

F. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements for valve tags and schedules in applicable


3.3 ADJUSTING




A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher


C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends or pressure sealed ends, or

solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint or pressure sealed ends instead

of threaded ends.

2. Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc, Class 125.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Iron valves may be provided with threaded ends instead of

flanged ends.

2. NPS 3 to NPS 12: Iron, grooved-end check valves, 300 CWP.

3. Iron swing check valves with metal seats, Class 125.


FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers

and Supports.”


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in applicable

Division 01 Sections to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions

indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 2 June 19, 2020


2. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following; maximum weights supported, maximum pipe dimensions supported, support

intervals, etc. Include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.


b. Refer to the applicable Delegated-Design requirements in this Section.

2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Field fabricated pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.



4. Equipment supports. Include Product Data for components.



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers.




A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to


B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 3 June 19, 2020


2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro-

galvanized.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated, or epoxy powder-coated.




B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:




3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

C. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-plated steel, factory-

fabricated components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-plated

steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made

from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts,

saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


of the following:

a. B-line, an Eaton business.

b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.

c. MIRO Industries.

d. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel

channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria.

6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into

channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.





FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 4 June 19, 2020


8. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

9. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


following:

1. ERICO International Corporation.

2. PHS Industries, Inc.

3. Pipe Shields Inc.

4. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi

minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psi

minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of

pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS


following:

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

3. MKT Fastening, LLC.

4. Powers Fasteners.

B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and

building materials where used.

C. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors for use in hardened portland

cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported

loads and building materials where used.

1. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless-steel.

2. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel.







FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 5 June 19, 2020


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural

carbon-steel shapes.

2.7 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: ASTM B221.

B. Carbon Steel: ASTM A1011/A1011M.

C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M.

E. Threaded Rods: Continuously threaded. Zinc-plated or galvanized steel for indoor

applications and stainless steel for outdoor applications. Mating nuts and washers of

similar materials as rods.

F. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement,

nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections for firestopping materials

and installation for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so

strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading

limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of

supported components plus 200 lb.


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports,

clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of

parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe

hangers.

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 6 June 19, 2020

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual

pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled strut systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs

less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.

Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install

fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods,

nuts, washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install

additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers,

NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before

concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at

top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not

exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project

through insulation.

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 7 June 19, 2020

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger

shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier.

Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation

inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to

support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and

equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc

welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work;

and with the following:

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 8 June 19, 2020

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop

painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

2. Refer to applicable Division 09 Sections for additional information.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified

in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment

that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments

are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal

framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for

hostile environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper

piping and tubing.

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 9 June 19, 2020

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as

specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes

NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of

insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-

center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

7. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

8. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

9. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate,

and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

10. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for

pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base

stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

11. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from

two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might

occur.

12. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and

contraction might occur.

13. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if

longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but


14. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if

small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and


15. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in

addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 10 June 19, 2020

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers

NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to

suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of

beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of

beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if

loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel

I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

FVHD 5195 5:230529 - 11 June 19, 2020

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by

manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping

movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not

exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger

with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit


from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit


from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit


from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of

stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected

equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-

adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

P. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.


FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230548.13 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Elastomeric hangers.

3. Spring hangers.

4. Vibration isolation equipment bases.

B. Refer to the Vibration Isolation Schedule in this Section.

C. Provide vibration isolation for all ceiling suspended mounted equipment.

D. Method of isolation must be coordinated with HVAC manufacturer’s equipment

regarding internal component isolation type/method to prevent redundant isolation types

which would increase noise and vibration. Vibration isolation must be provided in

accordance to recommendation of HVAC equipment manufacturer.

E. HVAC Contractor must furnish all approved mechanical equipment/ systems data to the

vibration isolation manufacturer such that their calculations will be based on data of the

actual equipment to be installed on this construction project.

F. Provision of vibration isolation systems must be coordinated with all aspects of the

building HVAC systems and other trade installations relative to clearance requirements.

G. HVAC Contractor must submit vibration isolation drawing to the General Construction

Contractor for review and coordination of manufacturer’s performed calculations and

system attachment requirements. Include with the submission all installation details

which will be attached to the building systems so structural requirements provided by the

General Construction Contractor can be incorporated into the building systems to

adequately support/connect the HVAC systems.



1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.

FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 2 June 19, 2020

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for

each type and size of vibration isolation device type required.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Detail fabrication and assembly of equipment bases. Detail fabrication including

anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include

adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor

bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of vibration isolation device installation for

HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including

other supports and restraints, if any.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to


1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:


of the following:




d. Vibration Isolation.






FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

5. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

6. Rubber Isolator Pads: Elastomer (neoprene or silicone) arranged in single or

multiple layers and molded with a nonslip pattern and steel baseplates of sufficient

stiffness to provide uniform loading over the pad area.

7. Load Range: From 10 to 50 psig and a deflection not less than 0.08 inch per 1 inch

of thickness. Do not exceed a loading of 50 psig.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC HANGERS

A. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:


of the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an

opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower

hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to

steel contact.

2.3 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:


of the following:





2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or

reducing isolation efficiency.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the

spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.











FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kinetics

Noise Control, Inc; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

3. Vibration Isolation.

B. Steel Bases: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch

clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor

slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A36/A36M.

Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation

mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation control devices for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.


3.2 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in applicable Division 03 Sections.







FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 5 June 19, 2020

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,

piping, or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in applicable Division 03 Sections.


A. Testing: Engage a factory-authorized representative to perform the following field

quality-control testing:

B. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. Snubber minimum clearances.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Torque anchor bolts according to equipment manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect vibration isolation devices. Remove

paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris.

3.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

A. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or in other Division 23 Sections, provide

vibration isolation method as indicated.

B. For HVAC equipment not indicated, provide vibration isolation method in accordance

with 2015 ASRHAE Handbook – Applications, Chapter 48 – Noise and Vibration Control.


MINIMUM

DEFLECTION

(INCHES)

Ceiling recessed cabinet unit heaters Spring hangers ** Grade-mounted condensing units Elastomeric isolation pad **

Unit Heaters Elastomeric hangers **

In-line pumps Spring hangers **

FVHD 5195 5:230548.13 - 6 June 19, 2020


MINIMUM

DEFLECTION

(INCHES)

Air handling units (AHU) installed on

the mezzanine floor

Vibration Isolation Equip-

ment Bases **

Air handling units (AHU) installed

from the overhead structure Spring hangers **

In-line Exhaust Fans (EF) Spring Hangers **

** Minimum deflection in accordance with performance requirements indicated in this Section

& the professional engineer responsible for the vibration calculations & isolator selections.

Coordinate minimum deflection with the applicable equipment manufacturer and referenced

ASHRAE Handbook.


FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

c. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.

3. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.

b. Condensing units.

c. Boilers.

d. Heat-transfer coils.

4. Sound tests. Refer to the Sound Tests Article.

5. Vibration tests.

6. Duct leakage tests.

7. Control system verification.

B. Provide vibration measurements and indicate analysis observations and

recommendations for any items to be corrected and/or measurements found to be

acceptable per industry standards and Specifications for design professional for review for

the following systems:

1. Mezzanine mounted air handling units:

a. AHU-01.

C. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions at no cost to the

project.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 2 June 19, 2020

D. Provide diagrams for all air and hydronic systems indicating device balanced values.

Diagrams must be with associated HVAC system.

E. Refer to all HVAC technical specification sections for additional TAB requirements, and

all necessary field support for coordination with the HVAC Commissioning Agent.

F. Provide Status Reports per the Progress Reporting Article.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.


A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site

after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual

understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled

meeting time and location.

1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.


A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the

qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in

"Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC as a TAB

technician.

B. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or

TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB as

a TAB technician.

C. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1,

Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before

Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize

conflicts with Owner's operations.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to

discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and

equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,

thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual

volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for

intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of

philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air

to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in

plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system

effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced

capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment

when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate

equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and

charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems -

Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and

tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are

accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens

with indicated perforations.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 5 June 19, 2020

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling,

diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points

if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system

readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.

c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.

d. Clean filters are installed.

e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.

f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

h. Ceilings are installed.

i. Windows and doors are installed.

j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:

a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.

c. Water treatment is complete.

d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.

e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.

f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.

g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 6 June 19, 2020

h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.

i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges

or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.

j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.

k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures

contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", NEBB's "Procedural

Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems", or SMACNA's

"HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and

thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply

with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections.

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to applicable Division 23 Sections.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve

position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint

or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes

with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow

measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and

exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 7 June 19, 2020

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed

listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that

simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to

any outlets, to obtain total airflow.

c. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,

a coil traverse may be acceptable.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible

connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible

connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-

handling system.

d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend

adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.

4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling

units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-

handling-unit performance.

5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult

equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and

measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure

amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode

to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 8 June 19, 2020

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to

indicated airflows.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow.

3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.

1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow.

3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow.

4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted.

D. Verify final system conditions.

1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are

within design. Readjust to design if necessary.

2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

4. Mark all final settings.

5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

6. Measure and record all operating data.

7. Record final fan-performance data.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance

down the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.

3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet

static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering

static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-

unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static

pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design

airflow as follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some

controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration

procedure for specific project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design

maximum airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from

terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 9 June 19, 2020

e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available,

note any deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-

deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be

maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full

cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room

pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total

airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable

fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that

simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.

b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust

terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total

matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If

necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,

a coil traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure

airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible

connection.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible

connection.

c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-

handling system.

d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are

measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return

airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-

volume air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum

flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the

system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the

optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 10 June 19, 2020

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows

are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.

c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.

d. Mark final settings.

e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if

necessary. Measure and record all operating data.

f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals

and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of

required coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing

and balancing as follows:

1. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure.

3. Check flow-control valves for proper position.

4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

6. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

1. Measure total water flow.

a. Position valves for full flow through coils.

b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or

exchanger pressure drop.

2. Measure pump TDH as follows:

a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge

pipe prior to any valves.

b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

d. Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow, and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 11 June 19, 2020

e. With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until

design water flow is achieved.

3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.

B. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

1. Measure flow at terminals.

2. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

4. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

F. Verify final system conditions as follows:

1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

2. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

3. Mark final settings.

G. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for

hydronic systems.

B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows:

1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system.

C. For systems with no diversity:

1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or


b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction

pipe prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge

valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero


5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until


c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in

an overloaded condition.

2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to

maintain design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's

specified range.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 13 June 19, 2020

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at

terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature

method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have

been verified.

6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential-pressure

set point.

7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-

frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and

allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point.

Record pump data under both conditions.

8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set.


a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

10. Verify that memory stops have been set.

D. For systems with diversity:

1. Determine diversity factor.

2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as

approved by the design engineer.

3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

a. Measure total water flow.

1) Position valves for full flow through coils.

2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or


b. Measure pump TDH as follows:

1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in

discharge pipe prior to any valves.

2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction

pipe prior to any valves or strainers.

3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge

valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero


FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 14 June 19, 2020

5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until


c. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in

an overloaded condition.

4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

c. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water

flows.

a. Measure flow at terminals.

b. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

c. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

d. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to

maintain design flow.

e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

a. Measure differential pressure, and verify that it is within manufacturer's

specified range.

b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at

terminals:

a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature

method.

b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have

been verified.

8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that

were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just

opened.

9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set

point.

10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable-

frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and

allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point.

Record pump data under both conditions.

11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set.


a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 15 June 19, 2020

b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

c. Mark final settings.

13. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance the primary circuit flow first.

B. Balance the secondary circuits after the primary circuits are complete.

C. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

1. Measure total water flow.

a. Position valves for full flow through coils.

b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.

c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or


2. Measure pump TDH as follows:

a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge

pipe prior to any valves.

b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe

prior to any valves or strainers.

c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.

d. Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve

closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify

that the pump has the intended impeller size.

e. With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until


3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an

overloaded condition.

D. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.

2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.

3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

E. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

1. Measure flow at terminals.

2. Adjust each terminal to design flow.

3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.

4. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain

design flow.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 16 June 19, 2020

5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

F. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified

range.

2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

G. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.

2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been

verified.

H. Verify final system conditions as follows:

1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.

2. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.

3. Mark final settings.

I. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following

data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Phase and hertz.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to

prove proper operation.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record fan and motor operating data.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 17 June 19, 2020

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Hydronic Boilers:

1. Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

2. Measure and record water flow.

3. Record relief valve pressure setting.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.

3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding

unitary equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units.

4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.

6. Airflow.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.

3. Airflow.

3.15 SOUND TESTS

A. After the systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete perform sound

testing at locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each space type

tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing multiple

locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one

location that is remote from the predominant sound source.

1. Offices (Provide tests in 10% of spaces).

2. Conference Rooms.

3. Maintenance Spaces.

B. Instrumentation:

1. The sound-testing meter shall be a portable, general-purpose testing meter

consisting of a microphone, processing unit, and readout.

2. The sound-testing meter shall be capable of showing fluctuations at minimum and

maximum levels, and measuring the equivalent continuous sound pressure level

(LEQ).

3. The sound-testing meter must be capable of using 1/3 octave band filters to

measure mid-frequencies from 31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz.

4. The accuracy of the sound-testing meter shall be plus or minus one decibel.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 18 June 19, 2020

C. Test Procedures:

1. Perform test at quietest background noise period. Note cause of unpreventable

sound that affects test outcome.

2. Equipment should be operating at design values.

3. Calibrate the sound-testing meter prior to taking measurements.

4. Use a microphone suitable for the type of noise levels measured that is compatible

with meter. Provide a windshield for outside or in-duct measurements.

5. Record a set of background measurements in dBA and sound pressure levels in the

eight un-weighted octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment off.

6. Take sound readings in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight un-weighted

octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment operating.

7. Take readings no closer than 36 inches from a wall or from the operating

equipment and approximately 60 inches from the floor, with the meter held or

mounted on a tripod.

8. For outdoor measurements, move sound-testing meter slowly and scan area that

has the most exposure to noise source being tested. Use A-weighted scale for this

type of reading.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record the following:

a. Location.

b. System tested.

c. dBA reading.

d. Sound pressure level in each octave band with equipment on and off.

2. Plot sound pressure levels on NC worksheet with equipment on and off.

3.16 VIBRATION TESTS

A. After systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and

record vibration levels on equipment listed in the Summary Article.

B. Instrumentation:

1. Use portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled vibration meter with

or without a built-in printer.

2. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth,

amplitude, and frequency scale values.

3. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of

deflection, velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second

squared.

4. Verify calibration date is current for vibration meter before taking readings.

C. Test Procedures:

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 19 June 19, 2020

1. To ensure accurate readings, verify that accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and

is mounted properly.

2. With the unit running, set up vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect

transducer to meter with proper cables. Hold magnetic tip of transducer on top of

the bearing, and measure unit in mils of deflection. Record measurement, then

move transducer to the side of the bearing and record in mils of deflection. Record

an axial reading in mils of deflection by holding nonmagnetic, pointed transducer

tip on end of shaft.

3. Change vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and

record above measurements.

4. Record CPM or rpm.

5. Read each bearing on motor, fan, and pump as required. Track and record

vibration levels from rotating component through casing to base.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record location and the system tested.

2. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for tests.

3. Verify that vibration limits follow Specifications, or, if not specified, follow the

General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart or Vibration Acceleration General

Severity Chart from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration

are normally "smooth" to "good."

4. Include in report General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions

plotted.

3.17 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified

tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.18 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract

Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct

controller.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 20 June 19, 2020

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by

controller: open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and

variations from indicated conditions.

3.19 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 0 to plus 10

percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus 0 to plus 10 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances

specified above.

3.20 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and

additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance

measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and

problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each

system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.21 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate

sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by

the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 21 June 19, 2020

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop

Drawings and Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the

report. Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated

values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch

diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems.

Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 22 June 19, 2020

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.



f. Unit arrangement and class.

g. Discharge arrangement.

h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

j. Number, make, and size of belts.

k. Number, type, and size of filters.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm.

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg.

f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg.

i. Outdoor airflow in cfm.

j. Return airflow in cfm.

k. Outdoor-air damper position.

l. Return-air damper position.

m. Vortex damper position.

F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:


b. Location.

c. Coil type.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 23 June 19, 2020

d. Number of rows.

e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.

f. Make and model number.

g. Face area in sq. ft.

h. Tube size in NPS.

i. Tube and fin materials.

j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.

b. Average face velocity in fpm.

c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.

d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.

h. Water flow rate in gpm.

i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.

m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.

o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory

startup equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.



f. Fuel type in input data.

g. Output capacity in Btu/h.

h. Ignition type.

i. Burner-control types.

j. Motor horsepower and rpm.

k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.

l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.

m. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.



b. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 24 June 19, 2020

c. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

d. Air temperature differential in deg F.

e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg.

f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg.

g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg.

h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h.

j. Manifold pressure in psig.

k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F.

l. Operating set point in Btu/h.

m. Motor voltage at each connection.

n. Motor amperage for each phase.

o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h.

H. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:


b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.


f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches.

g. Number, make, and size of belts.



b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

I. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 25 June 19, 2020

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.

e. Duct size in inches.

f. Duct area in sq. ft.

g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.

h. Indicated velocity in fpm.

i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.

j. Actual average velocity in fpm.

k. Barometric pressure in psig.

J. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.


c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft.



b. Air velocity in fpm.

c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.

e. Final airflow rate in cfm.

f. Final velocity in fpm.

g. Space temperature in deg F.

K. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the

following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.


c. Room or riser served.

d. Coil make and size.

e. Flowmeter type.



FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 26 June 19, 2020

b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.

c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.

e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.

f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves

and include the following:

1. Unit Data:


b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.



g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig.

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches.

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.

c. Actual impeller size in inches.

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm.

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig.

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig.

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig.

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig.

i. Final water flow rate in gpm.

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

M. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

FVHD 5195 5:230593 - 27 June 19, 2020

e. Dates of calibration.

3.22 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. If requested, the TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection

in the presence of Architect or Owner.

B. Architect or Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report,

to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total

measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a

normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the

final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final

report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another

TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and

deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.

3. If the second verification also fails, design professional may contact AABC

Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.23 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced

conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer

and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter

conditions.


FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation for ductwork.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.

B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold.

C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperature less than 75 deg F.

D. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given

temperature difference; conductivity is expressed in units of Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F.

E. Density: Is expressed in lb/cu. ft.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include insulation thickness, thermal

conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-

applied if any).








FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 2 June 19, 2020






testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,

mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-





1.8 COORDINATION



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application.

Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance

requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for

space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.9 SCHEDULING






FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" articles for where



C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content

of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C795.



F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting

resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type II with factory-applied

vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied

Jackets" Article.


of the following:



c. Knauf Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.

2. Performance Characteristics:

a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.29 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum,

at 75 deg F mean temperature.

G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide

insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are

specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


of the following:




d. Manson Insulation Inc.











FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 4 June 19, 2020


a. Thermal Conductivity: 0.26 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum,

at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2.2 ADHESIVES




C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for

insulation type and service conditions.

a. Minimum 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient

services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's

recommended dry film thickness.


3. Color: White.


A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with

insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation.


3. Color: White.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 5 June 19, 2020

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.



4. Color: Aluminum.




1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.


a. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.02 perm maximum, when tested according to

ASTM E 96.

b. Puncture Resistance: 50 beach units minimum, when tested according to

ASTM D 781.




2.8 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

B. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.





FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 or ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015

inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.


1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-

steel washer.


Monel.


2.10 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to

ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that

will adversely affect insulation application.



surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.



wet or dry state.



F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.









structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation

to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by

insulation material manufacturer.






jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges



receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2

inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's

written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.


and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 8 June 19, 2020


nominal thickness.





similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS


penetrations.







of roof flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation








at least 2 inches.


C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire


D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation

at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate

damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2

inches.

1. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 9 June 19, 2020


A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and

insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit

area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end

joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches

o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install

additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and

plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel


insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and

end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of

insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or

field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams,

and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at

18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in

a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and

over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width

equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end

joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with

individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 10 June 19, 2020

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation

pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit

area, for 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and

transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,

capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of

vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along

longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end

joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches

o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install

additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and

plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel


insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a

continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and

end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of

insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch

outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or

field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams,

and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at

18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in

a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and

over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width

equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation

section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to

outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct

elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 11 June 19, 2020

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation

surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on

alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.6 FINISHES






B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats

of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual


D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket

and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection

shall be limited to two location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct


C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

5. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building

exterior.

6. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building

exterior.

FVHD 5195 5:230713 - 12 June 19, 2020

7. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

8. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

9. Ductwork beyond fire rated walls, chases and as noted.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.



7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

INTERIOR CONCEALED HVAC SUPPLY DUCTS, RETURN DUCTS, OUTSIDE AIR

DUCTS AND PLENUMS

MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

GLASS FIBER BLANKET 2 YES NONE

INTERIOR EXPOSED HVAC SUPPLY DUCTS, RETURN DUCTS, OUTSIDE AIR DUCTS

AND PLENUMS

MATERIAL FORM THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

GLASS FIBER BOARD 1-1/2 YES NONE


FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated.

1. Note: Gas boiler breechings to be factory fabricated and insulated. Field insulation

of breeching piping is NOT acceptable.



permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).


work.

1. Detail removable insulation at equipment connections.



4. Detail field application for each equipment type.











FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 2 June 19, 2020





C. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke-developed





1.7 COORDINATION



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation

application.

1.8 SCHEDULING






PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by









FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 3 June 19, 2020


A. Comply with requirements in “Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where



C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content

of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871.





F. Mineral-Fiber Board: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply

with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. Provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket.

Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



following:



c. Owens Corning.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.




following:



c. Owens Corning.

2. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket.

3. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more.


less.


Article.















FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 4 June 19, 2020


ASTM C449.

2.4 ADHESIVES




C. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below-

ambient services.




4. Color: White.


ambient services.



3. Color: White.


services.




3. Color: White.


A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible



fire-resistant lagging cloths over equipment insulation.


FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 5 June 19, 2020

3. Color: White.

2.7 SEALANTS



B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


3. Color: White or gray.

C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: Aluminum.




1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C1136, Type II.




2.10 TAPES

A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic

adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136.

1. Width: 3 inches.





6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


inch wide with closed seal.

2. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to

accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application.


1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed

for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth

of insulation indicated.


Monel.


2.12 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30-mils- thick, minimum 1- by 1-inch PVC in accordance with

ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C, white or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION



1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of

defects.



3.2 PREPARATION



B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating

to insulated surfaces as follows:

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 7 June 19, 2020

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and

an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and

300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and

application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32

and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate

coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in




surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, and jackets, of thicknesses

required for each item of equipment, as specified in insulation system schedules.



wet or dry state.



F. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace











3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation

to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by

insulation material manufacturer.

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 8 June 19, 2020

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and

shield.









receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4

inches o.c.




5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.


nominal thickness.






O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:




4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure

insulation with adhesive, anchor pins, and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates

per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 9 June 19, 2020

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment,

including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints.

Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.

4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on

sides of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.

b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate.

c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from

insulation end joints and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.

d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation.

e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of

tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins, and attach speed washers.

g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel


insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band

material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical

and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for

securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel

and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one

circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end.

Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a

wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and

stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest

circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of

equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for

securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.

8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and

inspection.

9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates.

10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open

ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide

box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges.

Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch-diameter

fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a

field-adjustable latching mechanism.

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 10 June 19, 2020

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick.

3. For below-ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and

penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor

barrier.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual


B. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.



representative.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect,

by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their

installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of

equipment defined in " Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles. For large equipment,

remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.


inspections.


3.1 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this

Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more

stringent.

B. Acceptable insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and

pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from

materials is Contractor's option.

C. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

HEATING HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS AND AIR SEPARATORS (100 TO 250 DEG F)


IN INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

MINERAL

FIBER

BOARD OR

PIPE & TANK

2 NO NONE

FVHD 5195 5:230716 - 11 June 19, 2020

HEATING HOT WATER EQUIPMENT AND PUMPS, (100 TO 250 DEG F)


IN INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

MINERAL

FIBER

BOARD 2 NO NONE


FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulation for HVAC piping systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F or higher.

B. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F.

C. Thermal Conductivity (k-value): Measure of heat flow through a material at a given

temperature difference; conductivity is expressed in units of Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F.

D. Density: Is expressed in pcf.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include insulation thickness, thermal

conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field

applied if any).








FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 2 June 19, 2020

















1.8 COORDINATION



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements

for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required

for maintenance.

1.9 SCHEDULING






FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," article for where









F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with

ASTM C534/C534M, Type I for tubular materials, Type II for sheet materials.


Armacell LLC ; AP Armaflex Tube Insulation. or a comparable product by one of

the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.

b. K-Flex USA.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.



Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company ; Micro-Lok. or a comparable product by

one of the following:



2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ-SSL.

3. Minimum Temperature Rating: 850 deg F.

4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585.


Article.


less


A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.










FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 4 June 19, 2020

1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.0 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum at 500

deg F mean temperature.

2. Compressive Strength: 10 psi at 5 percent deformation.


ASTM C 449.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 1.2 Btu x inch/h x sq. ft. x deg F average maximum at 500

deg F mean temperature.

2. Compressive Strength: 100 psi at 5 percent deformation.

2.3 ADHESIVES



B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Solvent-based adhesive.

1. Flame-spread index shall be 25 or less and smoke-developed index shall be 50 or

less as tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Wet Flash Point: Below 0 deg F.

3. Service Temperature Range: 40 to 200 deg F.

4. Color: Black.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Produced under the UL Classification and Follow-up service.

2. Type: Non-flammable, solvent-based.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to 180 deg F.

D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.







4. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient

services.

FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 5 June 19, 2020




3. Color: White.


A. Adhesives shall comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A, and shall be compatible



fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.


3. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS



B. Joint Sealants:

1. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.

a. Service Temperature Range: Minus 150 to plus 250 deg F.

b. Color: White or gray.

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVDC and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:



3. Color: White.




1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered

by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I.




FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784,

Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and

forming.

1. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.

2. Color: White.

3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field

fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves,

flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints,

and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

D. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005,

Temper H-14.

a. Factory cut and rolled to size.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper.

d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-

radius elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are

not available.

2.10 TAPES



1. Width: 3 inches.



FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 7 June 19, 2020




B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic

adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Width: 2 inches.

2. Thickness: 6 mils.




C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Width: 2 inches.





2.11 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4 inch wide, stainless steel or

Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION






FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 8 June 19, 2020

3.2 PREPARATION



B. For corrosive areas: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a

corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and

an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and

300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and

application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32

and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate

coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in




surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and

specialties.


required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules.



wet or dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace


H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with


I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at


FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 9 June 19, 2020








4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields

over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support,

and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate


L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:





3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing

lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.





and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its

nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and


O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.



P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:




FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 10 June 19, 2020

3.4 PENETRATIONS


penetrations.







of roof flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation








at least 2 inches.


C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire


D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections for firestopping and

fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in


3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and

Unions:

FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 11 June 19, 2020

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings,

unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity


2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation made from same material

and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and

irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform

contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation of same material and thickness

as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section

closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and



is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box

studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation of same material, density, and



is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate

strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced

without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains

vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions using a section of oversized

preformed pipe insulation to fit. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than

2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union"

matching size and color of pipe labels.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with

a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather

mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing

mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible

elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,

valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers

to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature

taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes.

Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with

insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of

adjoining pipe insulation.

FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 12 June 19, 2020

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend

insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in

place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with

insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except

divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its

attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union

cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with

insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel

second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet

insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface

being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface

being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe


2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and

sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and

to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.


FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 13 June 19, 2020

4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of

air to surface being insulated.


A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and

tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and

protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps

with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not

staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as

recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier

mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket

insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams

at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.




2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered

sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure

insulation materials with wire or bands.




2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe

insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation

without disturbing insulation.


FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 14 June 19, 2020

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation

with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.

2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive.

3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated and for horizontal applications, install with 1-inch

overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap

and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and

end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with

stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.9 FINISHES






B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats

of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual


D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets.



representative.

B. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by

Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of

their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe,

three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of

threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves,

FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 15 June 19, 2020

and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping



inspections.


3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this

Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more

stringent.

B. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified

for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping

system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the

following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

D. Provide PVC fittings on all piping unless otherwise noted.

INTERIOR HEATING HOT WATER HYDRONIC (75 TO 200 DEG F) PIPING, CONCEALED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1-1/2 NO NONE

1-1/2 AND

LARGER MINERAL FIBER 2 NO NONE

INTERIOR HEATING HOT WATER HYDRONIC (75 TO 200 DEG F) PIPING, EXPOSED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1-1/2 NO PVC

1-1/2 AND

LARGER MINERAL FIBER 2 NO PVC

INTERIOR COOLING COIL CONDENSATE PIPING

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 MINERAL FIBER 1/2 YES NONE

1-1/2 AND

LARGER

MINERAL FIBER 1 YES NONE

FVHD 5195 5:230719 - 16 June 19, 2020

REFRIGERANT PIPING, EXPOSED AND CONCEALED

PIPE SIZES

(NPS) MATERIALS

THICKNESS IN

INCHES

VAPOR BARRIER

REQ’D

FIELD APPLIED

JACKET

1/2 TO 1-1/4 FLEXIBLE

ELASTOMERIC 1/2 YES **

1-1/2 AND

LARGER

FLEXIBLE

ELASTOMERIC 1 YES **

**Provide PVC jacket for exposed interior insulation and aluminum jacket for exposed exterior insulation.


FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 230923 – DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL (DDC) SYSTEM FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Provide a new building wide Building Management System/Direct Digital Control System

(BMS/DDC) for all new equipment and associated plants.

B. Provide additional programming points, as indicated, for the Owner to utilize at their

discretion.

1. 30 additional Points.

C. The work under this Section of the Specification shall include all labor, materials,

equipment, software, licenses, and services necessary for and incidental to the proper

completion of the new Building Management System (BMS) and related work shown,

implied or specified, but is not limited to the following as described hereinafter.

D. Provide a new BMS for a complete turnkey, stand-alone, fully operational BACnet top to

bottom Direct Digital Control (DDC) System.

E. Discharge Air Temperature Sensors:

1. Provide discharge air temperature sensors for all air-side HVAC equipment

including but not limited to Air Handling Units, Variable Air Volume Boxes, etc.

F. General: The control system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of DDC

controllers and a web-based system, and capable of connecting to a web server with a

network interface.

G. The system shall directly control HVAC equipment as specified hereinafter in the

Sequence of Operation and Drawing Equipment Schedules. Each zone controller shall

provide occupied and unoccupied modes of operation by individual zone. Furnish

energy conversation features such as optimal start and stop, night setback, request-based

logic, and demand level adjustment of setpoints.

H. System shall use the BACnet protocol for communication to the main panel CPU for

communication between control modules. Schedules, setpoints, trends, and alarms

specified in Sequences of Operation shall be BACnet objects.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 2 June 19, 2020

I. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of

any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a building operations

terminal. The primary point of interface on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser

such as Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox.

J. Control system must comply with the standard of ASHRAE/ANSI 135-(latest edition) Data

Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Systems (BACnet).

K. Prior to the submission of the ATC system shop drawing, submit a letter or contract from

specified manufacturer indicating authorization from contracting firm to procure, install,

and service specified manufacturer’s equipment. The ATC shop drawing will not be

reviewed until such document is reviewed and approved by Engineer.

L. Provide sufficient site visits to complete installation and provide startup and commission

controls for each completed phase of the project, including change of seasons for re-

commissioning during alternate mode of operation.

M. The ATC scope includes the provision of the pump variable frequency drives specified in


N. Exposed ATC panel in finished spaces as shown on drawings shall be painted by the

General Construction Prime Contractor. These panels shall include same key locks.

O. The ATC system shall be powered from the building power. Provide wiring and devices

as required to extend wires and conduits from the local panels where not indicated on

the Electrical Drawings. Wiring shall meet the requirements of national, state and local

codes.

P. The ATC scope includes providing 24V power to the VAV boxes indicated on the

Drawings. Power to be provided via the ATC panel.

Q. All setpoints shall be adjustable through the new head end controller, or any PC

connected to the internet via password protection.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Provide a new BACnet Building Management System (BMS) incorporating Direct Digital

Control (DDC), equipment monitoring, and control consisting of microcomputer based

network controls, digital electronic controllers and unit specific controllers interfacing

directly with sensors, actuators and environmental delivery systems (i.e., VAV boxes, unit

ventilators, fin tube radiation, air handling equipment, rooftop unit, pumps, etc.); electric

controls and mechanical devices for items indicated on drawings or described herein

including dampers, valves, panels; a primary communication network to allow data

exchange; microcomputer based digital control modules interfacing with sensors,

actuators, and terminal equipment control devices; and secondary communication

networks interfacing network devices. All Network Control Units and Equipment

Controllers shall be tied to the new Building Management System DDC system front-end.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 3 June 19, 2020

B. Provide all submittals, data entry, and electrical installation where indicated,

programming, start-up, test and validation acceptance documentation, and system

warranty.

C. The control system shall consist of all sensors, transmitters, controllers, control panels,

software, programming service tools, interconnecting wiring, power wiring and any other

devices or installation materials needed to fill the intent of the specification, the

Sequence of Operation and to provide for a complete and operable system.

D. All wiring, including interlock and power wiring, required for the operation of the control

system shall be provided by the control specialist, except where specifically noted

elsewhere. Wiring shall meet the requirements of National, State, and Local codes and

the Electrical Sections of this specification.

E. The engineering, installation, calibration, programming and commissioning necessary for

a complete and fully operational control system, as specified, shall be provided by the

Controls Specialist.

F. Provide surge protection for wiring and all system components.

G. Provide conduit for exposed BMS communication wiring.

H. Label all ATC control wiring as “BMS Cabling” with self-adhering markers at 20' intervals

on straight runs, at change of direction and at entrance and exit points through walls,

floors and ceilings.

I. All controllers and control points shall be programmed for trending capability and

activated through the frontend.

J. Coordinate with the Owner the required levels of alarms, assignments of defined levels

and dial out sequences. Remove all nuisance alarms that have been pre-programmed

into the software, review with the Owner.

K. Points List, Sequence of Operations and Specification Parts 1, 2 and 3 of this section and

sequence indicated in Division 23 sections makeup the entire DDC system requirements

including, but not limited to control devices, controller types, O/I’s and accessories

required to facilitate system sequences and complex operations, and shall be

incorporated as a comprehensive Digital/Analog/I/O control solution. Work shall not be

limited to only the scheduled I/O list.

L. All setpoints shall be adjustable through the front-end software.

M. Conceal all control wiring in occupied spaces within walls.

N. Provide transducers for air flow measuring devices that are provided by the HVAC Prime

Contractor.

O. Provide VAV box discharge air temperature control to prevent subcooling/overheating of

LAT and individual spaces.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 4 June 19, 2020

P. All cabling to be plenum rated and supported in accordance with the project electrical

specifications, local codes and NEC.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A

prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number

of steps.

B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or

temperature.

C. BACnet Specific Definitions:

1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A

communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services

over a network.

2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of

BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are

combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device.

3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet

messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP

subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number.

4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products

for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet

International.

5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that

identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a

device.

D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition

and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes

used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal.

E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller

residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are

indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-

Specific Controller.

F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system

and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise

system.

G. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic.

H. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different

communication protocols.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 5 June 19, 2020

I. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog

input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals

are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure,

and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and

generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is

sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.

J. LAN: Local area network.

K. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than

50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

L. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data.

M. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing, IEE 8802-3. Datalink protocol LAN option that uses

twisted-pair wire for low-speed communication.

N. MTBF: Mean time between failures.

O. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable

application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-

to-peer network for transmission of global data.

P. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts

it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol.

Q. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners.

R. RAM: Random access memory.

S. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer.

T. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming

database.

U. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft

Windows.

V. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

W. USB: Universal Serial Bus.

X. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the

underlying protocol.

Y. VAV: Variable air volume.

Z. WLED: White light emitting diode.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 6 June 19, 2020

1.5 WORK BY OTHERS

A. Access doors and setting in place of valves, water pressure and differential taps, flow

switches, thermal wells and dampers by HVAC Prime Contractor.

B. Prime Electrical Contractor shall provide normal power circuits to each control panel as

indicated on the electrical drawings. ATC work shall include all other electrical power,

wiring and devices as indicate and required. Wiring shall meet the requirements of

national, state and local codes.

C. Prime Electrical Contractor shall provide normal power to designated ATC control panels

and indicated units.

1. ATC scope includes providing low voltage power to serve adjacent equipment

(including VAV boxes). Wiring and transformers shall meet the requirements of

national, state, and local codes.

2. Refer to electrical drawings for locations of power feeds to the ATC Panels.

3. ATC scope shall include the provision of all other electrical wiring and devices as

indicated and required for a complete and operational system. Wiring shall meet

the requirements of national, state and local codes.

D. Where indicated on the plans, occupancy sensors are furnished and installed by the

Prime Electrical Contractor with a dry contact for ATC interface. Coordinate work with

the Prime Electrical Contractor.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Owner’s

representative, Balancing Specialist, and HVAC Prime Contractor. Identify meeting time

and date with design professional a minimum of 7 days prior to the meeting taking place.

B. Include on the Agenda a review of the graphics and control sequences, phasing

coordination, and final locations of the workstation.

C. Record and product meeting minute notes and submit a copy to the design professional.

1.7 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION

A. Central System Control: Occupied/unoccupied shall be determined by the timed event

software. The Direct Digital Control, DDC panel shall control the indicated sequence of

operation.

B. Heating Hot Water System:

1. The boilers shall be partially under the control of the BMS Direct Digital Controller

(DDC) panel which shall enable boiler control panels and allow setpoint

adjustments. The boiler controller shall energize boiler circulator pump (primary),

capacity control, initiate alarms, sequences, part loads, stages, and interface with

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 7 June 19, 2020

BMS. DDC system shall not prevent boiler controller safeties including shutdown.

Provide a BACNET gateway for communication and control of Boilers where the

boiler manufacturer does not have available. Gateway to be in format as required

by Boiler Manufacturer requirements. Provide flow meter for determination of

measured flow.

2. The boilers shall be started as follows:

a. The boilers will be enabled year-round to include summer VAV reheat.

b. The boiler controller system will sequence the boilers to maintain the hot

water supply temperature setpoint based on an outside air temperature reset

schedule below. If the split between the return temperature and supply

temperature is greater than 30 deg F (adj.), then temporarily (2 hours, adj.)

override the reset schedule output with the addition of 10 deg F to overcome

the extra system load.

c. Supply water temperature shall be inversely reset to the outdoor air

temperature by the DDC panel in accordance with the following schedule:

Hot Water Outside Air

180 deg F Below 32 deg F

115 deg F Above 60 deg F

116-179 deg F Proportionally ramped

d. When the heating system is activated, the BMS will bring on one of two

secondary pumps. The secondary pump lead-lag function will be performed

every 7 days. If flow is not established in 30 seconds, the BMS will then

activate the lag pump and energize an alarm to signal the user that one of the

pumps has failed. If both pumps cannot establish flow, then the BMS will

disable boilers.

e. When heating is called for, the BMS will bring on the circulator (primary)

pump associated with the current lead/lag configuration boiler.

f. On proof of flow, the boilers operate under their operating and safety

controls.

g. When the system is enabled and proof of primary and secondary pump flow

has been established for 2 minutes (adj.), the system will then enable the

boilers. The lead boiler will be enabled to run. If a boiler in alarm is called

to run, it will remain disabled and the next boiler in the series will be

enabled. This boiler (or boilers) in alarm will be locked out until reset, and

an alarm will be generated. After 15 minutes (adj.), if the hot water system

temperature is below the temperature setpoint, then the first lag boiler will be

enabled. After an additional 15 minutes passes and the system temperature

is still below the setpoint, the remaining lag boilers will be enabled following

this pattern until all the boiler not in alarm are active. While the hot water

system temperature requirement is satisfied (plus or minus 3 deg F, adj.) the

system will neither increase nor decrease the number of active boilers. On a

rise in the hot water system temperature above setpoint, the reveres shall

occur until the lead boiler alone is running.

h. The staging of the boiler capacity, leaving water temperature sequencing and

will be a function of either the BMS or the boiler controller where the BMS

cannot facilitate. The reset temperature schedule will be through the BMS.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 8 June 19, 2020

The entering fluid temperature sensor monitors changes in entering fluid

temperature to anticipate changes in the heating load. Based on leaving fluid

temperature, the boiler controller will add or subtract capacity to maintain a

constant secondary loop fluid temperature.

i. Run time equalization will direct the boilers without regard to numbered

sequence and focus only on run time hours. Upon a call for heat the DDC

will look at the total run time for each unit and identify and select the unit

with the least total hours to be the lead boiler. Additional boilers will be

energized utilizing an identical selection process.

3. During early morning warm-up mode add 20 deg F to hot water discharge

temperature schedule and proportionally ramp. Setpoint warm-up to occupied

period switching shall be ramped such that the change occurs over a 15 minute

time duration.

4. The hot water secondary pumps alternate to equalize runtime. Selection of the lead

pump is evaluated on a weekly basis. The pump with the least runtime is the lead

pump. If the lead pump fails to start, the lag pump will be energized. An alarm will

be sent to the front-end.

5. When the hot water system is on (indicated by a call for heating), the lead pump

starts. If all the hot water valves are closed in the system for more than 5 minutes

then the pump will stop. The variable frequency drive modulates pump speed to

maintain system differential pressure (psi) as sensed near the end of the piping run.

6. The DDC system uses current switches to confirm the lead pump is in the desired

state (i.e. on or off) and generates an alarm if status deviates from DDC start/stop

control.

7. Variable Speed Pump:

a. The BMS will sequence the pump variable frequency drives and the drives

will control the pumps.

b. The lead water pump shall be energized.

c. The system shall consist of one duty pump/AFD set, one standby pump/AFD

set, with duty-standby pump selection, automatic alternation and automatic

transfer to the standby pump.

d. The pumping system shall operate automatically.

e. Sensor/transmitters (2) shall be installed by the HVAC Contractor and

furnished and wired by the ATC subcontractor.

f. The sensor/transmitters shall send a 4-20 mA signal to the building control

system and indicate of process variable condition.

g. The DDC will sequence the control operation. The BMS shall compare each

signal to the independent, user determined setpoints.

h. When all setpoints (as determined by the ATC Contractor based on actual

location, field conditions and point pressure) are satisfied by the process

variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum energy

consumption level.

i. The DDC shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to its

individual setpoint and control to the least satisfied zone.

j. As the piping system pressure deviates from setpoint, the DDC shall send the

appropriate analog signal to the VFD to speed up or slow down the

pump/motor.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 9 June 19, 2020

k. The redundant variable speed system shall be started through the DDC.

l. In the event of a system differential pressure failure due to a pump or VFD

fault, the DDC automatically initiates a timed sequence of operation to start

the redundant pump/VFD set in the variable speed mode.

m. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable

signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone

sensor/transmitter shall remain in the scan/compare program for control.

n. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, the VFD

shall maintain a predetermined speed, reset shall be automatic upon

correction of the zone failure.

8. The hot water flow through the secondary loop system will vary and minimum flow

relative to the boiler requirements must be maintained. As each boiler is

sequenced ON the boiler the associated circulator pump will be energized and the

system flow passing the boiler connection must not be less the circulator pump

flow rate or sum of the energized boiler pumps flow rates. Provide a secondary

flow meter for determination of flow.

9. The hot water system flow shall not be less than the lead or the sum of the boiler

design flows. In the event the distribution loop flow reaches the boiler (or sum of

the boilers) circulation flow, the bypass valve will slowly modulated open and

maintain minimum flow as sensed by the flow meter. The system differential

pressure devices will verify the required minimum hot water flow and override in

the event of a flow meter malfunction. Program the VFD not to go below the boiler

circulator flow rate or sum of operating boiler.

10. Hot water system controls valve shall be slow acting and the building control

system programming must be design to facilitate operation of a boiler(s).

11. When the emergency wall gas switch is depressed, all boilers will be disabled and

gas valves will fully close.

C. RTU/AHU Control Scheme Summary:

1. AHU-01: VAV with hydronic heating and split DX cooling.

2. AHU-02: Variable speed single zone with hydronic heating and split system DX

cooling.

a. Demand Control Ventilation Strategy to be employed for the following units:

AHU-02.

D. Air Handling Unit (VAV split DX cooling with unit mounted hot water heating coil)

1. General: Provide factory mounted DDC controls and all field installed accessories

as required to provide the following basic programmable functions and intended

operations. The PI control of installed DDC devices will maintain tight control of

temperature and humidity setpoints. AHU Manufacturer to provide all unit

mounted controls including, but not limited to thermostat, humidistat, control

wiring and LCD access programmable controller.

a. Provide additional controllers, input/output devices, wiring, programming,

etc. to meet the sequences of operation, associated points list, and interface

with the building LAN and BMS.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 10 June 19, 2020

2. Schedule: The BMS will interface with the unit through a DDC that transmits

system information (schedules Based, setpoints, etc.) through a communication bus

connected to a front-end system.

a. DDC controls starts and stops system in accordance with its building

programmed occupancy schedule. When system is energized (occupied

mode) unit damper open to their initial set positions, and the supply fan and

associated exhaust fan run continuously. The reverse shall occur in

unoccupied mode. Outside air damper shall be normally closed.

3. Enthalpy Controlled Economizer: Provide full modulating economizer with

adjustable enthalpy changeover. Controller to modulate return and outside air

dampers to maintain the desired mixed air temperature, using outside air wet and

dry bulb temperatures, combining compressor and economizer operation to

minimize energy consumption.

4. Warm-up:

a. Unit will operate as in the occupied mode of operation except that the

outside air damper will be fully closed, and the return air damper will be

fully open.

b. The associated exhaust fan shall be off.

5. Occupied:

a. The supply and associated exhaust fans will run continuously and vary speed

based on system demand. The associated exhaust fan will vary based on

tracked outside airflow and tracking the supply fan.

b. The outside air damper will open to minimum position. The return air

damper will close a proportionate amount. The associated exhaust fan speed

will energize and modulate in response to the outside air damper opening.

Final damper positions will depend on final measured air flows of the three

measuring stations. Minimum outside air must be maintained during all

cycles of operation with the exception of economizer override.

c. Temperature sensor located in the supply fan discharge will, on a rise in

temperature, modulate the gas heating valve close and on a further rise, open

the outside air damper, if enthalpy controller permits, and on still a further

rise, modulate the corresponding condensing unit digital scroll compressor(s)

as required to meet the setpoint. On a drop in temperature, the reverse will

occur.

d. The unit will maintain the supply air temperature setpoint between 55 Deg F

and 60 Deg F (adj). The setpoint will be reset between the upper and lower

limits based on outside air temperature conditions and space demand. The

remote condensing unit DX compressor(s), modulating heating water valve,

and economizer will modulate/vary without overlapping to maintain the

supply air discharge setpoint.

Outdoor Temp SA Setpoint

25.0 deg F 60.00 deg F

37.5 deg F 58.75 deg F

50.0 deg F 57.50 deg F

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 11 June 19, 2020

62.5 deg F 56.25 deg F

75.0 deg F 55.00 deg F

e. The reset schedule based on outdoor air temperature shall be provided with

an override when all VAV boxes are reporting dampers at a minimum

position to provide the following:

1) Cooling Mode: To permit VAV dampers operator to move to the

damper midpoint.

a) If the return air humidity levels exceed the setpoint or any space

is unable to maintain the room temperature the supply air

temperature shall be reset back to 55 deg-F by 1 deg F

increments.

2) Heating Mode: Reset supply air temperature back to 55 deg-F if any

zone rises above the cooling setpoint.

6. Unoccupied:

a. The supply air fan cycles and the cooling/heating valves modulates to

maintain discharge temperature setting.

b. The outside air dampers are closed and the return air damper is open.

c. The associated exhaust fan is off.

d. VAV boxes will maintain cooling/heating space temperature at a reduced

setting.

7. System Functions and Safeties:

a. Freezestat (FZ @ 38 deg. F) will stop the supply and power exhaust air fans

and close the outside damper on a drop in temperature below its setpoint.

Alarm is sent to DDC system.

b. High limit static pressure sensor, located in the supply fan discharge will stop

the supply and associated exhaust fans on a rise in static above its setting.

c. Low limit static pressure sensor, located in the return air, will stop the supply

and associated exhaust fans on a drop in static pressure below its setting.

d. Upon a loss of power, the AHU will be disabled and all control devices will

return to their fail-safe positions. Upon reactivation, the unit will return to

normal mode of operation including phase loss.

e. Enthalpy sensors will compare outside and return air temperature and

humidity and determine which air steam is more economical for use.

f. Economizer Mode: Sequence outside/return air dampers and associated

exhaust fan to satisfy mixed air temperatures.

g. Smoke duct detector (where indicated) located in the return air duct shall be

interlocked with supply fan and associated exhaust air fan. The detectors,

upon sensing the products of combustion shall initiate the fans to stop

running, outside air damper to close and send an alarm to the DDC and

building fire alarm system.

h. Fans status are provided to the DDC system.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 12 June 19, 2020

8. Air Flow, Measurement and Control

a. Static Pressure Control: Supply fan modulates to maintain a constant static

pressure in the supply duct. A differential pressure transmitter located in the

supply air ductwork (located approximately 75% of distance downstream

from supply fan) maintains duct static pressure setting (adjustable) by

modulating the supply fan variable speed controller.

b. Airflow Measuring: Flow measuring stations, located at the supply and

exhaust fans transmit volume signals to the DDC panel. The DDC panel will

compare the two volumes and adjust the exhaust air fan variable speed drive

to the balance of the exhaust, return and outside air to closely match supply

air. The outside airflow will be measured in the outside air ductwork and

controlled to maintain a constant minimum air flow as the return air, and

exhaust air vary in volume. When the economizer cycle is enabled the

outside air damper and bypass damper will modulate open as the return air

damper closes a proportional amount, the exhaust fan speed varies while

maintaining discharge setpoint temperature.

1) Air flow measuring stations associated with supply fan to be flow-

shaping bellmouth inlet type, or as approved by the AHU

manufacturer.

2) Airflow measuring station associated with outside air to be pitot tube

array mounted in the O/A duct main.

3) The associated exhaust fan will vary the fan speed to maintain the

required exhaust airflow (relief) rate.

9. Associated exhaust fan (EF-01):

a. Refer to the applicable sequence for pressurization control (EF-01)

E. Air Handling Unit (Single Zone VAV split DX cooling with unit mounted hot water

heating coil)

1. General: Provide factory mounted DDC controls and all field installed accessories

as required to provide the following basic programmable functions and intended

operations. The PI control of installed DDC devices will maintain tight control of

temperature and humidity setpoints. AHU Manufacturer to provide all unit

mounted controls including, but not limited to thermostat, humidistat, control

wiring and LCD access programmable controller.

a. Provide additional controllers, input/output devices, wiring, programming,

etc. to meet the sequences of operation, associated points list, and interface

with the building LAN and BMS.

2. Schedule: The BMS will interface with the unit through a DDC that transmits

system information (schedules Based, setpoints, etc.) through a communication bus

connected to a front-end system.

a. DDC controls starts and stops system in accordance with its building

programmed occupancy schedule. When system is energized (occupied

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 13 June 19, 2020

mode) unit damper open to their initial set positions, and the supply fan and

associated exhaust fan run continuously. The reverse shall occur in

unoccupied mode. Outside and exhaust air dampers shall be normally

closed.

3. Warm-up:

a. Unit will operate as in the occupied mode of operation except that the

outside air damper will be fully closed, and the return air damper will be

fully open.

b. The associated exhaust fan shall be off.

4. Occupied:

a. Setpoints:

1) Space Heating Temperature: 70 deg F (adj).

2) Space Cooling Temperature: 75 deg F, 50% RH (adj).

3) Space Humidity (for dehumidification): 55% RH (adj).

4) Heating Limiting Temperature Setpoint: 80 deg F (adj.)

b. The supply fans will run continuously and vary speed based on system

demand.

c. The outside air damper will open to minimum position. The return air

damper will close a proportionate amount. Final damper positions will

depend on final measured air flows of the measuring stations. Minimum

outside air must be maintained during all cycles of operation with the

exception of CO2 and economizer override.

d. Cooling mode:

1) When space temperature rises above the cooling setpoint, the supply

fan, at the minimum speed will gradually increase speed to satisfy the

space temperature sensor in conjunction with the supply cooling and

the system will perform the most efficient means to provide space

cooling.

2) The economizer will be energized as the first stage of cooling.

3) The economizer controller will check outside air temperature and

humidity and modulate the associated dampers.

4) When the cooling demand increases more than the economizer mode

is capable of cooling the system shall revert back to minimum outside

air, and the electric refrigeration shall be staged by the microprocessor

controller by varying combinations of compressors and modulate the

refrigerant hot gas reheat coil to attain setpoint temperature and

dehumidification to maintain the air temperature setpoint as the supply

fan speed increases to satisfy the space demand.

5) The controller will maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint 56

deg F (adj) as sensed by the temperature sensor downstream of the fan

discharge. If the discharge air temperature as sensed by unit discharge

sensor rises 1 deg F (adj) above setpoint for more than 5 minutes, the

compressor will be enabled for cooling. The hot gas reheat coil will

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 14 June 19, 2020

modulate to heat the leaving air temperature to setpoint. If the reheat

coil is not able to maintain a constant leaving air temperature, the

compressor capacity controller will be enabled to maintain setpoint. If

the discharge air temperature drops below the setpoint by 1 deg F (adj)

for more than 5 minutes, the reverse will occur. Factory provided and

mounted time delay relays are to prevent compressor short cycling

6) On a drop in temperature, the reverse will occur.

e. Dehumidification Mode: When space humidistat senses a rise in space

humidity above its setpoint, mechanical cooling will be energized and

modulating hot gas reheat controls will divert hot gas to the reheat coil as

required to maintain the required supply air discharge air temperature. When

the relative humidity setpoint drops below setpoint, the controller will return

to heating or cooling mode.

f. Heating mode:

1) The supply fan will be at minimum position.

2) When the space temperature falls below the heating setpoint, the

booster pumps (VFD controlled) shall be energized at the pump

minimum setpoint (8 gpm, verify laminar flow condition with the AHU

manufacturer). The 3-way mixing valve shall modulate to satisfy the

space temperature until the mixing valve is fully open (no bypass).

3) If the space temperature continues to fall and the 3-way mixing valve is

full open (no bypass) and the VFD controlled booster pumps shall

increase the water flow rate to satisfy the space temperature.

4) The pump VFD shall increase the water flow rate until the leaving air

temperature reaches the limiting temperature setpoint.

5) If the space temperature continues to drop and the discharge air

temperature reaches the limiting temperature setpoint, the supply fan,

at the minimum speed will gradually increase the speed while the

booster pump VFD maintains the limiting temperature setpoint.

6) When the supply fan reaches the maximum airflow, the booster pump

VFD will increase the flow rate to satisfy the space temperature.


5. Unoccupied:

a. Setpoints:

1) Space Heating Temperature: 60 deg F (adj).

2) Space Cooling Temperature: 80 deg F (adj).

b. Cycle Operation: During schedule unoccupied periods, the outside air

damper will be in the closed position and the supply fans will be de-

energized.

c. Cooling Mode: When space temperature rises above the cooling set-up

temperature, the supply fan and cooling will be energized and operate until

the space temperature is satisfied or drops below setpoint. Economizer will

operate as the first stage of cooling, provided outside air conditions permit.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 15 June 19, 2020

d. Heating Mode: When space temperature drops below the night setback

temperature, the supply fan and heat will be energized and operate until

space temperatures rise above the reduced setpoint.

6. Enthalpy Controlled Economizer: Provide full modulating economizer with

adjustable enthalpy changeover. Controller to modulate return and outside air

dampers to maintain the desired mixed air temperature, using outside air wet and

dry bulb temperatures, combining compressor and economizer operation to

minimize energy consumption.

7. Demand Control Ventilation (where indicated per the summary Article and

Drawings): Outside air damper to remain closed. A wall mounted CO2 sensor

located in the space, upon sensing an increase in space CO2 levels above the

programmed setpoint, will override economizer operation and modulate open

outside air damper (until the damper reaches the minimum airflow requirements as

scheduled) to decrease CO2 levels, close return air damper proportionally to equal

increase to outside air setpoint. If the outside air temperature is below the

programmed setpoint, heating or cooling will be enabled.

8. Supply air fan will vary in speed and will sequence to cooling/heating operation to

maintain space temperature for most efficient operation of unit. Provide control so

supply air fan does not exceed design maximum air flow.

9. Air Flow, Measurement and Control:

a. Airflow Measuring: Flow measuring stations, located at the supply fans

transmit volume signals to the DDC panel. The outside airflow will be

measured in the outside air ductwork and controlled to maintain a constant

minimum air flow as the return air, and exhaust air vary in volume. When

the economizer or CO2 cycle is enabled the outside air damper will

modulate open as the return air damper closes a proportional amount, while

maintaining discharge setpoint temperature.

1) Air flow measuring stations associated with supply and exhaust fans to

be flow-shaping bellmouth inlet type, or as approved by the AHU

manufacturer.

2) Airflow measuring station associated with outside air to be pitot tube

array mounted in the O/A duct main.

3) The associated exhaust fan will vary the fan speed to maintain the

required exhaust airflow (relief) rate.

10. Associated exhaust fan (EF-02):

a. Refer to the applicable sequence for pressurization control (EF-02)

11. System Functions and Safeties:

a. Freezestat (FZ @ 38 deg. F) will stop the supply and associated exhaust air

fans and close the outside damper on a drop in temperature below its

setpoint. Alarm is sent to DDC system.

b. High limit static pressure sensor, located in the supply fan discharge will stop

the supply and associated exhaust fans on a rise in static above its setting.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 16 June 19, 2020

c. Low limit static pressure sensor, located in the return air, will stop the supply

and exhaust fans on a drop in static pressure below its setting.

d. Upon a loss of power, AHU will be disabled and all control devices will

return to their fail-safe positions. Upon reactivation, the unit will return to

normal mode of operation.

e. Enthalpy sensors will compare outside and return air temperature and

humidity and determine which air steam is more economical for use.

f. Economizer Mode: Sequence outside/exhaust/return air dampers and power

exhauster to satisfy mixed air temperatures. Vary the associated exhaust fan

speed equal to the outside air intake.

g. Fans status are provided to the DDC system.

F. Condensing Units (for a split system)

1. The condensing units will operate according to the manufacturer’s controls to

control the staging, pressures, reheat, etc. The BMS will enable the condensing

unit on a call for cooling from the associated paired split system device.

G. Fans

1. Fans Control Scheme Summary:

a. EF-01 & -02: Pressurization Control.

b. All Remaining Exhaust Fans: Single speed exhaust fan control.

c. All Circulation Fans (CF): Circulation fan control.

2. Pressurization Control:

a. The fan shall be provided with a 0-10VDC input for ECM control. The fan

shall be provided with control down to 20% of the maximum balanced

airflow. Provide all field installed accessories as required to provide the

following basic programmable functions and intended operations.

b. Schedule: The BMS will interface with the fan through a DDC connection

that transmits system information (schedules Based, setpoints, etc.). The

occupied/unoccupied schedule shall be matched to the associated AHU.

c. Occupied:

1) The exhaust fan shall be coordinated with the paired AHU outside air

damper. As the outside air damper modulates open the exhaust fan

will ramp up the VFD to match exhaust airflow (as sensed by the

airflow measuring station) to the associated outdoor airflow. When the

outside airflow decreases the reverse shall occur.

d. Un-occupied:

1) The exhaust fan shall be de-energized, and the associated exhaust air

damper closed. If the paired AHU opens the outside air damper for

economizer mode, the fan shall energize and the VFD shall ramp up to

match the outside air.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 17 June 19, 2020

e. Air Flow, Measurement and Control:

1) Airflow Measuring: Flow measuring station, located at the exhaust fan

transmit volume signals to the DDC panel.

a) Air flow measuring stations associated with exhaust fan to be

flow-shaping bellmouth inlet type, or as approved by the fan

manufacturer.

f. Safeties: Refer to the applicable AHU sequence for safety requirements.

3. Single speed exhaust fan control: The exhaust fan shall energize and run

continuously when the building is in occupied mode. When the building is in

unoccupied mode the exhaust fan shall be de-energized.

4. Circulation Fan Control:

a. Multiple circulation fans within a common space shall be controlled as a

common zone group. Where spaces have dividers within the space (i.e.

gymnasiums), circulation fans shall be controlled per the divided areas, not a

single overall control for a divided space.

b. Occupancy control:

1) All spaces shall be controlled by the BMS via a seasonal (not daily)

occupancy schedule.

c. Setpoints:

1) Occupied Space Temperature Differential: 2 deg F (adj.)

d. Space temperature equalization:

1) The circulation fans shall run continuously in occupied mode.

2) Two temperature sensors shall be utilized to generate the temperature

differential. One will be located not less than 6-inches below the

circulation fan discharge nozzle installed height (within 6-inches of the

ceiling for recessed models). The other temperature sensor will be

located at the standard height above the floor as specified in this

Section.

3) The controller shall modulate the speed of the circulation fan motor to

maintain the occupied space temperature differential setpoint for

space.

4) The circulation fans shall be de-energized when in un-occupied mode.

e. Safeties:

1) Upon a loss of power, the fans will be disabled and all control devices

will return to their fail-safe positions. Upon reactivation, the fans will

return to normal mode of operation.

2) Fan status is provided to the DDC System.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 18 June 19, 2020

H. Cabinet Unit Heater:

1. Setpoints:

a. Occupied Space Heating Temperature: 70 deg F (adj).

b. Unoccupied Space Heating Temperature: 60 deg F (adj).

2. When the space temperature drops below setpoint the fan will energize and the

modulating 2-way hot water valve will open to maintain space temperature. When

temperature rises above setpoint, the reverse will occur. Sensor shall be located in

the return air stream. During the unoccupied mode the space will be maintain at a

reduced temperature. Valve shall fail in the last position.

a. Door contact override (where indicated): When the corresponding door

contact is open for longer than 5 minutes (adj.) the heating setpoint will be

reset to 55 deg F (adj.). When the door closes, the heating will return to

normal setpoints.

I. Unit Heaters:

1. Setpoints:

a. Occupied Space Heating Temperature: 70 deg F (adj).

b. Unoccupied Space Heating Temperature: 60 deg F (adj).

2. When the space temperature drops below setpoint the fan will energize and the

modulating 2-way hot water valve will open to maintain space temperature. When

temperature rises above setpoint, the reverse will occur. Sensor shall be located on

the wall. During the unoccupied mode the space will be maintain at a reduced

temperature. Valve shall fail in the last position.

J. Variable Air Volume Supply Terminal

1. Setpoints:

a. Occupied Cooling Temperature Setpoint: 74 deg F (adj.)

b. Occupied Heating Temperature Setpoint: 70 deg F (adj.)

c. Heating Limiting Temperature Setpoint: 85 deg F (adj.)

d. Heating Neutral Air Setpoint: 72 deg F (adj.)

e. Unoccupied Cooling Temperature Setpoint: 80 deg F (adj.)

f. Unoccupied Heating Temperature Setpoint: 60 deg F (adj.)

2. Air flow to vary by modulate damper and re-heat coil control valve in response to

space temperature setpoint.

3. Occupancy control:

a. All spaces shall be controlled by the BMS via an occupancy schedule.

b. Occupied/Unoccupied Mode Override: The room occupancy sensor will

contain a contact point for the ATC to override the building occupancy

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 19 June 19, 2020

setting. Provide all necessary wiring, relays, and components for a complete

and entire system.

1) When the room occupancy sensor detects occupancy during the

building unoccupied mode the unit ventilator will override the building

occupancy mode and switch to occupied mode.

a) When the room occupancy sensor detects no occupancy the unit

shall revert back to the building occupancy state.

2) When the room occupancy sensor detects no occupancy for more than

15 minutes (adj.) during the building occupied mode the unit ventilator

will override the building occupancy mode and switch to unoccupied

mode.

a) When the room occupancy sensor detects occupancy the unit

shall revert back to the building occupancy state.

4. Occupied Mode:

a. Cooling:

1) When the space temperature rises above the setpoint the damper shall

modulate open to maintain the space setpoint.


a) Door contact override (where indicated): When the

corresponding door contact is open for longer than 5 minutes

(adj.) the cooling setpoint will be reset to 90 deg F (adj.). When

the door closes, the cooling will return to normal setpoints.

b. Heating/Re-heat:

1) When the space temperature sensor falls below the setpoint the

damper modulates closed to minimum position.

2) If the space temperature sensor continues to fall when the damper is at

the minimum position the hot water reheat two-way control valve

modulates open to maintain the space setpoint.


a) Door contact override (where indicated): When the

corresponding door contact is open for longer than 5 minutes

(adj.) the heating setpoint will be reset to 55 deg F (adj.). When

the door closes, the heating will return to normal setpoints.

5. Unoccupied: The terminal box controller changes over to night mode and

maintains the night cooling at an increased temperature and night heating at a

reduced temperature.

6. Sensors not to include setpoint adjustment (+/-) or unoccupied override.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 20 June 19, 2020

K. Standalone HVAC systems not incorporated into the DDC system. The following control

sequences shall be provided using electric or electronic controls. Control devices

supplied by equipment manufacturer shall be mounted by HVAC Contractor:

1. Ductless Split AC systems (DS & associated CU): The ductless split system will

operate under its operating and safety controls.

a. Cooling: When the space temperature rises above manufacturer's

programmable space thermostat setpoint of 75 deg F (adj.) the evaporator fan

and condensing unit shall energize. When temperature drops below

setpoint, the reverse will occur.

b. Heating: When the space temperature falls below the manufacturer's


and condensing unit shall energize. When temperature rises above setpoint,

the reverse will occur.

c. Upon failure of the condensing unit an alarm shall be sent to the front-end.

d. Space temperature status shall be visible at the front end.

2. Cooling Coil Condensate Pumps (CCP): The cooling coil condensate pumps will

operate under its operating and safety controls.

a. The pump will energize and run continuously when the float switch reaches

the high limit. When the float switch reaches low limit the pump shall be de-

energized. Upon pump failure an alarm shall be sent to the front-end.

L. Miscellaneous:

1. Provide global OA temperature sensor on the north face of the building.

2. Provide global OA humidity sensor on the north face of the building.

3. Provide a space temperature sensor for monitoring the temperature in the following

room: Ductless Split Rooms. When the space exceeds 90 deg F (adj.) send an

alarm to the front-end.

4. Condensing Units: Send alarm for unit general alarm.

5. Duct Smoke Detectors: Send an alarm to the front-end and provide capability to

shut down associated HVAC systems.

1.8 I/O SCHEDULE

A. System I/O Schedule - Specialist is responsible to review the plans and specification in

their entirety to determine the final quantity of control devices and I/O points to provide

operational systems of the specified equipment for their intended use.

SYSTEM I/O SCHEDULE Inputs Outputs Interlock Alarms POINT DESCRIPTION AI BI AO BO Hardwire Hi Low State Heating Water Loops

Supply Water Temperature X

Return Water Temperature X

Heating Water Flow Rate (gpm) X

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 21 June 19, 2020

SYSTEM I/O SCHEDULE Inputs Outputs Interlock Alarms POINT DESCRIPTION AI BI AO BO Hardwire Hi Low State Boilers (B)

LWT Temperature X

Remote Start/Stop X

Return Water Temperature X

Low Water Alarm X X

Gas Failure X X

Flame Failure X X

Boiler Status X X

Circulator Pump Status X X

Circulator Pump Start/Stop X

BMS Interface As required to facilitate sequences

Pumps (P)

Heating Water Pumps

Status X

VFD Enable X

VFD Alarm X

VFD Control As required to facilitate sequences

Differential Transmitter X

Air Handling Units (AHU)

VAV

Unit Status X X

Start/Stop X

Supply Fan Status X

VFD Supply Fan Control X

OA/RA Damper w/ES X X

Duct Smoke Detector (where

required) X X X

Supply Air Flow X

Outside Air Flow X

SA Temperature X

RA Temp X

RA Humidity X

Mixed Air Temp X

SA High Static Pressure Cutout X X

SA Duct Static Pressure X

RA Low Static Pressure Cutout X X

RA Static Pressure X

Polled Space Occupancy Sensors X

Single Zone VAV

Supply Fan Status X

Start/Stop X

OA Damper w/ES X X

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 22 June 19, 2020

SYSTEM I/O SCHEDULE Inputs Outputs Interlock Alarms POINT DESCRIPTION AI BI AO BO Hardwire Hi Low State RA Damper w/ES X X

HW 2-Way Control Valve X

Smoke Detectors (where

required) X X X

Supply Air Flow (cfm) X

Outside Air Flow (cfm) X

Freezestat X X

SA Temperature X

RA Temp X

RA Humidity X

Mixed Air Temp X

Space Temperature X

Space Humidity X

SA High Static Pressure Cutout X X

RA Low Static Pressure Cutout X X X

CO2 (where indicated) X

Condensing Units (CU) – non ductless split

Enable/Disable X

General Alarm X

Fans

Pressurization (EF):

Start/Stop X

Exhaust Fan Status X X

Exhaust Air Flow (cfm) X

Variable Exhaust Control As required to facilitate sequences

Single Speed Exhaust (EF):

Start/Stop X

Status X X

Circulation Fans (CF):

Start/Stop X X

Status X

Multispeed Controller X

Space Temperature (high location

and low location) X

Space Temperature Differential X

Cabinet Unit Heaters (CUH)

RA Sensor X

HW Control Valve X

Start/Stop X

Status X X

Door Contact X

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 23 June 19, 2020

SYSTEM I/O SCHEDULE Inputs Outputs Interlock Alarms POINT DESCRIPTION AI BI AO BO Hardwire Hi Low State Unit Heaters (UH)

RA Sensor X

HW Control Valve X

Start/Stop X

Status X X

Variable Air Volume (VAV)

Space Temperature X

Supply Air Volume (CFM) X

Damper Actuator X

Reheat Control Valve X

Occupancy Sensor X

Door Contact X

Miscellaneous

Global OA Temperature X

Global OA Humidity X

Space Temperature Monitor X

Ductless Split Condensing Unit

Status X X

Cooling Coil Condensate Pump

Alarm Signal X

Duct Smoke Detectors (Shutdown

corresponding HVAC equip) X X X


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.

B. Product Data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical

Product Data for each control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities,

performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of materials, installation

instructions, and startup instructions, including third party equipment data.

C. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection. Submit damper leakage

and flow characteristics, plus size schedule for controlled dampers. Control valve

schedule to identify flow characteristics.

D. Shop Drawings containing the following information for each control system:

1. CAD developed schematic flow diagram showing fans, AHU’s, VAV boxes, cabinet

unit heaters, coils, dampers, valves, control devices, etc. (BMS software developed

drawings will not be accepted).

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 24 June 19, 2020

2. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

3. Diagrams for all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between factory-

installed and field-installed wiring.

4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

5. Written description of sequence of operation.

6. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk

data conductors.

7. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input

device.

8. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated)

point addresses, and operator notations.

9. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies,

diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

10. Software description and sequence of operation.

11. Building wiring diagram including panel locations and connection to bus line.

12. Bill of materials.

13. Provide panel layout including controllers, electronic devices and unused I/O’s.

Include panel dimensions.

14. Provide bus (network) wiring riser diagrams.

15. Provide controller terminal diagrams, points, point names and field device

connections, field device points, and field device names. Label and color code

wiring connections.

16. Details of third party compatible devices including wiring diagrams, integrators and

devices.

E. Submittal shall consist of:

1. System architecture showing all digital devices.

2. Equipment lists of all proposed devices and equipment including data sheets of all

products, including third party equipment.

3. Valve, damper, and well and tap schedules showing size, configuration, capacity

and location of all equipment.

4. Wiring and piping interconnection diagrams including panel and device power and

sources, including third party diagrams, with terminal point designation for each

wire connection.

F. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems and

differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

G. Samples of each type of furnished thermostat/sensor cover according to requirements of

Division 01.

H. Maintenance data for control systems equipment to include in the operation and

maintenance manual. Include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts lists for each type of control device and

compressed-air stations (if required).

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components

and devices.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 25 June 19, 2020

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator

function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and

calibration tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.

I. Field Test Reports: Procedure and certification of the control system, communication

wiring, sensor wiring, and all bus wiring.

J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including

control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual

installation and operating sequences, including all third party vendor information.

Provide all BMS files developed specifically for installed system such as graphics, control

programming and network communications.

K. Software Manuals: The software manual shall describe programming and testing, starting

with a system overview and proceeding to a detailed description of each software feature.

The manual shall instruct the user on programming or re-programming any portions of

the BMS. This shall include all control programs, algorithms, mathematical equations,

variables, set points, time periods, messages, and other information necessary to load,

alter, test and execute the system. The manual shall include:

1. Complete description of programming language, including commands, editing and

writing control programs, algorithms, printouts and logs, mathematical calculations

and passwords.

2. Instructions on modifying any control algorithm or parameter, verifying errors,

status, changing passwords and initiating or disabling control programs.

L. Software Documentation: All software programs shall be easily referenced from

summary sheets which compare control programs with pertinent information about

hardware and wiring information in the field. Documentation shall include:

1. Complete point identification, including terminal number, symbol, engineering

units and control program reference number.

2. Field information including location, device, device type and function, electrical

parameters and installation drawing number.

3. Location identification BMS control hardware.

M. Software: Upon successful completion of the operational acceptance test, provide a

medium, and hardware for bulk storage of the accepted versions and an untranslated (not

complied) copy of the program database.

N. Commissioning Summary Forms: Provide data summary forms to be approved by the

Engineer to define the following information for inclusion into the BMS for each point in

the system by the ATC Specialist:

1. Description of each piece of equipment and the functions to be controlled.

2. For each BMS function, a listing of digital and/or analog hardware required to

interface the BMS to the equipment.

3. Listing of all digital and analog alarms.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 26 June 19, 2020

4. Listing of all BMS application programs associated with each piece of equipment.

This listing shall include all control algorithms and mathematical equations. The

listing shall be in easy to understand English format.

O. All application programs must be submitted. No unauthorized BMS manufacturers

proprietary control front-ends will be accepted.

P. BMS Manufacturer authorized Contractors must submit letter or contract from specified manufacturer indicating authorization from contracting firm to procure, install and service specified manufacturer’s equipment.

Q. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and systems.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For DDC system to include in emergency, operation

and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in applicable Division 01 sections include the

following:

a. Project Record Drawings of as-built versions of submittal Shop Drawings

provided in electronic PDF format.

b. Testing and commissioning reports and checklists of completed final versions

of reports, checklists, and trend logs.

c. As-built versions of submittal Product Data.

d. Names, addresses, e-mail addresses and 24-hour telephone numbers of

Installer and service representatives for DDC system and products.

e. Operator's manual with procedures for operating control systems including

logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending data,

overriding computer control and changing set points and variables.

f. Programming manuals with description of programming language and

syntax, of statements for algorithms and calculations used, of point database

creation and modification, of program creation and modification, and of

editor use.

g. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manuals that explain how to:

1) Design and install new points, panels, and other hardware.

2) Perform preventive maintenance and calibration.

3) Debug hardware problems.

4) Repair or replace hardware.

h. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming language

including set points, tuning parameters, and object database.

i. Backup copy of graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media

such as DVDs.

j. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 27 June 19, 2020

k. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance

information for furnished third-party hardware including computer

equipment and sensors.

l. Complete original-issue copies of furnished software, including operating

systems, custom programming language, operator workstation software, and

graphics software.

m. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents.

n. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for system components,

including schedule of tasks such as inspection, cleaning, and calibration;

time between tasks; and task descriptions.

o. Owner training materials.


A. Prime Contractor Qualifications: Engage an experienced specialist specializing in direct

digital control system installations. Specialist shall be certified in writing by BMS

manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing control

systems similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-

service performance.

C. The complete BMS installation shall be in strict accordance to the national and local

electrical codes and the electrical section of these specifications. All devices designed

for or used in line voltage applications shall be UL listed. All microprocessor based

remote and central devices connection onto the primary bus (including link devices) shall

be UL864 Listed.

D. Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below rated

voltage and at 3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short

circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected

against incorrect wiring, static transients lightning strikes, and induced magnetic

interference. All bus connected devices shall be a.c. coupled, or equivalent so that any

single device failure will not disrupt or halt bus communication. Surge suppression and

isolations devices shall be provided.

E. Startup Personnel Qualifications: Engage specially trained personnel in direct employ of

manufacturer of primary temperature control system. Personnel shall be capable of

administering training, system diagnostics, and trouble shooting.

F. Comply with NFPA 90A.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.

H. Coordinate equipment selection with applicable Division 26 Sections to achieve

compatibility with equipment that interfaces with the fire alarm system.

I. All wiring between controller and sensors and control devices including any power

wiring of devices and necessary conduit shall be provided under this section of the

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 28 June 19, 2020

specification. All control and power wiring which is provided under this section of the

specification shall be in accordance with requirements set forth in the National Electrical

Code (NEC) latest edition.

1.12 CONDITIONS:

A. Bids by Wholesalers, Contractors, Franchised Dealers or any firm whose principal

business is not that of installing automatic temperature control systems shall not be

acceptable.

B. The system shall be engineered, programmed, and installed by personnel trained and

regularly employed by the BMS manufacturer, or certified contractors.

C. Manufacturer and specialist shall have an in-place support facility within 100 miles of the

site with technical staff, spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic

equipment.


A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

B. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices to

unit manufacturer and in factory testing of components installed in designated

equipment.

1.14 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with

plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator

workstation.

C. Coordinate equipment with applicable Division 26 Sections to achieve compatibility with

starter coils and annunciation devices for panelboards.

D. Coordinate equipment with applicable Division 26 Sections to achieve compatibility with

motor starters and annunciation devices.

1.15 WARRANTY

A. Warrant labor and materials for specified control system free from defects for a period of

12 months after project substantial completion. Control system failures during warranty

period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in

service to Owner. Respond during normal business hours within 24 hours of Owner’s

warranty service request.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 29 June 19, 2020

B. Work shall have a single warranty date, even if Owner received beneficial use due to

early system start-up. If specified work is split into multiple contracts or a multi-phase

contract, each contract or phase shall have a separate warranty start date and period.

C. Provide an extended service contract beyond first year warranty period if so desired by

Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers/Authorized Installer:

1. Honeywell (Basis of Design).

2. Johnson Controls.

3. Schneider Electric.

B. Building Management System and Components

1. Honeywell: WEBs-N4 BACnet system (Basis of Design).

2. Johnson Controls: Facility Explorer (BACnet) Control System.

3. Schneider Electric: SmartStruxure (BACnet) Control System.

C. Authorized ATC Provider:

1. Honeywell: Authorized Control Integrator (ACI) Contractor.

2. Johnson Controls: Authorized Building Controls Specialist (ABCS) Contractor.

3. Schneider Electric: Authorized Contractor/Dealer.

D. Building Management System Architecture:

1. The BMS system architecture will be BACnet top to bottom with a web base

server/controller.

2. Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers

shall comprise a BACnet internetwork. Controller and operator interface

communication shall conform to ASHRAE/ANSI Standard BACnet.

3. Web server and controllers shall communicate using BACnet protocol. Web server

network backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data

Link/Physical layer protocol and BACnet/IP addressing as specified in ASHRAE/

ANSI 135-2003, BACnet Annex J. Provide data drop for IT/internet access.

4. The network shall be based on a PC industry standard of Ethernet TCP/IP. Where

used, LAN controller cards shall be standard “off the shelf” products available

through normal PC vendor channels. All controllers on the BMS shall

communicate via BACnet MS/TP protocol. The BMS shall network multiple user

interface clients, universal network controllers, system controllers and application-

specific controllers.

5. Access to system shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the

building management system. The hardware configuration of the BMS shall be

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 30 June 19, 2020

totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control network

programs from either over the IT LAN or remote access.

6. Controller/panels to be wired to the server and the server to be connected to IT

LAN for remote access. Provide an Ethernet drop for connection to School

District’s IT LAN at each school.

7. Controller/panels to be wired to the master CPU serve and connected to IT LAN for

front-end access. Provide an Ethernet drop for connection to IT LAN, BMS

programming and provide technical support for setup and interface with the IT

LAN. The Owner will provide a fixed IP Address, Domain and IT LAN system

programming to facilitate BMS access through the LAN/Firewall to the WAN for

remote access.

8. Graphics will be developed using the manufacturer’s graphics software.

Coordinate graphics with the Owner.

9. BMS is to be a full open system for modification and upgrades, and is the licensed

Institution with all password knowledge.

10. Provide gateway interface in appropriate protocol as required.

11. Provide LCD access at the master panels (2).

12. Provide pump variable frequency drives that are fully functional with installed

control system.

13. Building controls to be tied into front-end.

2.2 DDC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Microprocessor-based monitoring and control including analog/digital conversion and

program logic. A control loop or subsystem in which digital and analog information is

received and processed by a microprocessor, and digital control signals are generated

based on control algorithms and transmitted to field devices to achieve a set of

predefined conditions.

1. DDC system shall consist of a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of distributed DDC

controllers, other network devices, operator interfaces, and software.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in


application.

2.3 CONTROLLER HARDWARE

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall integrate multiple building functions

including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management

and historical data collection.

B. The system shall be a modular distributed control system. Expansion in capacity and

functionality shall be provided through the addition of sensors, actuators, standalone

DDC panels and operator devices.

C. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm

reporting and control execution. Each DDC panel/controller shall operate independently

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 31 June 19, 2020

by performing its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical

data collection functions. The failure of any single component or network connection

(including a wire break) shall not interrupt the execution of any control strategy,

reporting, alarming and trending function, or any function at any operator interface

device.

D. Network Control Units shall be highest available capacity with a minimum 32-bit

microprocessor based within panel operating system. DDC programs and data files shall

be non-volatile memory or flash memory to allow simple and reliable additions and

changes. Each unit shall have an on-board 30-day battery backed real-time clock. Unit(s)

shall be provided where shown or specified with capacity to accommodate input/output

(I/O) points required for the application. Each panel shall be provided with a socket for a

Portable Network Terminal, and a port for network communications. Units outputs shall

be binary for On-Off control, and true variable voltage (0-10v) for driving analog or

pneumatic transducer devices. Analog outputs shall have a minimum incremental

resolution of one percent of the operating range of the controlled device. Units shall have

LEDs for continuous indication of all bus communications, power, and operational status.

All panel electronics and associated equipment shall be installed in suitable enclosures.

E. DEC (Digital Electronic Controllers) control modules or unit specific DDC controllers

shall be UL916 standalone digital based configured to perform the sequences specified,

and with I/O selected for the application. Controller enclosures shall be compact plastic

conforming to UL94-5V or plated steel. Each device shall be provided with LED type

annunciation to continually display its operational mode; power, normal, or in an alarm

state.

F. Network terminal shall be provided for mounting in network control panel.

G. System integrator shall monitor and control all third party equipment. HVAC Contractor

and ATC Specialist shall coordinate all devices and determine unit mounted third party

items vs. field installed devices

2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE

A. Control Software:

1. Time Programs: Each control unit shall contain up to 20 unique user modifiable

time programs (TP). Each TP shall consist of daily, weekly, and annual programs

plus a "TODAY" temporary function. DAILY programs shall be definable for day

types such as working day, half day, holiday, weekend, etc. Each daily program

shall allow a list of time based (or optimum time based) analog and digital

commands to be issued to user selected plant elements and points. WEEKLY

programs shall allow a user selected set of daily programs to be defined for each

day of the week (Monday through Sunday). The ANNUAL program shall initially be

an automatic compilation of 52 weekly programs. Selecting a date of the ANNUAL

program shall allow modification of the daily selection entered into the weekly

program (such as changing Dec. 25 from a working day to a holiday).

2. Control Application Software shall be customized to meet the detailed

requirements of the "Sequence of Operation". Control units, control modules and

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 32 June 19, 2020

unit specific controllers network management devices shall be programmable. All

BMS control software shall be designed via a graphic programming facility, the

flow chart output of which shall be provided as system documentation.

3. In addition to Proportional, Proportional-Plus-Integral (PI), and Proportional-Plus-

Integral-Plus-Derivative (PID) algorithms, an HVAC enhanced PID (EPID) algorithm

shall be provided and implemented where specified. The EPID shall be a full PID,

but modified and/or appended to perform as follows:

a. The user shall be allowed to specify a start output value to which subsequent

corrective signals are added. For example, a variable speed pump may be

specified to start at 20% to assure a timely proof-of-operation signal to result

without false failure-to-respond alarms being issued during slow startups; or a

discharge air EPID loop may be specified to start at 33% (at which point the

heating and cooling valves and the outside air damper are all closed) and

enter into control without overshoot or undershoot.

b. The user shall be allowed to specify a start-up ramp duration of 1 to 300

seconds, during which time the error (EPID set point minus EPID input) varies

from 0 to the actual value, thus allowing gradual and direct assumption of

control with no hunting, overshoot, or undershoot. Ramping of the PID

output (which will cause integral wind-up) is not allowed.

c. The EPID shall be provided with a limit signal port such that the connection

of an external limit signal (such as providing a fan discharge pressure high

limit signal into a VAV duct static pressure control EPID) allows the limit

signal to override the EPID without integral windup occurring during the

limit-control period.

B. Management Software:

1. Trending: In addition to supporting temperature and humidity trending specified

elsewhere, each network control unit shall be provided with a trend archive of at

least the last 8000 events (digital transitions or analog value changes) of any user

selected group of up to 50 points. A stored event shall include date and time, and

value or status. Events occurring in excess of 8000 shall overwrite the oldest

events.

2. Alarms: BMS shall monitor and report all analog input points and specified digital

points for off-normal conditions. Each alarm shall have an "alarm delay" attribute

which shall determine how long (in seconds) a point must be off-normal prior to

being considered in an alarm state.

3. DEC Support: Network control units and devices managing sub-networks of DECs

shall report DEC alarms and shall be programmed to perform data reduction,

sorting, and optimizing routines.

2.5 SOFTWARE

A. Software shall be configured to meet the requirements of the "Sequence of Operation"

specified and shall be field reconfigurable. Software shall support full PID control, and

shall utilize separate PID gains for heating and cooling. Where space sensors are

provided with temperature set point knobs, DDC controllers shall be provided with

unique software set point limits. Each controller shall have continuously running

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 33 June 19, 2020

hardware diagnostics to detect malfunctions of the flow sensor, the temperature sensor,

the remote set point sensor, and the A to D converter.

B. Controllers shall have preconfigured air flow calibration software to assist the test and

balance (TAB) specialist in final calibrations. Using the DEC contractors calibration tool,

the TAB Specialist shall be provided with a display allowing a simple command entry to

place the DEC in zero, minimum, and maximum CFM control modes. At each mode, a

display field shall be provided for the T&B Specialist to enter the actual measured value

in CFM. Upon completion of entering the three values, the DEC shall automatically

recalibrate based upon the actual values

2.6 WORKSTATION

A. Provide one workstation per facility.

B. One (1) PC-Based, Pentium microprocessor (control manufacturer approved, including

operating system), Windows 10 Pro Operating System (control manufacturer approved),

Operator Workstation, shall be provided and located as directed by Owner. Provide all

necessary cabling, etc. to Owner approved location. Workstation shall be provided with

a printer, modem, and UPS/power conditioner. All the necessary cables, paper supplies,

interface cards, power strips, CD +/- RW, DVD +/- RW, monitor, disk holders, and disks

shall be provided. A computer table/workstation unit shall be provided to house and

support all the workstation equipment.

1. Provide one (1) PC-Based, Core i7 microprocessor and Windows 10 Operating

System (control manufacturer approved), Operator Workstation, shall be provided

and located as directed by Owner. Provide all necessary cabling, etc. to Owner

approved location. Provide all the necessary cables, interface cards, power strips,

DVD +/- RW, monitor, and software.

2. Computer workstations shall be recognizable manufacturer. Systems shall utilize

industry standard components and system configurations. Custom built computers

are not acceptable.

3. The operator's workstation shall be an assemblage of peripherals, hardware and

software to serve as a supervisory operator interface for monitoring and controlling

the system.

4. Workstation shall consist of a color monitor, full tower case personal computer

with minimum 12 GB PC3-12800 DDR3 SDRAM, 2 TB hard drive (7,200 rpm),

read/write DVD, Intel HD graphics, 4600 mouse 100 MHZ enthernet card, 4 USB

4.0 and 101-key enhanced keyboard. Personal computer shall be an IBM

compatible and shall include a minimum i7 core, 3GHZ processor speed, 6 MB

cache.

5. The primary display terminal provided for system shall be a LED flat screen,

twenty-one inches (21") and a minimum display resolution of no less than 1920 x

1080 pixels, 16:9 aspect ratio, 60HZ, 1000:1 static and 5,000,000:1 dynamic.

Separate controls shall be provided for color, contrasts and brightness. The screen

shall be non-reflective.

6. The computer shall come pre-installed with individual licensed BMS software,

system graphics, Windows 10 or version compatible with BMS software Internet

software, browser, peripheral software, and all necessary software for in-house

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 34 June 19, 2020

access and operation. Workstations shall come pre-installed with latest version of

Excel for Windows.

7. Workstation to be located as requested by Owner. Provide necessary wiring and

controller appurtenances to facilitate.

C. Workstations shall include pre-installed software per the licensing agreements of

manufacturers. Original registered software and manuals shall be submitted to the

Owner.

2.7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS

A. All network control unit and DEC network management devices shall be interconnected

and tied into the communications network. DECs shall also be connected together via

secondary networks managed by network management devices to provide data

concentration and parallel processing such that system expansion does not noticeably

affect system response. All communications shall be via three wire, shielded where

required, RS-485. DDC microprocessor failures shall not cause loss of communications

of the remainder of any network. All networks shall support sensor sharing, global

application programs, and bus-to-bus communications in a true peer-to-peer token

passing manner.

B. For reliability, maintainability, and performance communication busses shall be

extendible to 4000 feet without active links, hubs, or repeaters.

C. DECs shall be managed by network management devices to provide alarm detection and

reporting, data sharing, trending, and response to data requests and commands.

2.8 COLLECTION AND ANALYSIS OF HISTORICAL DATA

A. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of

system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may be trended

automatically at time-based intervals or changes of value, both of which shall be user-

definable. Trend data must be automatically stored on hard disk for future diagnostics

and reporting.

B. Trend data report graphics shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point

data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre-defined groups of at

least 6 points. Provide additional functionality to allow any trended data to be transferred

easily to an off-the-shelf spreadsheet package such as Excel. This shall allow the user to

perform custom calculations such as energy usage, equipment efficiency and energy

costs and shall allow for generation of these reports on high-quality plots, graphs and

charts.

C. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view trended data on trend graph

displays. Displays shall be actual plots of both static and/or real-time dynamic point

data. A minimum of 4 points may be viewed simultaneously on a single graph, with

color selection and line type for each points being user-definable. Displays shall include

an ‘X’ axis indicating elapsed time and a ‘Y’ axis indicating a range scale in engineering

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 35 June 19, 2020

units for each point. The ‘Y’ axis shall have the ability to be manually or automatically

scaled at the user’s option. Different ranges for each point may be used with minimum

and maximum values listed at the bottom and top of the ‘Y’ axis. All ‘Y’ axis data shall

be color-coded to match the line color for the corresponding point.

1. Static graphs shall represent actual point data that has been trended and stored on

disk. Exact point values may be viewed on a data window by pointing or scrolling

to the place of interest along the graph. Provide capability to print any graph on

the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.

2. Dynamic graphs shall represent real-time point data. Any point or group of points

may be graphed, regardless of whether they have been predefined for trending.

The graphs shall continuously update point values. At any time the user may

redefine sampling times or range scales for any point. In addition, the user may

pause the graph and take “snapshots” of screens to be stored on the workstation

disk for future recall and analysis. As with static graphs, exact point values may be

viewed and the graphs may be printed.

2.9 DYNAMIC COLOR GRAPHIC DISPLAYS

A. Color graphic floor plan displays and system schematics for each piece of mechanical

equipment. Provide optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition

as required by the Owner and this specification.

B. The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor

plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection or text-based commands.

C. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values and status indication shall be

shown in their actual respective locations and shall automatically update to represent

current conditions without operator intervention.

D. The windowing environment of the PC operator workstation shall allow the user to

simultaneously view several graphics at a time to analyze total building operation or to

allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to be viewed without interrupting

work in progress.

E. Provide a dynamic display of the site specific BMS architecture indicating the status of all

controllers, PC workstations and networks.

2.10 ELECTRIC AND MECHANICAL DEVICES

A. Provide Building Controllers (BC), Advanced Application Controllers (AAC), Application

Specific Controllers (ASC), Smart Actuators (SA), and Smart Sensors (SS) as required to

achieve performance specified Article System Performance. Every device in the system

which executes control logic and directly controls HVAC equipment must conform to a

standard BACnet Device Profile as specified in ASHRAE/ANSI 135-2003, BACnet Annex

L. Unless otherwise specified, hardwired actuators and sensors may be used in lieu of

BACnet Smart Actuators and Smart Sensors.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 36 June 19, 2020

B. All electric switch devices shall be selected for the applied load and UL listed for the

application. Miscellaneous, electric, pneumatic, and mechanical devices shall include:

1. Automatic control valves 2 1/2 " and smaller shall be screwed type, and valves 3"

and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures

and temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring

loaded Teflon packaging with replaceable discs.

a. All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with equal-

percentage contoured throttling plugs. Valves shall be sized for a pressure

drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 4 psi.

b. Unitary valves shall be straight-through type as specified in the sequence of

operation. Stems shall be polished stainless-steel and packing shall be

ethylene-propylene suitable for both chilled water service. Pressure ratings

shall be as required for the intended service.

C. All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise elsewhere, shall be

provided with electric actuators sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient

reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and tight

close-off.

D. Transformers: Provide step-down control transformers where required to power controls.

Control transformers shall be sized such that 80% of the rated capacity equals the

connected load.

2.11 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth

modulating action or 2-position action.

1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring

mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit

switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger than 2-1/2 Inches: Size for running

torque of 150 inch-pounds and breakaway torque of 300 inch-pounds.

3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger than 2-1/2 Inches: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 inch-pounds.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 sq. ft.: Size for running

torque of 150 inch-pounds and breakaway torque of 300 inch-pounds.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger than 25 sq. ft.: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 inch-pounds.

2.12 DATA INPUTS AND OUTPUTS

A. Input/output sensors and devices shall be closely matched to the requirements of the

remote panel for accurate, responsive, noise-free signal input/output. Control input

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 37 June 19, 2020

response shall be high sensitivity and matched to the loop gain requirements for precise

and responsive control.

B. Temperature sensors shall be thermistor type of 10,000 ohm at 77deg F, equal to PreCon

Type III. Sensors shall have + or - 0.36 deg F accuracy between 32deg F and 158 deg F.

1. DEC space temperature sensors shall be provided with blank commercial type

locking covers with the following features:

a. Sensors shall be provided with plug-in port to respective network for software

maintenance and/or reconfiguration. Each part to be wired for

communication. Plastic used on subbase or housing shall be UL94-5V rated.

b. Do not included override switch to initiate change from unoccupied to

occupied mode.

c. Do not include setpoint adjustment by occupant limited by programmable

range +/- setting (do not provide temperature gradients, provide tick marks),

unless otherwise noted.

d. Do not provide LED display, unless otherwise noted.

e. Space sensors to be sensor type only where adjustments are made through

front-end, unless otherwise noted.

f. Space temperature adjustments and displays shall be provided for the

following locations and systems:

1) Classrooms

2) Spaces which are served by VAV boxes

3) Spaces which are unit ventilators.

2. Duct temperature sensors shall be rigid stem or averaging type as specified in the

sequence of operation. Water sensors shall be provided with a separable copper,

monel or stainless-steel well.

3. Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

C. Current sensing relays used for proof-of-loading for fans and pumps shall be suitable for 2

to 200 amperes and shall have adjustable trip thresholds of plus or minus two percent of

range. Each relay shall be provided with an LED to allow ready observation of the relay

status.

D. All Inputs and Outputs (including I/O Summary) shall be displayed and commandable

from all workstations, including all off-site PC computers.

E. Provide field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitter as indicated on the plans.

Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20 mA DC signal indicative of process variable to the

pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel

wetted parts with two 0.25" male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against

radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical enclosure

capable of withstanding 2000 PSI static pressure with a 0.5" NPT conduit connection.

Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full span.

F. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 38 June 19, 2020

1. Duct and room sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-80%.

2. Duct sensors shall have a sampling chamber.

3. Outdoor air humidity sensors shall have a sensing range of 20%-95% RH and shall

be suitable for ambient conditions of 40 deg F -170 deg F.

4. Humidity sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale annually.

G. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input,

temperature compensated.

1. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

2. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

3. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg.

4. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg.

H. All Inputs and Outputs (including I/O Summary) shall be displayed and commandable

from all workstations, including off-site PC computers.

I. Relays:

1. Control Relays: Control relays shall be plug-in type, UL listed, and shall have dust

cover and LED “energized” indicator. Contact rating, configuration, and coil

voltage shall be suitable for application.

2. Time Delay Relays. Time delay relays shall be solid-state plug-in type, UL listed,

and shall have adjustable time delay. Delay shall be adjustable +/-100% from

setpoint shown. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage shall be suitable for

application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure for relays not installed in local control

panel.

J. Current Transformer:

1. AC current transformer shall be UL/CSA recognized and shall be completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.

2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected for

+/-1% accuracy at 5 A full-scale output.

3. Use fixed-core transformers for new wiring installation.

K. Voltage Transmitters:

1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single-loop (two-wire) type, 4-20 mA

output with zero and span adjustment.

2. Adjustable full-scale unit ranges shall be 100-130 Vac, 200-250 Vac, 25-330 Vac,

and 400-600 Vac. Unit accuracy shall be +/-1% full-scale at 500 ohm maximum

burden.

3. Transmitters shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA recognized at 600 Vac rating.

L. Voltage Transformers:

1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA recognized, 600 Vac rated, and shall

have built-in fuse protection.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 39 June 19, 2020

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 40 deg F - 130 deg F

and shall provide +/-0.5% accuracy at 24 Vac and 5 VA load.

3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or plastic.

M. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared

sensors; suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2

percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting.

N. Occupancy Sensors: Occupancy sensors shall be dual-technology (ultrasonic and passive

infrared) wall mounted sensors, equal to Leviton OSW series. Sensor to include

minimum 110-degree field of view for corner installation, UL Listed, with 24 VAC power

and adjustable time delays (set for 15 minutes). Sensor shall be selected for applicable

square footage (1000 sf standard). Coordinate final square footage with field conditions.

2.13 CONTROL PANELS

A. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting,

located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all

panels.

1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch-thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum

alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock, with manufacturer's

standard shop-painted finish and color.

2. Panel-Mounted Equipment: Temperature relays, and automatic switches; except

safety devices.

3. Provide clear plastic pocket bonded to door and copies of as-built control

diagrams, wiring diagrams, and sequences of operation enclosed inside pocket

2.14 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER

A. Battery Backup: The BMS panels shall include lithium batteries to prevent memory loss

and provide soft boot to restart system.

B. The battery shall be able to support all memory within the field panel if the commercial

power to the field panel is interrupted.

C. Power Failure and Automatic Restart:

1. Power Failures: Upon failure of power, the internal clock, of the BMS shall

continue to operate on battery backup.

2. Power Failure Recovery: Upon restoration of power, the BMS shall automatically

and without human intervention:

a. Reboot and reinstall BMS program.

b. Update all monitored functions.

c. Resume operation based on current time and status.

d. Implement special building start-up strategies as required.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 40 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. The BMS shall be designed, installed, and commissioned in a turnkey operational

manner; including all labor not noted in Work by Others paragraph of PART I of this

section of these specifications, and not noted in other sections of these specifications.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator

workstation. Verify that field end devices, wiring, and communication network are

installed before proceeding with installation. Proceed with installation only after

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 DATA CONTROL (D/C) AND GRAPHICS SUMMARY

A. All hardware, custom software, application software, graphics, etc., necessary to

accomplish the control sequences and display the graphics specified shall be provided as

part of this contract. Provide all controllers, inputs, outputs, valves, dampers, actuators

and flow meters required to provide the control and graphic data described. Provide

software set points required for display in logical groups and graphics.

B. Each digital output shall have a software-associated monitored input. Any time the

monitored input does not track it's associated command output within a programmable

time interval, a "command failed" alarm shall be reported.

C. Where calculated points (such as CFM) are shown, they shall appear in their respective

logical groups.

D. Unless otherwise specified or approved prior to bidding, the primary analog input and

the analog output of each DDC loop shall be resident in a single remote panel containing

the DDC algorithm and shall function independent of any primary or DEC

communication links. Secondary (reset type) analog inputs may be received from the

primary network, but approved default values and/or procedures shall be substituted in

the DDC algorithm for this secondary input if network communications fail or if the

secondary input becomes erroneous or invalid.

E. In addition to Graphics of building systems with dynamic data points as noted in the

following Data and Control and Graphic Summary, the following additional graphics

shall be provided:

1. Hot Water Distribution Systems with Temperatures and Flows.

2. Pumps.

3. Boilers.

4. Chillers

5. Cooling Towers.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 41 June 19, 2020

6. Air handling equipment (AHU, RTU, DOAS).

7. Classroom Unit Ventilators.

8. VAV boxes.

9. Condensing Units.

10. Exhaust Fans.

11. Cabinet Unit Heaters

12. Alarmed and Monitored Equipment.

13. Building graphic including one-touch to system graphic access and exit control.

One-touch seamless automatic dial-out sequence for remote building BMS access

with exit to main screen.

14. Provide text file library to electronically store HVAC, etc. written sequences of

operation.

15. Each HVAC graphics display screen shall include a hot key to access the associated

systems written sequence of operation, wiring diagrams and control diagrams.

F. The graphics shall be displayed on workstations.

3.4 DATA ENTRY

A. Perform all data entry into the Building Management System, in consultation with the

Owner. The following data shall be reviewed with the Owner and specific information

developed as a prerequisite to data entry.

1. Occupancy Schedules.

2. Alarm Limits (high, low and critical).

3. All temperature setpoints for occupied and unoccupied times.

4. Passwords and priority levels.

5. Alarm and maintenance messages.

6. All input and output point names and symbols, including specific names indicated

in this specification section.

B. As needed, changes in the programming shall be performed by the Specialist using dial-

up telephone access.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. All wiring shall be properly supported and run in a neat and workmanlike manner. All

wiring exposed and in equipment rooms shall run parallel to or at right angles to the

building structure. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to

prevent obstruction to devices and terminals. All wiring shall be in accordance with all

local and national codes. All line voltage wiring, all wiring exposed, and all wiring in

equipment rooms shall be installed in conduit in accordance to the electrical

specifications. All electronic wiring shall be #18 AWG minimum THHN and shielded if

required, except standard network (Ethernet, Eschelon, etc.) cabling shall be as tested and

recommended.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 42 June 19, 2020

B. Communication network shall be an overall shielded cable to prevent electrical noise

from interfering with data transmission. All network cable splices shall be at controller

locations. Splices elsewhere in the communication network are not acceptable.

C. Enter all computer data into the related computers including all graphics, control

programs and initial approved parameters and settings, and English descriptors. Maintain

USB drive copies of all data file and application software for reload use in the event of a

system crash or memory failure including an untranslated copy (2nd copy provided to

Owner). One copy shall be delivered to the Owner during training sessions, and one

copy shall be archived in the BMS Specialist’s local software vault.

D. Install equipment as indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Verify location of space sensors, thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with

plans and room details before installation. Locate concealed type space sensors 60

inches above floor, otherwise, 48 inches above floor from center of highest operable

adjustment control in accordance to ADA requirements. Space mounted devices are to

be identical in appearance. All devices shall be mounted under the same style cover.

F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23

Sections specifying mechanical identification.

G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according.

H. Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made. Controls are to

be installed by the control equipment manufacturer.

I. Provide all relays, switches, sources of electricity and all other auxiliaries, accessories

and connections necessary to make a complete operable system in accordance with the

sequences specified.

J. Patch all ductwork and floor penetrations resulting in either equipment removal or new

work. Patch to match existing materials and finishes.

K. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to applicable

Division 23 Sections specifying mechanical identification.

L. Install control valves horizontally with the power unit up.

M. General System Requirements:

1. Time of Day Scheduling

a. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be programmed to start and

stop the HVAC equipment based on occupancy schedules coordinated with

the Owner. The BMS shall also provide equipment interlocks as required.

2. All safeties shall be automatically and remotely reset from BMS.

3. All setpoints shall be adjustable from BMS console via single point commands.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 43 June 19, 2020

4. All reset schedule parameters shall be adjustable from BMS console via single point

commands.

3.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTIONS

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to applicable Division 26 Section.

B. Install building wire and cable according to applicable Division 26 Section.

C. Install signal and communication cable according to BMS manufacturer’s written

instructions.

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and

piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.

3. Install concealed cable in raceway.

4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables

where a number of cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, neatly along hinge side;

protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors neatly.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors, except local individual room controls, for

future identification and servicing of control system.

D. Connect electrical components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and

instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and

bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for

equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,

tighten connectors and terminals according to tightening requirements specified in UL

486A.

E. Connect manual reset limit controls independent of manual control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

F. Connect HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switches to override automatic interlock controls

when switch is in HAND position.

G. Provide and install low voltage transformers connected to spare circuits in electrical

panels. Install power wiring from spare breaker to transformer. Run all low voltage

control wiring.

H. Provide 120V power to all ATC panels not shown on the Electrical Documents, required

by the ATC system.

3.7 START-UP

A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to start control systems, load all software, configure network

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 44 June 19, 2020

communications, inspect installation of HVAC equipment, obtain and coordinate third

party controls, and provide a written report.

B. The BMS Specialist shall completely check out, calibrate and test all connected hardware

and software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the approved

specifications and sequences of operation approved.

C. Witnessed acceptance demonstration shall display and demonstrate each type of data

entry to show site specific customizing capability; demonstrate parameter changes;

execute digital and analog commands; and demonstrate DDC loop stability via trend of

inputs and outputs, verify component’s address and communication loop functions.

D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Provide copies of alarm logs to verify alarm

operation.

E. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Start, test, and adjust control systems. Provide programming of schedules and operating

units after consultant with Owner’s Representative and Building’s Operating Personnel.

G. Demonstrate compliance with requirements.

H. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation

specified.

I. Assist testing, balancing, and adjusting specialist.

3.8 ATC COMMISSIONING

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service

representative to start control systems.

B. The ATC Specialist shall perform a commissioning procedure consisting of field I/O

calibration and commissioning, system commissioning and integrated system program

commissioning. Document all commissioning information on commissioning data sheets

which shall be submitted to the engineer. The commissioning must be coordinated with

the Owner to ensure systems are available when needed. Notify the Owner in writing of

the testing schedule so that authorized personnel from the Owner are present throughout

the commissioning procedure.

1. Field I/O Calibration and Commissioning: Prior to system program commissioning,

verify that each control panel has been installed according to plans, specifications

and approved shop drawings. Test, calibrate and bring on line each control sensor

and device. Commissioning to include, but not limited to:

a. Sensor accuracy at setpoint.

b. Sensor range.

c. Verify analog limit and binary alarm reporting.

d. Point value reporting.

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 45 June 19, 2020

e. Binary alarm and switch settings.

f. Actuator and positioner spring ranges.

g. Fail safe operation on loss of control signal, electric power, network

communications, etc.

2. Record calibration and test data on commissioning data sheets. Sufficient space

should be provided near each point name for sign off.

3. Comply with standards and documentation formats as indicated in ASHRAE

Guidelines 1989 for commissioning of HVAC systems.

4. Submit completed (description filled-in) “Input/Output Summary Table” to Engineer

as shown in ASHRAE Guidelines prior to commissioning for Engineer’s review.

Commissioning shall not start until Specialist receives approved data sheets from

Engineer.

C. System Programming Commissioning:

1. After control devices have been commissioned (i.e. calibrated, tested and signed

off), each DDC program shall be put on line and commissioned. The Specialist

shall, in the presence of Owner personnel, demonstrate each programmed

sequence of operation and compare the results in writing. In addition, each control

loop shall be tested to verify proper response and stable control, within specified

accuracy’s. System program test results shall be recorded on commissioning data

sheets and submitted for record. Any discrepancies between the specification and

the actual performance will be immediately rectified and retested.

D. Integrated System Commissioning:

1. After all DDC programs have been commissioned, the Specialist shall verify the

overall system performance as specified. Tests shall include, but not be limited to:

a. Data communication, both normal and failure modes.

b. Impact of component failures on system performance and system operation.

c. Time/Date changes.

d. Global application programs and point sharing.

e. System backup and reloading.

f. System status displays.

g. Diagnostic functions.

h. Power failure routines.

i. Battery backup.

j. Testing of all electrical and HVAC systems. Train Owner’s maintenance

personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown,

troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

3.9 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Provide the services of controls manufacturer’s authorized instructors who will give full

instruction to designated personnel in the operation, maintenance and programming of

the DDC system. Orient the training specifically to the system installed rather than a

general training course. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter

FVHD 5195 5:230923 - 46 June 19, 2020

they are to teach. A minimum of forty (40) hours of training shall be provided. Three (3)

eight (8) hour training sessions shall be conducted at system completion, and the other

two (2) eight (8) hour (four sessions) shall be conducted forty-five (45) days after system

completion.

B. Training on the functional operation of the system shall include.

1. Operation of equipment.

2. Programming.

3. Diagnostics.

4. Failure recovery procedures.

5. Alarm formats (where applicable).

6. Modifying text and graphics.

7. Password assignment and modifications

8. Report eventing and modification.

9. Sequence of Operation review.

10. Use of operators’ terminals.

11. Maintenance and calibration.

12. Trouble shooting, diagnostics, and repair instructions.

C. Provide an additional twenty four (24) hours of programming time for Owner

requirements and sequencing refinement. During the first year of operation, trends and

equipment operations reports are to be used as a tool in determining actual operating

characteristics of the building which will allow setpoint adjustments and modification of

software programming to adapt to the building’s operating parameters.


FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Steel pipe and fittings.




A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and tube.

2. Fittings.


4. Transition fittings.

5. Bypass chemical feeder.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and

alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and

loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.

3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for

exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated

wall and floor and ceiling assemblies.


A. Coordination Drawings: Piping layout, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items


B. Qualification Data: For Installer.

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 2 June 19, 2020




A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal

pipe couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to


C. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and

installation.

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the

following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F.

2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 73 deg F.

3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 180 deg F.

4. Blowdown-Drain Piping: 180 deg F.

5. Air-Vent Piping: 180 deg F.

6. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L.

B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 3 June 19, 2020

E. Wrought Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

F. Copper-Tube, Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Viega

LLC; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Elkhart Products Corporation.

b. NIBCO INC.

2. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM O-ring seal in each

end.

3. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping

system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless


a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according

to ASTM B813.




joined.

B. Dielectric Nipples:

1. Description:

a. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.

b. Electroplated steel nipple, complying with ASTM F1545.

c. Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.

d. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.

e. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.






FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or

pressure-seal joints.

B. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

C. Condensate-Drain Piping, Copper: Type DWV, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-

copper fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for

the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

E. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for

plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

F. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining

methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with

metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping

manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING


piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate

friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated

unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment


C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas



D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 5 June 19, 2020

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.



I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and

servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded

nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for

system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch

connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the

top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to applicable Division 23 Sections.

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

S. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections for identifying piping.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with


U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with





assembly.

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 6 June 19, 2020

C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to

tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook,"

using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B32.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and

restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.


or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt

threads.

F. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tools and procedure. Leave

insertion marks on pipe after assembly.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.


A. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections for hangers, supports, and

anchor devices.

B. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod



C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

D. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes,

and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than

equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 7 June 19, 2020

C. Install ports for pressure gauges and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections.

Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in applicable Division 23 Sections


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due

to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from

testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure

shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install

blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test

pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of

overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Comply with current International Mechanical Code for test procedures and

pressure (for reference, IMC 2018, Section 1208).

2. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage

due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping

may be used.

3. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use

drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

4. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

5. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for

any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress

due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified

minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9,

"Building Services Piping."

6. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine

piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing,

or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

7. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

FVHD 5195 5:232113 - 8 June 19, 2020

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and

operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers,

chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.


FVHD 5195 5:232116 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hydronic specialty valves.

2. Air-control devices.

3. Strainers.

4. Connectors.


A. Product Data: For each type of product:

1. Include construction details and material descriptions for hydronic piping

specialties.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

3. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For hydronic piping specialties to include in



A. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control

valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.


A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX.

FVHD 5195 5:232116 - 2 June 19, 2020

B. Safety Valves and Pressure Vessels: Shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and

stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bell &

Gossett; a Xylem brand; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. NIBCO INC.

b. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Plug: Resin.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

B. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled.


of the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

c. WATTS.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

4. Seat: Brass.

5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.











FVHD 5195 5:232116 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.2 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:


of the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

d. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze.

3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.



B. Automatic Air Vents:


of the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.

d. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.



C. Bladder-Type ASME Expansion Tanks:



a. AMTROL, Inc.



2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum

operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and supports installed















FVHD 5195 5:232116 - 4 June 19, 2020

and are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 1.

3. Bladder: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to

maintain required expansion capacity.

4. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

D. In-Line Air Separators:



a. AMTROL, Inc.



2. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system

flow to maximize air separation.

3. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.

4. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain

connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2

and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel

basket.


2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing

protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.



6. Maximum length: 12-inches.





FVHD 5195 5:232116 - 5 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply

connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling

terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow

direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without

valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings.

Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for

installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill

pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as

required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment

rooms only. Install manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air

venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2

and larger.

E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure

that tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.


FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

2. Automatic condensate pump units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump. Include certified performance curves and rated

capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and

accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on

curves.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts

and other anchorages.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and


FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


1. Bell & Gossett; an Xlyem Brand.

2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-

coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with

pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and

outlet, replaceable bronze wear rings, and threaded companion-flange

connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to

shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim

impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held

by a stainless-steel spring, and EPT bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on

shaft between motor and seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Rigid, axially-split spacer coupling to allow service of pump seal without

disturbing pump or motor.

E. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in appliable Division 23 Sections.

1. Enclosure : Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. NEMA Premium Efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.






FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 3 June 19, 2020

4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for

electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

5. Single or Variable-speed motor, as indicated.

6. Provide integral pump motor variable-speed controller.

F. Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete unit

and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-phase

induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.

2. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency

throughout voltage range.

3. Unit Operating Requirements:

a. Input ac voltage tolerance of 380 to 500 V, plus or minus 10 percent.

b. Input frequency tolerance of 06/11 Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.

c. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

d. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.

e. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0

times the base load current for 3 seconds.

f. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.

g. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.

4. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an 11:1

speed range.

5. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.

c. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.

e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.

6. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

a. Input transient protection by means of surge protection device (SPD).

b. Undervoltage and overvoltage trips; inverter overtemperature, overload, and

overcurrent trips.

c. Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, Class 10

performance.

d. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load combination at

a natural frequency of the combination.

e. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips.

f. Loss-of-phase protection.

g. Reverse-phase protection.

h. Short-circuit protection.

i. Motor overtemperature fault.

7. VFD shall limit the distortion to voltage and frequency to less than 3-percent by

providing line reactors or filtering.

FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 4 June 19, 2020

8. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on return of

power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault

correction. Bidirectional autospeed search shall be capable of starting into rotating

loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper

direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.

9. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power

interruption until motor has stopped.

10. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5

times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at

slow speeds.

11. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back

based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated

motors at slow speeds.

12. Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:

a. Power on.

b. Run.

c. Overvoltage.

d. Line fault.

e. Overcurrent.

f. External fault.

13. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector switches with

manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.

14. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in controller

door and connected to indicate the following controller parameters:

a. Output frequency (Hertz).

b. Motor speed (rpm).

c. Motor status (running, stop, fault).

d. Motor current (amperes).

e. Motor torque (percent).

f. Fault or alarming status (code).

g. Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).

h. DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

i. Set-point frequency (Hertz).

j. Motor output voltage (volts).

15. Control Signal Interface:

a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V or

0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.

b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed-setting

input signals from the control system:

1) 0 to 10-V dc.

2) 0-20 or 4-20 mA.

3) Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.

4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.

5) RS485.

FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 5 June 19, 2020

6) Keypad display for local hand operation.

c. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-20

mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:

1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Output current (load).

3) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

4) Motor torque (percent).

5) Motor speed (rpm).

6) Set-point frequency (Hertz).

16. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external system

within a multidrop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all parameter settings of

VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide capability for VFC to retain these

settings within the nonvolatile memory.

17. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, molded-case switch with lockable

handle.

18. Accessories:

a. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise

indicated.

b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2,

heavy-duty type.

c. Standard Displays:

1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Set-point frequency (Hertz).

3) Motor current (amperes).

4) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).

5) Motor torque (percent).

6) Motor speed (rpm).

7) Motor output voltage (volts).

2.2 AUTOMATIC CONDENSATE PUMP UNITS



1. Beckett Corporation.

2. Hartell Pumps; Milton Roy.

3. Little Giant Pump Co.

B. Description: Packaged units with corrosion-resistant pump, plastic tank with cover, and

automatic controls. Include factory- or field-installed check valve and a 72-inch-

minimum, electrical power cord with plug or terminal strip as indicated.





FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the

Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections

before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be

installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors,

impellers, couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps

and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to

open drain.

E. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and

spring hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in applicable


3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and

motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout

between motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely

fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges

are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.


B. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump

nozzles.

E. Install triple-duty valve] on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install Y-type strainer, suction diffuser, and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps

between pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping,

or install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

J. Ground equipment according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

K. Connect wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean strainers on suction piping.

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

FVHD 5195 5:232123 - 8 June 19, 2020

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot

liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do

not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.

1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel for 3 hours (1 hour in-line pumps with VFD,

1 hour in-line pumps without VFD, 1 hour automatic condensate pump) minimum

on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing,

and maintaining pumps and VFDs.




FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings.

2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties.

3. Refrigerants.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig.

2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig.

3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and piping specialty.

1. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following:

a. Thermostatic expansion valves.

b. Solenoid valves.

c. Hot-gas bypass valves.

d. Filter dryers.

e. Strainers.

f. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting

sizes; flow capacities; valve arrangements and locations; slopes of horizontal runs;

oil traps; double risers; wall and floor penetrations; and equipment connection

details.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 2 June 19, 2020

2. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties,

and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided,

elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to

ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

3. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

4. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot.





A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include

in maintenance manuals.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 2010 ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

D. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing

Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

E. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and

labeled.

1.8 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean

when installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties Manufacturers:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Parker-

Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division; or a comparable

product by one of the following:

a. Danfoss Electronics, Inc.

b. Sporlan Valve Company.

B. Diaphragm Packless Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through

or angle pattern.

2. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring.

3. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel.

4. Seat: Nylon.

5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged.

6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.


C. Packed-Angle Valves:

1. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure.

3. Operator: Rising stem.

4. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene.

5. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.



D. Check Valves:

1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern.

2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug.

3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat.

4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

5. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal.

6. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged.

7. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig.




FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 4 June 19, 2020

E. Service Valves:

1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core.

2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring.

3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene.

4. End Connections: Copper spring.


F. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel.

2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


4. End Connections: Threaded.

5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by

location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V ac coil.



G. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed

and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal.

2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.


4. End Connections: Threaded.



H. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge.

5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F.

6. Superheat: Adjustable.

7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications).

8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union.


I. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL.

1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel.

2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel.

3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos.

4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel.


6. Equalizer: Internal.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 5 June 19, 2020

7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by

location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter and 24-V ac coil.

8. End Connections: Socket.

9. Set Pressure: Per System Requirements.

10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig.



J. Straight-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating.

2. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel.

3. End Connections: Socket or flare.



K. Angle-Type Strainers:

1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze.

2. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug.

3. Screen: 100-mesh monel.




L. Moisture/Liquid Indicators:

1. Body: Forged brass.

2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected

by filter screen.

3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm).

4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm.




M. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws,

and neoprene gaskets.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

8. Rated Flow: Per application.



FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 6 June 19, 2020

N. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730.

1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell.

2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support.

3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina.

4. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications).


6. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure

differential measurement.

7. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig.

8. Rated Flow: Per application.



2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with

installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Suction Lines for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR,

annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines, and Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: Copper,

Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed

joints.

C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, annealed- or drawn-temper

tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

3.3 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of

compressor.

B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and

strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 7 June 19, 2020

C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the

compressor suction connection.

D. Except as otherwise indicated, install packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter

dryers.

E. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve.

Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

F. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators.

1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb.

2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb

straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line.

3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect

suction-line pressure at bulb location.

G. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

H. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion

valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

I. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as

an integral assembly for the device being protected:

1. Solenoid valves.

2. Thermostatic expansion valves.

3. Hot-gas bypass valves.

4. Compressor.

J. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve.

K. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION


piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install

piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment


FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 8 June 19, 2020

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas



E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.



I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,

and fittings.

K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves

and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access

doors or panels as specified in applicable Division 08 Sections if valves or equipment

requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

L. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

M. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to

mechanical injury.

N. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away

from compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.

3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

O. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove

valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do

not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

P. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or

between pipes for insulation installation.

Q. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to applicable Division 23 Sections.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with


FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 9 June 19, 2020

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with


3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION



assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe

and Tube."

1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with

copper pipe.

2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.


A. Comply with applicable Division 23 Sections for hangers, supports, and anchor devices.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod



D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting.

E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes,

and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent.

F. Refrigerant piping running across the roof horizontally shall be supported using roof pipe

stands as manufactured by Micro Industries or B-Line. Pipe supports shall by Model 24R.

High density, rubber pads shall be installed on the refrigerant piping where piping crosses

pipe support to protect piping insulation. Shim as required to obtain pipe slope.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 10 June 19, 2020


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser,

evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test

pressure.

3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than

the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration

of test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small

amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results

are achieved.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.8 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation.

2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If

vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging.

3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.

4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to

fluctuating suction pressure.

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system

design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to

manufacturer's written instructions:

1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit.

2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct.

3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves.

4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes.

FVHD 5195 5:232300 - 11 June 19, 2020

5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and

bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design

flow rates and pressures are established.


FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes HVAC water-treatment systems for the following:

1. Hot-water heating systems (closed system).

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory.

B. PPM: Parts per million.

C. TDS: Total dissolved solids consist of salts and other materials that combine with water as

a solution.

D. TSS: Total suspended solids include both organic and inorganic solids that are suspended

in the water. These solids may include silt, plankton, and industrial wastes.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders.


A. Water-Analysis Provider Qualifications: Verification of experience and capability of

HVAC water-treatment service provider.


C. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the

application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in "Performance

Requirements" Article.

FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 2 June 19, 2020

D. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, bypass feeders, injection pumps, and

controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-

treatment service provider, capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-

treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HVAC WATER-TREATMENT MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Aqua-Chem,

Inc.; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cascade Water Services, Inc.

2. Nalco; an Ecolab company.


A. Provide all hardware, chemicals, and other material necessary to maintain HVAC water

quality in all systems as indicated in this Specification. Water quality for HVAC systems

shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of

HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or to the

environment.

B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC system

equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating

personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Verify all water quality conditions with the boiler manufacturer.

D. Closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating below 250 deg F shall have the

following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.

5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

6. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.

7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.






FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 3 June 19, 2020

8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000

organisms/mL.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100

organisms/mL.

c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.

d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.

e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.

2.3 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill

opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Provide quarter- turn or

threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm arranged to lock the top onto the feeder

when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. Provide a NPS 3/4 IN quarter-turn valve

on inlet and outlet.

1. Capacity: 5 gal.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2.4 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain

water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to

remove grease and petroleum products.

C. Closed System (Water) Chemicals: Sequestering agent to reduce deposits and adjust pH,

corrosion inhibitors, and conductivity enhancers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical-application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain

manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units, so controls and devices that

require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories

FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 4 June 19, 2020

to substrate. Install all chemical application equipment within a spill-containment area

without floor drains.

B. Install water-testing equipment on wall near water-chemical-application equipment.

C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical-treatment controls and sensors.

D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and equip

with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply.

3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless

otherwise indicated on Drawings.

4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below

feeder inlet.

5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.


A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-

metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in applicable Division

23 Sections.

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal

general-duty valves are specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.

E. See applicable Division 22 Sections for backflow preventers required in makeup-water

connections to potable-water systems.


A. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.

B. Ground equipment in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

C. Connect wiring in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 5 June 19, 2020





1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping

and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been

cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing

chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation, and calibrate controls during

the preliminary phase of HVAC system's startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory

test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate

report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or

concealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure

constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping until no leaks exist.

C. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Comply with ASTM D3370 and with the following standards:

1. Silica: ASTM D859.

2. Steam System: ASTM D1066.

3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D1067.

4. Iron: ASTM D1068.

5. Water Hardness: ASTM D1126.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water

conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for

heating, hot-water piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a

period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations.

2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and

initially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation.

FVHD 5195 5:232500 - 6 June 19, 2020

3. Periodic field service and consultation.

4. Customer report charts and log sheets.

5. Laboratory technical analysis.

6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and

equipment.


starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining water treatment

systems.




FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Duct liner.

5. Sealants and gaskets.

6. Hangers and supports.

B. Construction Requirements:

1. Sound Sensitive Locations – Spaces with an NC rating less than or equal to 30 (i.e.

Conference Rooms, etc.):

a. Rooftop unit (RTU) Systems – Exposed: Exposed supply air duct to be pre-

fabricated painted single-wall lined round (unless specifically noted on the

plans as rectangular ductwork), and exposed return air duct to be pre-

insulated, painted, single-wall lined round duct (unless specifically noted on

the plans as rectangular ductwork) and where shown on drawings, but not

part of this list.

1) Liner Thickness: 1-inches.

2) Liner Material: Flexible Elastomeric.

b. Rooftop unit (RTU) Systems – Concealed: Concealed above ceiling supply air

and return air ductwork to be rectangular and/or round ductwork as

indicated on the plans. Internally line supply and return ductwork from the

unit vertical discharge/intake connection to a minimum of the first 10-feet

(horizontal) from the bottom duct riser of the rooftop unit. Provide additional

liner as indicated by the plans.

1) Liner Thickness: 1-inches.

2) Liner Material: Flexible Elastomeric.

2. Paint all exposed ductwork, hangers, and support unless otherwise noted. Color to

be approved by Architect.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 2 June 19, 2020

3. Indicated duct sizes shown on drawings are internal dimensions.

4. Systems associated with the various HVAC units (AHU, etc.) and general exhaust

systems to be galvanized steel.

5. Construct all ductwork to achieve a Seal Class A per SMACNA Construction

Standards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in

ASTM C 168. In this Section, these values are the result of the formula Btu x in./h x sq. ft.

x deg F or W/m x K at the temperature differences specified. Values are expressed as Btu

or W.

1. Example: Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 or 0.037

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -

distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or

configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the Architect.

Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed

layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.


A. Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance

requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity

loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible".

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 -

"HVAC System Construction and Insulation."


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.

2. Sealants and gaskets.

3. Seismic-restraint devices.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 3 June 19, 2020

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections,

components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure

classes.

4. Elevation of top of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors

and panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and

vibration isolation.


A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans, drawn to scale, showing the items


1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general

construction, building components, and other building services (piping, conduits,

etc.). Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.


5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Luminaires.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.

B. Welding certificates.


D. Record Drawings (As-Built): Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement,

support, and installed accessories and devices.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 4 June 19, 2020


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the

following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.


A. Deliver sealant and firestopping materials to site in original unopened containers or

bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color,

expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for

multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle sealant and firestopping materials according to manufacturer's written

recommendations.

C. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper

maintained through fabrication and installation.

D. Duct is to be delivered to the construction site either fully wrapped in plastic or openings

are capped with thick plastic to prevent construction debris entering inside duct.

E. Deliver, store, and protect ductwork from weather damage and physical damage.

Provide temporary plastic end caps on open duct ends as work is performed in stages and

install as the end of the days’ work is completed. Remove the temporary caps as the

work progresses.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of

pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for

exposed ducts.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 5 June 19, 2020

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for

concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black

and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce

aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM

gasket materials.

F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch-minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch-minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance

with Figure 2-1.

2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-

22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection

system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular

Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,

materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select

types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class,

applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other

provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 6 June 19, 2020

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct

Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded

longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with

butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals,"

and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,

materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

E. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess

material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

F. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend

radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.

Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:

1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying

with SMACNA, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness

for pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 2-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.

b. Ducts 27 to 36 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

3. Round Mitered Elbows: Welded construction with the following metal thickness

for pressure classes from 2- to 10-inch wg:

a. Ducts 3 to 14 Inches in Diameter: 0.028 inch.

b. Ducts 15 to 26 Inches in Diameter: 0.034 inch.

c. Ducts 27 to 50 Inches in Diameter: 0.040 inch.

4. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust

systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 7 June 19, 2020

not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning

vanes.

5. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-

degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

6. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45,

60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate

nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored

construction.

7. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches, and All Flat-Oval Elbows: Fabricate gored

elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.

8. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick

with two-piece welded construction.

9. Round Gored-Elbow Metal Thickness: Same as non-elbow fittings specified above.

10. Pleated Elbows for Sizes through 14 Inches and Pressures through 10-Inch wg:

0.022 inch.

2.4 STATIC PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Static-Pressure Classifications for Ductwork Construction:

1. Supply ductwork downstream of VAV or constant volume boxes: 1" wg; positive

pressure.

2. Supply ductwork (except as noted otherwise): Pressure classification per the

equipment scheduled discharge static pressure; positive pressure (rated for a

minimum 2-inches water column).

3. Return ductwork: Pressure classification per the equipment scheduled discharge

static pressure; negative pressure (rated for a minimum 2-inches water column).

4. Outside air ductwork: Pressure classification per the equipment scheduled

discharge static pressure; negative pressure (rated for a minimum 2-inches water

column).

5. Relief air ductwork: Pressure classification per the equipment scheduled discharge

static pressure (rated for a minimum 2-inches water column).

6. Exhaust air ductwork (fan suction side): Pressure classification per the equipment

scheduled discharge static pressure; negative pressure (rated for a minimum 2-

inches water column).

2.5 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with

NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."


of the following:






FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 8 June 19, 2020


d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean

temperature.

3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will

form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-

resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL

and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916 and

liner manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials

complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or

NFPA 90B.


Armacell LLC; or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.

b. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

c. K-Flex USA.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by

an NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with

NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin,

fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length

to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-

steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick

galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in

place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent

adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with

multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive

metal nosing.








FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 9 June 19, 2020

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.

4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping.

5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of

ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints

necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500

fpm or greater.

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals

not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that

have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.

Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.

b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,

turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections)

or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls

with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. Indoor Ductwork Sealant: UL Classified and Listed, NFPA 90A and 90B compliant, 0

flame spread/smoke developed ratings, water based, non-flammable, acrylic copolymer

with 70% ± 2% solids content, 24 to 72 hour cure time, for use up to 15-inch wg and

SMACNA Class A seals. Design Polymerics “DP 1010" or equal.

B. Outdoor Ductwork Sealant: UL Classified and Listed, 5 flame spread/0 smoke developed

ratings, acrylic emulsion with 73% plus/minus 2% solids content by weight, 12 to 24

hour cure time, for use up to 16-inch wg and SMACNA Class A seal. Polymer Adhesive

“Airseal #11" or equal.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene

plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 10 June 19, 2020

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and

shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized

rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-

2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION


duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size

ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design

considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved

on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.

B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints.

D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 11 June 19, 2020

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and

permanent enclosure elements of building.

G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms

and enclosures.

I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are

exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation

with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four

sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

J. Install fire and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as required by code,

and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements in applicable

Division 23 Sections for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation requirements of

the damper UL listing.

K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted

accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials both before and after installation.

M. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid

partitions, unless specifically indicated.

N. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting

layouts, and similar finished work.

O. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit.

1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes.

2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches

and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.

P. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not

use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.

When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the

exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 12 June 19, 2020

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of

fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.3 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. All external joints are to be welded. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof

construction.

B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of

weather. Provide necessary supporting structures.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in

"Construction Requirements" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or

for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes

or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers

and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch

intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with

welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum

intervals of 16 feet.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 13 June 19, 2020

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,

tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials

where used.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with applicable


B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not

have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-

steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in other Division

09 Sections.



B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test

report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct

sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each

designated pressure class.

b. Exterior Ducts: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 100

percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage

testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters,

dampers, and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to

be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or

section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at

maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum

design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 14 June 19, 2020

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in

accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in

NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter

media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR.

C. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and

leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for

inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined

duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer.

Comply with applicable Division 23 Sections for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with

99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed

from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and

other points of entry into building.

E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and

drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil

section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers

and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

FVHD 5195 5:233113 - 15 June 19, 2020

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums

and mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract

contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning.

Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being

cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces

without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct

liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or

delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan

operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning

materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

G. Submit Duct Cleaning report including before and after photos.

3.10 STARTUP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections.


FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers.

2. Control/Motor operated dampers.

3. Fire dampers.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Remote damper operators.

6. Duct-mounted access doors.


8. Duct accessory hardware.

9. Rectangular to round boot take offs.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories' fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control-damper installations.

d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling,

and corridor-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted

access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, on which

ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and





1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.


acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Performance:

a. Leakage Rating Class III: Leakage not exceeding 40 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-inch

wg differential static pressure.

2. Construction:

a. Linkage out of airstream.

b. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 3 June 19, 2020

3. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, 16-gauge-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized steel; 16 gauge thick.

5. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

6. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearing at each end of

every blade.

7. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

8. Locking device to hold damper blades in a fixed position without vibration.

B. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper

in multiple-damper assembly.

C. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle, made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-

plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.3 CONTROL/MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS

A. General Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, use parallel-blade configuration for two-position

control, equipment isolation service, and when mixing two airstreams. For other

applications, use opposed-blade configuration.

2. Factory or field assemble multiple damper sections to provide a single damper

assembly of size required by the application.

B. Performance:

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 4 June 19, 2020

1. AMCA Certification: Test and rate in accordance with AMCA 511.

2. Leakage:

a. Class II: Leakage shall not exceed 10 cfm/sq. ft. against 1-inch wg differential

static pressure.

3. Pressure Drop: 0.05 inch wg at 1500 fpm across a 24-by-24-inch damper when

tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D, Figure 5.3.

4. Velocity: Up to 3000 fpm.

5. Temperature: Minus 25 to plus 180 deg F.

6. Pressure Rating: Damper close-off pressure equal to fan shutoff pressure with a

maximum blade deflection of 1/200 of blade length.

C. Construction:

1. Linkage out of airstream.

2. Suitable for horizontal or vertical airflow applications.

3. Frames:

a. Hat, U, or angle shaped.

b. 16-gauge-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

c. Mitered and welded corners.

d. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

4. Blades:

a. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.

b. Parallel or opposed-blade design.

c. Galvanized steel.

d. 16-gauge-thick single skin.

5. Blade Edging Seals:

a. Replaceable Closed-cell neoprene.

6. Blade Jamb Seal: Flexible stainless steel, compression type.

7. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch diameter; galvanized steel.

8. Blade-Linkage Hardware: Zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade

bearings. Linkage mounted out of air stream.

9. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers mounted with vertical blades to have thrust bearings at each end of

every blade.

D. Damper Actuator - Electric:

1. Electric - 24 V. Coordinate with the Automatic Temperature Control Specialist.

2. UL 873, plenum rated.

3. Fully modulating with fail-safe spring return.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 5 June 19, 2020

a. Sufficient motor torque to drive damper fully open and fully closed with

adequate force to achieve required damper seal.

b. Minimum 90-degree drive rotation.

4. Clockwise or counterclockwise drive rotation as required for application.

5. Environmental Operating Range:

a. Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 130 deg F.

b. Humidity: 5 to 95 percent relative humidity noncondensing.

6. Environmental enclosure: NEMA 2.

7. Actuator to be factory mounted and provided with a single-point wiring

connection.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS


following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

2. Pottorff.

3. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled in accordance with UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000 fpm

velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours, as required.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille

where blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed galvanized steel; with

mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in accordance with UL listing.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance

with UL listing.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed galvanized sheet steel, interlocking full-length steel blade

connectors. Material gauge is to be in accordance with UL listing.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device:

1. Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.





FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.5 TURNING VANES

A. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of galvanized

sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable

for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with

perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

B. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible"; Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane

Support in Elbows."

C. Vane Construction:

1. Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.6 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS

A. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.

B. Tubing: Brass.

C. Cable: Stainless steel.

D. Wall-Box Mounting: Surface.

E. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Steel.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels in accordance with SMACNA's

"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figure 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct

Access Doors and Panels," and Figure 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 7 June 19, 2020

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two

compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, fabric materials, and accessory

materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index

not exceeding 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements

in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached

to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-

thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.

3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw

cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of

length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to

gasoline and grease.

2.10 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless steel

ducts.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 8 June 19, 2020

C. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;

3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.11 RECTANGULAR TO ROUND BOOT TAKEOFFS

A. Provide rectangular to round book takeoff fitting as manufactured by Buckley, Model

3300 or equal, with integral volume damper for all takeoffs from rectangular ducts to

round ducts. Takeoff to have gasketed flange to provide an air tight connection. The

damper blade to be a minimum of 26 gauge galvanized steel. Residential type 45 degree

takeoff will not be acceptable.

B. Provide rectangular boot-to-round fitting for all flexible duct connections to rectangular

mains.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories in accordance with applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for

fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel

accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless steel accessories in

stainless steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2016 includes Section 6.4.3.3.3 - "Shutoff Damper

Controls," Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as

possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Where multiple damper sections are necessary to achieve required dimensions, provide

reinforcement to fully support damper assembly when fully closed at full system design

static pressure.

E. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches

extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install

dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat

channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

F. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated and as needed for

testing and balancing.

H. Install fire dampers in accordance with UL listing.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 9 June 19, 2020

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and

maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers,

and equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible

links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be

pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors

installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed

downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-ft. spacing.

8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

9. Control devices requiring inspection.

10. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

L. Label access doors according to applicable Division 23 Sections indicate the purpose of

access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. For fans developing static pressures of 5 inches wg and more, cover flexible connectors

with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors, and verify that size and location of access doors

are adequate to perform required operation.

3. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and that proper heat-

response device is installed.

FVHD 5195 5:233300 - 10 June 19, 2020

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation, and verify that vanes do

not move or rattle.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in applicable Division 23

Section.


FVHD 5195 5:233346 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulated flexible ducts.



B. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts.

1. Include plans showing locations and mounting and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-

mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and

with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."


acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."

FVHD 5195 5:233346 - 2 June 19, 2020

D. Comply with ASTM E96/E96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of

Materials."

2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically

wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

4. Insulation R-Value: R6 (1.5-inch thickness for a 0.29 k-factor).

5. Include continuous hanging tabs, integral fibrous-glass tape and nylon hanging

cord.

6. Coordinate flexible ductwork with diffuser connections and provide transitions for

final connection.

7. Work must be in accordance with SMACNA published details and manufacturer’s

recommendations.

2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a

worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,

"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV

lighting.

C. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

D. Installation:

1. Install ducts fully extended.

2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners.

3. Bends of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter.

4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits.

5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns.

E. Supporting Flexible Ducts:

FVHD 5195 5:233346 - 3 June 19, 2020

1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a

maximum of 48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not

exceed 1/2 inch per 12 inches.

2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center

line of the bend.

3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall

not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation

instructions.

4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72

inches o.c.


FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal ventilators - roof.

2. Square in-line centrifugal fans.

3. Destratification/circulation fans for thermal equalization.



1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for fans.

2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

3. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

4. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

5. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

6. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

7. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

8. Prefabricated roof curbs.

9. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size

of each field connection.


FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, or BIM

model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section and coordinated with

all building trades.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC power ventilators to include in normal and

emergency operation, and maintenance manuals.




1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations

with actual equipment provided.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.

B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated,

and fans have been commissioned.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST




2. Loren Cook Company.

3. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Downblast; removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-

piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Accessories:

1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100

to less than 50 percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb

base; factory set to close when fan stops.

5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric

actuator; wired to close when fan stops.

6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.

E. Prefabricated Roof Curbs and adapters: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-

1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood

nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 12 inches.

3. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

4. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

5. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel.

6. Coordinate adapter curb size with existing roof opening.

2.3 SQUARE IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS





3. PennBarry.

B. Description: Square in-line centrifugal fans.









FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 4 June 19, 2020

C. Housing:

1. Housing Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Housing Construction: Side panels shall be easily removable for service. Include

inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling

mounting.

D. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch

located on outside of fan housing.

E. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves,

enclosures around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings

extended to outside of fan housing.

F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

G. Motor: Electrically Communicated Motor (ECM) rated for a 0-10VDC input from the

Building Direct Digital Control System.

H. Accessories:

1. Access for Inspection, Cleaning, and Maintenance: Comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted

inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Variable-Speed Controller: Greenheck Vari-green or approved equal suitable to

reduce speed from 100 to a minimum of 20 percent fully balanced airflow.

a. Coordinate ATC requirements with the ATC Specialist and provide factory

mounted and wired transformers, as indicated.

4. Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan

outlet.

5. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.

6. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide

guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork.

2.4 DESTRATIFICATION FANS



1. Airius, LLC.

2. Continental Fan

3. Vents-US

B. Description: Axial fan capable of producing columnar laminar flow of air.

FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 5 June 19, 2020

C. Performance: Must be able to deliver a minimum 110 fpm at center of column at grade

level.

D. Housing:

1. Intake: Grill guard.

2. Motor Mounting: Enclosed in housing, above stator.

3. Stator: Patented multiple-vane fixed blade assembly, coordinated with fan design

for optimal air flow.

4. Material: PC/ABS 5VA resin, rated 5VA for flame resistance.

E. Mounting: Free hanging or with a suspended ceiling tile as indicated. Models mounted

from a suspended ceiling tile shall be supported from overhead and not from the ceiling

grid.

F. Certification: UL Standard 507 for Safety Electric Fans, as certified by nationally

recognized testing laboratory.

1. Acceptable Laboratories: ETL, CSA, CE, UL.

G. Identification: Permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate including the following:

1. Model Number.

2. Serial Number

3. Motor Power Specifications.

4. Safety Marks: ETL (US & CA) and CE (EU) as applicable.

H. Destratification Fan Motors:

1. Motor: Electrically commutated variable speed, 92% energy efficient axial type.

2. Speed Control: 0-10V DC analog input.

3. Ball Bearings: Permanently lubricated, sealed.

4. Fan Blades: steel, blades welded to steel hub.

5. Thermally Protected Motor Temperatures:

a. Operating Range: -13 degrees F to +160 degrees F.

b. Shutoff: 275 degrees F.

c. Reset: 255 degrees F.

6. Controls: 0-10V DC analog control signal. Daisy chained control wires link to a

DDC.

I. Electrical:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection.

2. Free hanging models: Power Cord: 6 foot, 300-volt AC, UL rated. Motors within the

range of 100-130VAC are provided with a standard 3-prong plug.

FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.5 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.



2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.



NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested

according to AMCA 300.

D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified

Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power,

fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to

AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51.

E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.

2.8 OPERATION

A. Contractor to provide all necessary controls, wiring, wiring conduits, manufacturer’s

recommended equipment and installation options, and system appurtenances to facilitate

the intended use and satisfy the requirements for a fully operational system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 7 June 19, 2020

B. Equipment Mounting:



C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. See applicable

Division 07 Sections for installation of roof curbs.

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Label units according to requirements specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.

3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in applicable



A. Connect wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

B. Ground equipment according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according

to NFPA 70 and NECA 1.

1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in




B. Connect control wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.





1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper

FVHD 5195 5:233423 - 8 June 19, 2020

thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect

switches.

3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space.

4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify

fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system,

align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

6. Adjust belt tension.

7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered

defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections for testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans.

1. Train maintenance personnel for 2 hours minimum (1 hour centrifugal fans, 1 hour

destratification fans) on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,

troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining fans.




FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-duct air terminal units.

2. Casing liner.


A. Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.


components and profiles, and finishes for air terminal units.

2. Include rated capacities (including minimum and maximum airflows), operating


a. Rated capacities include AHRI rated sound performance.

3. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.

4. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.





7. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustic tile.

3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 2 June 19, 2020



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency,


1. In addition to items specified in applicable Division 01 Sections, include the

following:

a. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.

b. Instructions for adjusting software set points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 -

Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."

2.2 SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS



1. ENVIRO-TEC; by Johnson Controls, Inc.

2. Krueger.

3. Titus.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components

inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel, single wall.

1. Casing Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner" Article for flexible

elastomeric duct liner.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct

attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.





FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 3 June 19, 2020

4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-

inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

E. Hydronic Heating Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced

no closer than 0.1 inch, and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a

maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain

valve.

F. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls system specified in other


1. Electric Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered from the ATC System.

2. Electronic Velocity Controller: Factory calibrated and field adjustable to minimum

and maximum air volumes; shall maintain constant airflow dictated by thermostat

within 5 percent of set point while compensating for inlet static-pressure variations

up to 4-inch wg; and shall have a multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet.

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for

connection of portable operator terminal.

2.3 CASING LINER

A. Casing Liner: Flexible elastomeric duct liner fabricated of preformed, cellular, closed-cell,

sheet materials complying with ASTM C534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or

NFPA 90B.

1. Minimum Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum

smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an

NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with

NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and

minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.

FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Ch. 5, "Hangers and Supports" and with applicable Division 23 Sections.

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel

fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes

and for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes

and for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,

tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials

where used.

3.2 TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service

and maintenance.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and

maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements noted on the Drawings and in applicable

Division 23 Sections and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer,

control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or

flange.

C. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections for connecting ducts to air

terminal units.

D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with

requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections.

FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and

minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23

Sections for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized

service representative:

1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,

test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest






B. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.


instructions.

2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit

manufacturer to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.

1. Train maintenance personnel for 1 hours minimum on procedures and schedules

for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining air terminal

units.


FVHD 5195 5:233600 - 6 June 19, 2020



FVHD 5195 5:233713.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233713.13 - AIR DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes ceiling and wall mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Diffuser: Circular, square, or rectangular air distribution outlet, generally located in the

ceiling and comprised of deflecting members discharging supply air in various directions

and planes and arranged to promote mixing of primary air with secondary room air.

B. Grille: A louvered covering for an opening in an air passage, which can be located in a

sidewall, ceiling, or floor.

C. Register: A combination grille and damper assembly over an air opening.



1. Data Sheet: For each type of air outlet and inlet and accessory furnished; indicate

materials of construction, finish, and mounting details

2. Performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

a. Provide breakouts by neck size and indicate associated airflow ranges.

Indicate minimum and maximum throw & drop data, static-pressure drop,

and noise ratings for each indicated neck size and airflow range.

b. Manufacturer’s standard performance data is NOT ACCEPTABLE.

3. Schedule of diffusers and registers: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

4. Assembly Drawings: For each type of air outlet and inlet; indicate materials and

methods of assembly of components.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers with factory-applied color finishes. Actual size

of smallest diffuser indicated.

FVHD 5195 5:233713.13 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items

involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.


4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

5. Duct access panels.



A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers,

registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated.

Other manufacturers' products with equal performance characteristics may be

considered. Refer to Division 01.

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A,

"Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

C. Single Source Responsibility: Diffusers, registers, and grilles of the Type identified shall be

provided from manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Titus

model indicated, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Tuttle & Bailey.

b. Krueger.

B. Diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1. Type ‘A’ – Supply Registers: 300 L (Titus” 300 series with individually adjustable

blades) description on construction documents shall indicate size and damper type.

2. Type ‘B’ – Diffusers: TDC (“Titus” model TDC) description in construction

documents shall indicate size and air flow pattern.

3. Type ‘C’ – Return and Exhaust Grilles/Registers: 350 L (“Titus” 350 series)

description in construction documents shall indicate size and damper type.

FVHD 5195 5:233713.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

4. Type ‘D’ Supply Diffusers: TMS (“Titus” TMS series) description on construction

documents shall indicate size and damper type.

2.2 PRODUCT

A. 300 L – Type ‘A’:

1. Supply register with double deflection blades on 3/4" centers (adjustable), exposed

blades parallel to the long dimension.

2. Where indicated: Border shall be 1-1/4" wide on all sides with countersunk screw

holes, all corners shall be welded.

3. Deflection blades shall be contoured and spaced on 3/4" centers having steel

friction pivots on both ends to allow individual adjustment.

4. Finish shall be anodic acrylic paint, baked.

5. Integral dampers - double thickness roll-formed steel blades. Opposed blade

damper designed for key or screwdriver operation.

B. TDC – Type ‘B’:

1. The ceiling diffuses shall be fixed, horizontal discharge pattern.

2. The diffusers shall consist of an outer frame assembly of the sizes and mounting

types shown on the plans and outlet schedule.

3. A square or rectangular inlet shall be an integral part of the frame assembly and a

transition piece shall be available to facilitate attachment of round duct.

4. An inner core assembly consisting of fixed deflection louvers shall be available in

one-, two-, three- or four-way horizontal discharge patterns.

5. The inner core assembly must be removable in the field without tools for easy

installation, cleaning or damper adjustment.


7. Provide for tee bar lay in ceiling systems.

C. 350 L – Type ‘C’:

1. Return grilles and registers have fixed horizontal bars spaced 3/4 inch centers with

35 deg face deflection, unless otherwise noted, blades parallel to the long

dimension.

2. Where indicated: overlap margin – 1-1/4 inch nominal width. Furnished with

countersunk screw holes and mounting screws, or tee bar lay in panel.

3. Construction - rigid heavy-gauge margins with reinforced mitered corners.

4. Roll-formed bars - streamlined shaped rigid steel bars on 3/4 inch centers,

deflected. Bars driven on swaged pins are firmly held by mullions welded behind

grille face.

5. Integral dampers - double thickness roll-formed steel blades. Opposed blade

damper designed for key or screwdriver operation.

6. Provide panels for tee bar lay in ceiling systems.


D. TMS – Type ‘D’:

FVHD 5195 5:233713.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

1. The diffuser shall have three cones, which give a uniform face size and appearance

when different neck sizes are used in the same area.

2. All cones shall be one piece precision die-stamped; the back cone shall also

include an integrally drawn inlet (welded-in inlets and corner joints are not

acceptable).

3. The two inner cones shall be constructed as a single, removable inner cone

assembly for easy installation and cleaning.

4. The inner cone assembly must have a hole with removable plug in the center to

allow quick adjustment of an optional inlet damper without removing the inner

cone assembly.


E. Steel construction unless otherwise noted.

F. Toilet rooms, locker rooms, and janitors closets to be aluminum construction, and where

noted in the plans and specifications.

G. Provide opposed blade dampers on air devices.

H. Noise level not to exceed effective total noise of 25 NC for classrooms (based on air

device quantities), otherwise not to exceed 35 NC, or as noted.

I. Provide lay-in panels for T-bar ceiling types (supply, return and exhaust air systems).

J. Drywall: Mounting frame type (surface mount).

K. Finish to be baked enamel (unless otherwise noted), color to be approved by Architect.

Provide color chart.

L. Static pressure not to exceed as scheduled or 0.1-inches w.c. except where indicated on

schedule.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing

for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers are installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


FVHD 5195 5:233713.13 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,

fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve

design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure

drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in

lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or

other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance

of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting

air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed

surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that

have damaged finishes.


FVHD 5195 5:233723 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 233723 - HVAC GRAVITY VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hooded ventilators.



B. Shop Drawings: For gravity ventilators.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, ventilator attachments to curbs, and

curb attachments to roof structure.

2. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water

intrusion.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Coordination Drawings: Roof-framing plans and other details, drawn to scale, and

coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

FVHD 5195 5:233723 - 2 June 19, 2020

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations



A. Deliver ventilators as per manufacturer’s recommendations with protective crating and

covering.

B. Lift and support units with manufacturer’s designated lifting or supporting points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Ventilators shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the

following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without

permanent deformation of ventilator components, noise or metal fatigue caused by

ventilator blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind

pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

B. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Section 5, "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7,

"Construction and System Start-up."

D. Water Entrainment: Limit water penetration through unit to comply with ASHRAE 62.1.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Factory or shop fabricate gravity ventilators to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units to the minimum extent as necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly

mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Fabricate frames, including integral bases, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with

allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material

tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

C. Fabricate units with closely fitted joints and exposed connections accurately located and

secured.

D. Fabricate supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

E. Perform shop welding by AWS-certified procedures and personnel.

FVHD 5195 5:233723 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.3 HOODED VENTILATORS

A. Description: Hooded rectangular penthouse for intake or relief air, as indicated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product




3. PennBarry.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain hooded ventilators from single manufacturer.

D. Construction:

1. Material: Galvanized steel, of thickness required to comply with structural

performance requirements, but not less than 0.064-inch-thick base and 0.040-inch-

thick hood; suitably reinforced.

2. Insulation: Mineral-fiber insulation and vapor barrier.

3. Bird Screening: Galvanized-steel, 1/2-inch-square mesh wire.

E. Galvanized-Steel Finish:

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other contaminants. Clean

welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and repair galvanizing

according to ASTM A780/A780M. Apply a conversion coating suited to the organic

coating to be applied over it.

2. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is

indicated, apply an air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

3. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply

manufacturer's standard finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat,

with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat and an overall minimum

dry film thickness of 2 mils.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Dampers:

1. Location: Hood neck.

2. Control: Motorized.

3. Tray: Provide damper tray or shelf with opening 3 inches less than interior curb

dimensions indicated.

G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized-steel sheet; with mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick,

rigid fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as

required to fit roof opening and ventilator base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 12 inches.





FVHD 5195 5:233723 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

B. Fasteners: Same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel

unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined

materials.

1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

2. Use hex-head or Phillips pan-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Post-Installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors

made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain without failure a load

equal to 4 times the loads imposed for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for

masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted by a

qualified independent testing agency.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D1187/D1187M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install gravity ventilators level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Secure gravity ventilators to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. Use concealed

anchorages where possible. Refer to applicable Division 07 Sections.

C. Install goosenecks on curb base where throat size exceeds 9 by 9 inches.

D. Install gravity ventilators with clearances for service and maintenance.

E. Install perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as

indicated.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as installation progresses.

Comply with applicable Division 07 Sections for sealants applied during installation.

G. Label gravity ventilators according to requirements specified in applicable Division 23

Sections.

H. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by

applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with

concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.

I. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes, so

no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the

FVHD 5195 5:233723 - 5 June 19, 2020

field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new

units.

J. Refer to applicable Division 07 Sections for flashing and counterflashing of roof curbs.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in applicable Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.

3.3 ADJUSTING


3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and

construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and

abrasions.


FVHD 5195 5:235123 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 235123 - GAS VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Listed double-wall vents.




components and profiles, and finishes for product.

B. Shop Drawings: For vents.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.




3. Detail fabrication and assembly of hangers.

C. The breeching and stack shall be verified by the manufacturer’s computations. The

computation shall be technically sound, shall follow ASHRAE calculation methods, and

incorporate the specific flow characteristics of the pipe. The Contractor shall furnish the

exact equipment (boiler, etc.) model and operating characteristics to the factory

representative. Operating characteristics shall include flue gas flow rate, BTU input,

outlet temperature, local altitude, stack layout, and available external pressure at boiler

outlet, etc., necessary to determine system operation at maximum and minimum levels of

burner turndown range and boiler staging.



B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

FVHD 5195 5:235123 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of

joints and seams in vents.

B. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing

calculations.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Comply with SMACNA's "Guide for Steel Stack Design and Construction."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED SPECIAL GAS VENTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal-Fab,

Inc; or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Heatfab Saf-T Vent.

2. Z-Flex; a division of the Novaflex Group.

B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 1738 and rated for 480

deg F continuously, with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/2-inch airspace.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A959, Type 29-4C stainless steel.

E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable

roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners;

fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for

same assembly.

1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall.

G. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of substantial completion.

2.2 GALVANIZED COMBUSTION AIR

A. Comply with National and Local codes. Install and seal per manufacturer’s

recommendations.






FVHD 5195 5:235123 - 3 June 19, 2020

B. Combustion air piping to be insulated (1" fiberglass with jacket) galvanized sheet metal at

gauge recommended by manufacturers.

C. Provide manufacturer UL Listed combustion air termination caps.

D. Accessories: Elbows, supports, wall pipe sleeves, and fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.


3.2 APPLICATION

A. Listed Special Gas Vent: Condensing gas appliances.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Comply

with requirements in applicable Division 07 Sections.

B. Comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights

according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and

all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

D. Lap joints in direction of flow.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect

exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes.


FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gas-fired, fire-tube wall-hung condensing boilers, trim, and accessories

for generating hot water.




components and profiles, and finishes for boilers.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories.







A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections, drawn to scale and coordinated with each

other, using input from installers of the items involved.



D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

E. Product Certificates:

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document

hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers to include in emergency, operation, and


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Wall-Hung Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers:

a. Heat Exchanger and Tank: Free from defects in material and workmanship.

b. Warranty Coverage: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS




application.

B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency in accordance with

Table 6.8.1-6 and other requirements in Ch. 6 of ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

D. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 431, Subpart E,

Appendix N.

E. Mounting Base: For securing boiler to wall and corresponding metal framing supports.

2.2 WALL-HUNG, FIRE-TUBE CONDENSING BOILERS



1. Heat Transfer Products, Inc.

2. Laars Heating Systems Company; a subsidiary of Bradford White Corporation.

3. U.S. Boiler Company; Burnham.




FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 3 June 19, 2020

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, fire-tube, forced-draft,

condensing boiler with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base,

including insulated jacket; flue-gas vent; combustion-air intake connections; water

supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Units are to be for water-

heating service only.

C. Heat Exchanger: Corrosion-resistant Type 316 stainless steel.

D. Fire Tubes: Corrosion-resistant Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Combustion Chamber and Flue Pipes: Corrosion-resistant stainless steel.

F. Burner: Natural gas, forced draft.

G. Blower: Centrifugal fan to operate during each burner-firing sequence and to prepurge

and postpurge the combustion chamber.

1. Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and


a. Motor Sizes: Large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in

service factor range above 1.0.

H. Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator.

I. Ignition: Direct-spark ignition or silicone carbide hot-surface ignition with 100 percent

main-valve shutoff and electronic flame supervision.

J. Casing:

1. Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.

2. Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.

3. Finish: Stainless steel protective finish.

4. Insulation: Minimum 2-inch-thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat

exchanger.

5. Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.

2.3 TRIM - FOR HOT-WATER BOILERS

A. Include devices sized to comply with ASME B31.9.

B. Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit with reset.

C. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.

D. Pressure and Temperature Gauge: Minimum 3-1/2-inch-diameter, combination water-

pressure and -temperature gauge. Gauges shall have operating-pressure and -temperature

ranges, so normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.

E. High and low gas-pressure switches.

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 4 June 19, 2020

F. Alarm bell with silence switch.

G. Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.

H. Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Refer to applicable Division 23 Sections.

B. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls

limit burner operation.

1. High Cutoff: Reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler

design temperature.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low

water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type.

3. Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch factory mounted on

boiler combustion-air inlet.

4. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound

alarm for above conditions.

2.5 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are shown

on Drawings and specified in electrical Sections.

B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor

controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-

point field power connection to boiler.

1. House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match wiring diagram.

3. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway.

4. Field power interface shall be to nonfused disconnect switch.

5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect

switch or circuit breaker.

6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.

2.6 CONDENSATE-NEUTRALIZATION UNITS

A. Condensate-neutralization units must be procured from the boiler manufacturer.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated and -assembled condensate-neutralizing assembly of

corrosion-resistant plastic material with threaded or flanged inlet and outlet pipe

connections. Device functions to prevent acidic condensate from damaging grain system.

It is to be piped to receive acidic condensate discharged from condensing boiler and

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 5 June 19, 2020

neutralize it by chemical reaction with replaceable neutralizing agent. Neutralized

condensate is then piped to suitable drain.

C. Neutralization assembly features:

1. All corrosion-resistant material.

2. Suitable for use on all natural gas and propane boilers.

3. Includes initial charge of neutralizing agent.

4. Neutralizing agent to be easily replaceable when exhausted.

5. Inlet and outlet pipe connections.


A. UL Compliance, Gas-Fired: Test gas-fired boilers for compliance with UL 2764. Boilers

shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Performance Testing: Test and label boilers for efficiency to comply with AHRI 1500.

C. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon

dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve

combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

D. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, in accordance with 2017

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Factory test boilers for safety and functionality;

fill boiler with water, and fire throughout firing range, to prove operation of all safety

components.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and

piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions

affecting performance of the Work.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 6 June 19, 2020

1. Install wall-hung boilers where indicated on Drawings using suitable hangers.

Comply with manufacturer's mounting instructions. Provide additional cross

bracing as required.

B. Install gas-fired boilers according to International Fuel Gas Code.

C. Assemble and install boiler trim.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.


A. Comply with requirements for hydronic piping specified in applicable Division 23

Sections.

B. Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors

of materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in


C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. When installing piping adjacent to boiler, allow space for service and maintenance of

condensing boilers. Arrange piping for easy removal of condensing boilers.

E. Install condensate drain piping to condensate-neutralization unit and from neutralization

unit to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full size of connection. Install piping

with a minimum of 2 percent downward slope in direction of flow.

F. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of

gas-train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

G. Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve, and

union or flange at each connection.

H. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

3.4 DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Boiler Venting:

1. Comply with requirements in applicable Division 23 Sections.

2. Comply with all boiler manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Connect wiring in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 7 June 19, 2020




D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment

designation and circuit number feeding connection.





B. Connect control wiring in accordance with applicable Division 26 Sections.

C. Install nameplate for each control connection, indicating field control panel designation

and I/O control designation feeding connection.







1. Perform installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

Adjust air-fuel ratio and combustion.



a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety

set points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Boiler will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied

FVHD 5195 5:235216 - 8 June 19, 2020

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to applicable Division 01

Sections. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.

1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified.

2. Provide not less than two hours of training.

3. Train personnel in operation and maintenance and to obtain maximum efficiency

in plant operation.

4. Provide instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that are

coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Obtain Owner sign-off that training is complete.

6. Owner training shall be held at Project site.


FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 236200 - PACKAGED COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged, refrigerant compressor and condenser units for outdoor

installation, which is not part of a ductless split system assembly.

1. Condensing units that are part of ductless split system assembly are specified in the

applicable Division 23 Section.

2. Provide all accessories, appurtenances and associated devices per the condensing

unit manufacturer’s recommendations for a complete and operable system.

3. The paired AHU and CU must be submitted as one submittal. The AHU and CU

are required to be manufactured by the same company.


A. Product Data: For each compressor and condenser unit. Include rated capacities,

operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include equipment

dimensions, weights and structural loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection.

B. Shop Drawings: For compressor and condenser units. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which compressor and condenser units will be attached.

2. Liquid and vapor pipe sizes.

3. Refrigerant specialties.

4. Piping including connections, oil traps, and double risers.

5. Compressors.

6. Evaporators.

FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 2 June 19, 2020


C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressor and condenser units to include in





application.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system according to ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for

Refrigeration Systems."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6, "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in applicable Division

03 Sections.

B. Coordinate location of piping and electrical rough-ins.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of compressor and condenser units that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Compressor failure.

b. Condenser coil leak.

2. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substantial

Completion.

3. Warranty Period (Components Other Than Compressor): One years from date of

Substantial Completion.

FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPRESSOR AND CONDENSER UNITS, AIR COOLED



1. Aaon.

2. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.

3. Daikin Applied.

B. General Description:

1. Condensing unit shall include compressors, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser

fans, suction and liquid connection valves.

2. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coil and run

testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the

controls compartment. 3. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and

caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel. 4. Unit components shall be labeled, including split system piping stub outs,

refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components. 5. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit. 6. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and

shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door. 7. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the

exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment.

C. Construction:

1. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired and shipped in one

section.

2. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor application. 3. Access to compressors and controls components shall be through hinged access

doors with quarter turn, lockable handles.

4. Access to condenser coils and fans is through removable access panels. 5. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no

visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in

accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. 6. Unit shall include lifting lugs and shall be designed with forklift slots. 7. Unit shall include factory wired control panel compartment LED service lights. 8. Unit shall include factory installed, painted galvanized steel condenser coil guards

on the face of the condenser coil.

D. Electrical

1. Unit shall be provided with standard power block for connecting power to the unit.

2. Control circuit transformer and wiring shall provide 24 VAC control voltage from

the line voltage provided to the unit.




FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 4 June 19, 2020

3. Unit shall have a 5kAIC SCCR.

4. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and factory wired, non-fused

disconnect switch.

5. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired 115V, 12 amp GFI

outlet in the unit control panel.

6. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down all

motors in the unit if the electrical phases are more that 10% out of balance on

voltage, the voltage is more that 10% under design voltage, or on phase reversal.

E. Refrigeration System

1. Compressors shall be R-410A scroll type with thermal overload protection and

individually circuited. Each compressor shall be furnished with a crankcase heater.

2. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be

accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged access doors shall

provide access to the compressors.

3. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor

manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any

transmission of sound from the compressors into the building area.

4. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and

manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings

on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and service valves for liquid and

suction connections. Liquid line filter driers shall be factory provided and installed.

Field installed refrigerant circuits shall include the low side cooling components,

refrigerant, thermal expansion valve, liquid line, insulated hot gas line and

insulated suction line.

5. Unit shall include a factory holding charge of R-410A refrigerant and oil.

6. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with a 5 minute off delay timer to prevent

compressor short cycling. Each capacity stage shall be equipped with an

adjustable 20 second delay timer to prevent multiple capacity stages from starting

simultaneously.

7. The unit shall be capable of stable cooling operation to a minimum of 55 deg F

outdoor temperature.

8. Lead refrigeration circuit(s) shall include a 10-100% variable capacity compressor.

9. Where hot gas reheat is indicated: Lead refrigeration circuit shall be provided with

modulating hot gas reheat valve, electronic controller, liquid line receiver, supply

air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal that enables

the dehumidification mode of operation, and includes supply air temperature

control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space. The

matching indoor air handler must include a hot gas reheat coil.

10. Units shall be provided with a suction pressure transducer on each refrigeration

circuit.

F. Fans

1. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fans.

2. Fan motor shall be weather protected, single phase, direct drive, and open drip

proof with inherent overload protection.

FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 5 June 19, 2020

3. Condenser fans shall be high efficiency electronically commutated motor driven

with factory installed head pressure control module. Condenser airflow shall

continuously modulate based on head pressure and cooling operation shall be

allowed down to 35 deg F.

G. Coils

1. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper

tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end

casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

2. Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10 deg F of refrigerant sub-cooling.

3. Coils shall be hydrogen or helium leak tested.

H. Controls:

1. Unit shall be provided with factory supplied and factory installed controller with

the paired air handling unit.

2. Start up and maintenance requirements shall be complied with to ensure safe and

correct operation of the unit.

3. Minimum control functions shall include:

a. Control wire terminal blocks.

b. Compressor lockout on auto-reset safety until reset from thermostat.

c. Unit shall utilize the Condensing units manufacturer’s diagnostic board that

provides:

1) System Pressure Trip fault code indication.

2) Short Cycling fault code indication.

3) Locked Rotor fault code indication.

4) Open Circuit fault code indication.

5) Reverse Phase 3 fault code indication.

6) Low Voltage fault code indication.

7) Anti-short cycle protection.

8) Phase reversal protection.

4. Minimum safety devices which are equipped with automatic reset shall include:

a. High discharge pressure cutout (manual reset).

b. Low pressure cutout.

5. Refer to applicable Division 23 Sections for additional requirements.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and




FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 6 June 19, 2020

2. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit. Provide unistrut

frame for disconnect switch mounting and attach to the roof curb. Provide

crossbracing as required to ensure a stable support system. Do not mount

disconnect switch to impede airflow.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate compressor and condenser units according to ARI 460.

B. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy

Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings," Section 6,

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

C. Testing Requirements: Factory test sound-power-level ratings according to ARI 270.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of

compressor and condenser units.

B. Examine roughing-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where compressor and condenser

units will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb, firmly anchored in locations indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install compressor and condenser units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases.

Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in




C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that are not

factory mounted.

FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance

of equipment.

B. Connect refrigerant piping to air-cooled compressor and condenser units; maintain

required access to unit. Install furnished field-mounted accessories. Refrigerant piping

and specialties are specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,

including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system with refrigerant and oil and test for

leaks. Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist.


proper motor operation and unit operation, product capability, and compliance

with requirements.



5. Verify proper airflow over coils.

C. Compressor and condenser units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



instructions and perform the following:

a. Inspect for physical damage to unit casing.

b. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight.

c. Clean units and inspect for construction debris.

d. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight.

e. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections.

f. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

FVHD 5195 5:236200 - 8 June 19, 2020

2. Lubricate bearings on fan motors.

3. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or

binding.

4. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.

5. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete

manufacturer's startup checklist.

6. Measure and record airflow and air temperature rise over coils.

7. Verify proper operation of condenser capacity control device.

8. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration

transmission to structure.

9. After startup and performance test, lubricate bearings.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain compressor and condenser units.


for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining unit.




FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 237313.16 - INDOOR, AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes indoor, air-handling units that are factory assembled.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit.


components and profiles, and finishes.



3. Include unit dimensions and weight.

4. Include cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

5. Fans:

a. Include certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.

b. Include certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Include fan construction and accessories.

d. Include motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

6. Include certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions

indicated.

7. Include filters with performance characteristics.

8. Include dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, semi-custom air handling

unit.





3. Detail fabrication and assembly of indoor, semi-custom air-handling units, as well

as procedures and diagrams.


FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale,

showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades.


C. Startup service reports.


E. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency,





1. Filters: One set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: One set(s) for each access door.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a limited “parts only” warranty for a period of 12 months

from the date of equipment start up or 18 months from the date of original equipment

shipment from the factory, whichever is less. Warranty shall cover material and

workmanship that prove defective, within the specified warranty period, provided

manufacturer’s written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have

been followed. Warranty excludes parts associated with routine maintenance, such as

belts and air filters.


A. Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236, Safety

Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.

B. Unit shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995/CSA C22.2 No. 236, Safety

Standard for Heating and Cooling Equipment.

C. Unit shall be safety certified by ETL and ETL US listed. Unit nameplate shall include the

ETL/ETL Canada label.

D. Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to AHRI 430

and shall be listed and labeled by AHRI.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 3 June 19, 2020

E. AMCA 301 or AHRI 260: Air-handling unit fan sound ratings shall comply with

AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data," or

AHRI 260, "Sound Rating of Ducted Air Moving and Conditioning Equipment."

F. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

G. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to minimum 450-psig internal pressure and to minimum

300-psig internal pressure while underwater, according to AHRI 410 and ASHRAE 33.


A. Unit shall be wrapped in plastic prior to shipment to prevent damage during transport

and thereafter while in storage awaiting installation.

B. Follow Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual instructions for rigging, moving,

and unloading the unit at its final location.

C. Unit shall be handled carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures and finish.

D. Unit shall be stored in a clean, dry place protected from construction traffic in

accordance with the Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual.

1.10 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS




application.

B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of

air-handling units and components.

C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 -

"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding positive/negative 8-inch wg of internal static pressure, without exceeding a

midpoint deflection of 0.0042 inch/inch of panel span.

F. Casing Leakage Performance: ASHRAE 111, Class 6 leakage or better at plus or minus 8

inch wg.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.2 MANUFACTURERS



1. Aaon.


3. Daikin Applied.

2.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. Indoor air handling units shall include filters, supply fans, DX evaporator coil, reheat coil

(where indicated), hot water coil, mixing box, and unit controls.

B. Unit shall have a draw-through supply fan configuration and discharge air vertically.

C. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the DX coil, leak

testing of the hot water coil, and run testing of the supply fans and factory wired electrical

system. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit.

D. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution

areas for safety and to assist service personnel.

E. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system

components and electrical and controls components.

F. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.

G. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be

affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.

H. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of

the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.

2.4 UNIT CONSTRUCTION

A. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact

resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.

B. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 6.25. Foam

insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in

accordance with ASTM D1929-11 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F.

C. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a

thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture

accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer

through the panel and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.

D. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Sealing

shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air




FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 5 June 19, 2020

leakage. Piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to

reduce air leakage.

E. Access to filters shall be through hinged access door with quarter turn fasteners.

F. Access to cooling coil shall be through hinged access door with lockable quarter turn

handles.

G. Access to heating coil shall be through hinged access door with lockable quarter turn

handles.

H. Access to external control panel shall be through hinged access door with tooled entry.

I. Access to supply fan shall be through an access door with removable pin hinges and

lockable quarter turn handles.

J. Access doors shall be flush mounted to cabinetry.

K. Units with a cooling coil shall include sloped 304 stainless steel drain pan with a 1" MPT

fitting connection.

L. Cooling coil shall be mechanically supported above the drain pan by multiple supports

that allow drain pan cleaning and coil removal.

M. Unit shall include factory wired control panel compartment LED service lights.

2.5 ELECTRICAL

A. Unit shall be provided with an external control panel with separate low voltage control

wiring with conduit and high voltage power wiring with conduit between the control

panel and the unit. Control panel shall be field mounted.

B. Unit shall be provided with standard power block for connecting power to the unit.

C. Unit shall include a factory installed 24V control circuit transformer.

D. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down all motors

in the unit if the electrical phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, the

voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal.

2.6 SUPPLY FANS

A. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.

B. Blower and motor assembly shall be dynamically balanced.

C. Motor shall be a high efficiency electronically commutated motor (ECM).

D. Blower and motor assembly shall be mounted on rubber isolators.

E. ECM driven supply fan CFM setpoint shall be set with factory installed controller.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.7 COOLING COIL

A. Comply with AHRI 410.

B. Coil shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes

with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin

design shall be sine wave rippled.

C. Coil shall two circuits and interlaced circuitry.

D. Coil shall be hydrogen or helium leak tested.

E. Coil shall be furnished with factory installed thermostatic expansion valves. The sensing

bulbs shall be field installed on the suction line immediately outside the cabinet.

F. Coil shall have external piping connections. Liquid and suction connections shall be

sweat connection. Coil connections shall be labeled, extend beyond the unit casing, and

be factory sealed on both the interior and exterior of the unit casing to minimize air

leakage.

2.8 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

A. Air handling unit and matching condensing unit shall be capable of operation as an R-

410A split system air conditioner.

B. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type

refrigerant flow control.

C. Hot gas reheat (where indicated):

1. Modulating hot gas reheat shall be provided on the refrigeration circuit. Air

handling unit shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, a check valve on the

liquid line, and a check valve on the hot gas reheat line. The matching

condensing unit must include modulating 3-way reheat valve, liquid line receiver,

electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control

signal terminal. This allows the system to have a dehumidification mode of

operation and includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air

temperature swings and overcooling of the space. Reheat line connections shall be

labeled, extend beyond the unit casing and be located near the suction and liquid

line connections for ease of field connection. Connections shall be factory sealed

on both the interior and exterior of the unit casing to minimize air leakage.

2.9 HEATING COIL

A. Comply with AHRI 410.

B. Coil shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and be hydrogen or helium

leak tested.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 7 June 19, 2020

C. Coil shall be designed and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically

bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

D. Coil shall have external piping connections. Supply and return connections shall be

sweat connection. Coil connections shall be labeled, extend beyond the unit casing, and

be factory sealed on both the interior and exterior of the unit casing to minimize air

leakage.

E. Control valves shall be field supplied and field installed.

F. Coils shall be located in the preheat position upstream of the cooling coil.

2.10 FILTERS

A. Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel filters with an MERV rating of 8, upstream

of the cooling coil.

2.11 MIXING BOX

A. Damper access shall be through service access door.

B. Unit shall contain a mixing box with return air opening and outside air opening.

C. Return air opening shall contain an adjustable, motor operated outside air damper

assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge

seals and end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more

than 20 cfm of leakage per sq ft. at 4 in. w.g. air pressure differential across the damper.

Low leakage dampers shall be Class 2 AMCA certified, in accordance with AMCA

Standard 511. Dampers shall be controlled by a 2-position actuator.

D. Outside air opening shall contain an adjustable, motor operated outside air damper

assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge

seals and end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more

than 20 cfm of leakage per sq ft. at 4 in. w.g. air pressure differential across the damper.

Low leakage dampers shall be Class 2 AMCA certified, in accordance with AMCA

Standard 511. Dampers shall be controlled by a 2-position actuator.

2.12 CONTROLS

A. Unit shall be provided with an external control panel with separate low voltage control

wiring with conduit and high voltage power wiring with conduit between the control

panel and the unit. Control panel shall be field mounted.

B. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit.

Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory tested.

C. Controller shall be capable of stand-alone operation with unit configuration, setpoint

adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and occupancy scheduling

available without dependence on a building management system.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 8 June 19, 2020

D. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for occupancy

scheduling.

E. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values without the

use of a battery, in the event of a power failure.

A. Refer to applicable Division 23 Sections for Sequences of Operation and additional

Control Features.

1. Provide additional controllers and I/O devices as required in the applicable

Division 23 Sections to facilitate the sequence of operation and associated points

list.

B. Unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and

occupancy scheduling shall be accomplished with connection to interface module with

LCD screen and input keypad, interface module with touch screen, or with connection to

PC with free configuration software. Controller shall be capable of connection with other

factory installed and factory provided unit controllers with individual unit configuration,

setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, and occupancy scheduling available from a

single unit. Connection between unit controllers shall be with a modular cable.

Controller shall be capable of communicating and integrating with a LonWorks or

BACnet network.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation.

Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold

damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, refrigerant, and condensate drainage piping systems

and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Coordinate

sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Comply

with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in applicable




FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 9 June 19, 2020

B. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural-steel support frame using threaded steel

rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices


C. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service

and maintenance.

D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

E. Install filter-gauge, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter

gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter

gauges on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and

downstream of filters.

F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements

in applicable Division 23 Sections.




B. Where installing piping adjacent to air-handling unit, allow for service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible

connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using, ASTM B88, Type DWV copper tubing. Extend to

nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and

install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in applicable Division 23

Sections. Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install

balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in applicable Division 23

Sections. Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.


A. Connect wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.




D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment

designation and circuit number feeding connection.

FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 10 June 19, 2020





B. Connect control wiring according to applicable Division 23 and Division 26 Sections.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



instructions.

2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that

proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing

operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with

factory-recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.

7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.

8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain

minimum outdoor-air setting.

9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.

10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.

11. Install new, clean filters.

12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.

Adjust fan to indicated rpm.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.7 ADJUSTING


B. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for

HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial


FVHD 5195 5:237313.16 - 11 June 19, 2020

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

3.8 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling

unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling

units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan

wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.




1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and

connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to

confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.



B. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do

not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.


for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining unit.




FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 238127 – DUCTLESS SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ductless split-system air-conditioning units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.

B. Unit types and manufacturers are based on requirements of maximum refrigerant piping

distance.

C. Contractor to provide all necessary controls, valving, wiring, wiring conduits,

interconnecting piping, manufacturer’s recommended equipment and installation

options, and system appurtenances to facilitate the intended use and satisfy the

requirements for a fully operational system.

D. Power for ductless split system basis of design is provided through the corresponding

condensing unit. Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

Provide all components required by to provide a complete working system.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Include performance data in

terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor

requirements, and electrical characteristics.


work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each

field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 2 June 19, 2020



B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in



A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of split-

system units and are based on the specific system indicated.



application.

C. Units shall be rated (when matched with appropriate outdoor unit) per ARI Standard

210/240. Units shall be certified by UL and CSA.

D. Condensing unit construction shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, latest revision, and

with the NEC.

E. Air cooled condenser coils shall be leak tested and certified by the manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in


B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations



A. Unit to be stored and handled per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Unit to be shipped complete with DX cooling/heating (heat pump systems only) coil, fan,

fan motor, piping connectors, electrical controls, solid-state electromechanical control

system, and evaporator unit mounting brackets.

FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 3 June 19, 2020

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace

components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.




1. Filters: One set(s) for each indoor unit.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof and base curbs, equipment supports, and roof/wall

penetrations with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. LG Electronics, Inc.

2. Mitsubishi Electric & Electronics USA, Inc.

3. SANYO North America Corporation.

2.2 SINGLE ZONE SYSTEMS

A. Outdoor Unit:

1. General:

a. The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant.

b. Each system shall have one air source outdoor unit.




FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 4 June 19, 2020

c. The refrigerant circuit shall be piped to a single matching indoor unit to

effectively and efficiently control the heating or cooling operation of the

system.

d. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be insulated per


e. Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit and indoor unit

shall perform functions to efficiently operate the single zone system and

communicate via power/transmission cable.

f. The outdoor unit shall be internally assembled, wired and piped from the

factory.

g. The factory assembled system shall have the outdoor unit fitted with

refrigerant strainer, check valves, oil separator, accumulator, 4-way reversing

valve, electronic expansion valve, high side and low side refrigerant charging

ports, and a service port.

2. Piping capabilities: The system shall be rated for the vertical lift and horizontal pipe

runs the indicated by the Drawings.

3. Defrost Operations:

a. The outdoor unit shall be capable of auto defrost operation to melt

accumulated ice off the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle

control shall be based on outdoor ambient temperatures and outdoor unit

heat exchanger temperatures.

4. Oil Management:

a. The outdoor unit shall have an oil injection mechanism to ensure a

consistent film of oil on all moving compressor parts at low speed.

b. The outdoor unit shall have an oil separator to separate oil mixed with the

refrigerant gas during compression and return oil to the compressor.

5. Cabinet:

a. The outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of pre-coated metal.

b. The front/side panels of the outdoor unit shall be removable type for access

to internal components.

c. Outdoor unit cabinet shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt

spray test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.

6. Fan Assembly:

a. Each ton outdoor unit shall be equipped with one direct drive variable speed

propeller fan with Brushless Digitally controlled motor with a horizontal air

discharge.

b. The fan blades shall be made of Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene material.

c. The fan(s) shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings.

d. The fan motor(s) shall have variable speed.

e. The fan(s) shall have a raised guard to help prevent contact with moving

parts.

FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 5 June 19, 2020

7. Outdoor Coil:

a. The outdoor unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins

mechanically bonded on copper tubing.

b. The aluminum fins shall have factory applied corrosion resistant material.

c. Coil coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test

procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.

d. The outdoor unit coil shall be factory tested to a pressure of 600 psig.

e. The outdoor unit cabinet shall have a coil guard.

8. Compressor:

a. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with one hermetically sealed, digitally

controlled, inverter driven twin-rotary compressor.

b. The inverter driven, digitally controlled compressor shall be capable of

operating in 1 Hz increments.

c. The compressor shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets.

d. The compressor shall use a factory charge.

e. The compressor bearing(s) shall have TFE coating.

f. The compressor shall be equipped with over-current protection.

9. Sensors:

a. The outdoor unit shall be factory equipped with a minimum of the following

sensors:

1) Suction temperature.

2) Discharge temperature.

3) High pressure.

4) Low Pressure.

5) Outdoor temperature.

6) Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature.

B. Indoor Unit – Wall Mounted:

1. General:

a. Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.

b. Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.

c. Unit shall be attached to a manufacturer-furnished installation plate/bracket

that secures unit to the wall.

2. Casing/Panel:

a. Unit case shall be manufactured of heavy-duty Acrylonitrile Butadiene

Styrene and High Impact Polystyrene plastic.

b. Unit case shall have a pearl white finish.

c. The front surface of the unit shall have an architectural curved panel with

pearl white finish.

FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 6 June 19, 2020

3. Cabinet Assembly:

a. Unit shall have one supply air outlet and one return air inlet.

b. Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature thermistors for

1) Return air

2) Refrigerant entering coil

3) Refrigerant leaving coil

c. Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with the outdoor

unit.

d. Unit shall have the following functions as standard

1) Self-diagnostic function

2) Auto restart function

3) Auto changeover function

4) Auto clean function

5) Dehumidifying function

6) Hot Start

7) Sleep mode

e. Unit shall include refrigerant pipe and condensate drain pipe connections.

4. Fan Assembly:

a. The unit shall have a direct drive, cross flow fan made of high strength ABS

plastic.

b. The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled with permanently lubricated

and sealed ball bearings.

c. The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber

grommets.

d. The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based direct digitally

controlled algorithm.

e. The indoor fan shall have the following minimum settings: Low, Med, High,

and Auto.

f. The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most effectively achieve the

set-point.

g. Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide flow of air in up

and down direction for uniform airflow.

h. Unit shall have factory installed motorized guide vane to control the

direction of flow of air from side to side.

5. Filter Assembly:

a. The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied primary removable,

washable filter.

b. The filter access shall be from the front of the unit.

6. Coil Assembly:

FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 7 June 19, 2020

a. Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins mechanically

bonded on copper tubing.

b. Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below the coil.

c. Unit shall be designed for gravity drain.

d. Unit shall have a factory insulated drain hose to handle condensate.

e. Unit shall have provision of 45-degree flare refrigerant pipe connections

f. The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551 psig.

g. All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be insulated per


7. Condensate Sensor Connection:

a. The unit shall include a factory installed condensate sensor connection

compatible with the manufacturer’s condensate sensor.

8. Microprocessor Control:

a. The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller capable of

performing functions necessary to operate the system.

b. The unit shall be able to communicate with the outdoor unit using a field

supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 4 core, stranded and shielded

power/communication cable.

c. The unit shall be capable of setting Cooling Only operation.

d. The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the five operating

modes:

1) Auto changeover

2) Heating

3) Cooling

4) Dry

5) Fan only

9. Electrical:

a. The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/- 10% of the

rated voltage.

10. Controls:

a. The indoor unit shall be supplied with a wireless handheld controller and a

wired controller.

11. Sequence of operation:

a. Cooling: When the space temperature rises above manufacturer's


and condensing unit shall energize. When temperature drops below

setpoint, the reverse will occur.

b. Heating: When the space temperature falls below the manufacturer's


FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 8 June 19, 2020

and condensing unit shall energize. When temperature rises above setpoint,

the reverse will occur.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices

securely fastened to building structure.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on cast-in-place

concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and

foundations specified in applicable Division 03 Sections.



D. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings.

Install tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS



B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of

unit.

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply ducts to

split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors specified in applicable



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections.




FVHD 5195 5:238127 - 9 June 19, 2020





C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.4 STARTUP SERVICE



instructions.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.


for startup, shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

2. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Schedule training with at least 7 days advance notice.


FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 238239.13 - CABINET UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cabinet unit heaters with centrifugal fans and hot-water coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. DDC: Direct digital control.

C. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

D. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.




3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

equipment.

5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Finish colors for units with factory-applied color finishes.

FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to




2. Structural members to which cabinet unit heaters will be attached.



5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.


c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cabinet unit heaters to include in emergency,





contents.

1. Cabinet Unit-Heater Filters: Furnish one spare filter(s) for each filter installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Rittling, Hydro-Air Components, Inc.


3. IEC (International Environmental Corporation); LSB Industries.




FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested unit complying with AHRI 440.



application.


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.4 COIL SECTION INSULATION

A. Insulation Materials: ASTM C1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall have erosion-

resistant coating to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.

2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. at 75 deg F mean

temperature.

3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E84.

4. Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C916 and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

2.5 CABINETS

A. Material: Steel with baked-enamel finish with manufacturer's standard paint, in color

selected by Architect.

1. Horizontal Unit, Exposed Bottom Panels: Minimum 0.0677-inch- thick

galvanized sheet steel, removable panels secured with tamperproof cam fasteners

and safety chain.

2. Recessed Flanges: Steel, finished to match cabinet.

3. Control Access Door: Key operated.

4. Extended Piping Compartment: 8-inch- wide piping end pocket.

2.6 FILTERS

A. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: According to ASHRAE 52.2.

B. Material: Pleated cotton-polyester media, MERV 7.

FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 4 June 19, 2020

2.7 COILS

A. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer

than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum

entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

2.8 CONTROLS

A. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.

1. Fan: Forward curved, double width, centrifugal, directly connected to motor;

thermoplastic or painted-steel wheels and aluminum, painted-steel, or galvanized-

steel fan scrolls.

2. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor board.

Comply with requirements in applicable Division23 Sections.

3. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.

B. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in applicable Division 23

Sections.

C. Interface with DDC System for HVAC Requirements:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at central workstation.

3. Interface shall be BAC-net compatible for central DDC system for HVAC

workstation and include the following functions:

a. Adjust set points.

b. Cabinet unit-heater start, stop, and operating status.

c. Data inquiry, including supply-air and room-air temperature.

d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.

4. Wall-mounted temperature sensor.

D. Electrical Connection: Factory-wired motors and controls for a single field connection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive cabinet unit heaters for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations

before unit-heater installation.


FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cabinet unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Suspend cabinet unit heaters from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators

are specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights

to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control

sensors with Drawings and room details before installation.

D. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks of Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to cabinet unit heater's factory, hot-water piping package. Install the

piping package if shipped loose.

D. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water

connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of

cabinet unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in applicable Division 23 Sections.

F. Ground equipment according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

G. Connect wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.






2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning


B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


FVHD 5195 5:238239.13 - 6 June 19, 2020

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cabinet unit heaters.


starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining cabinet unit

heaters




FVHD 5195 5:238239.16 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 238239.16 - PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes propeller unit heaters with hot-water coils.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

C. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.




3. Include location and size of each field connection.

4. Include details of anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

equipment.

5. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics,

furnished specialties, and accessories.

6. Indicate location and arrangement of piping valves and specialties.

7. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls.


FVHD 5195 5:238239.16 - 2 June 19, 2020


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to




2. Structural members to which propeller unit heaters will be attached.




a. Lighting fixtures.


c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For propeller unit heaters to include in emergency,


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Engineered Air.

2. Rittling.

3. Sterling.

2.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in horizontal discharge configuration

with adjustable discharge louvers.



application.



FVHD 5195 5:238239.16 - 3 June 19, 2020


A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

2.4 HOUSINGS

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and -tested

propeller unit heaters before shipping.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements

in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for

vertical units.

2.5 COILS

A. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate hot-water propeller unit-heater coils according

to ASHRAE 33.

B. Hot-Water Coil: Copper tube, minimum 0.025-inch wall thickness, with mechanically

bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch and rated for a minimum working

pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 325 deg F, with

manual air vent. Test for leaks to 350 psig underwater.

2.6 FAN AND MOTOR

A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan

venturi.

B. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed. Comply with requirements in applicable


2.7 CONTROLS

A. Control Devices:

1. Unit-mounted, fan-speed switch.

2. Unit-mounted thermostat.

FVHD 5195 5:238239.16 - 4 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations

before unit-heater installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb.

C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric

hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified and vibration hangers are


3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Piping

installation requirements are specified in the following applicable Division 23 Sections.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995.

D. Unless otherwise indicated, install union and gate or ball valve on supply-water

connection and union and calibrated balancing valve on return-water connection of

propeller unit heater. Hydronic specialties are specified in applicable Division 23

Sections.

E. Ground equipment according to applicable Division 26 Sections.

F. Connect wiring according to applicable Division 26 Sections.






FVHD 5195 5:238239.16 - 5 June 19, 2020

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation

and electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning


B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain propeller unit heaters.


starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining unit heaters.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to applicable Division 01 Sections.

3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance

notice.


PART 6 - ELECTRICAL WORK

FVHD-5195 6:16521-1 EEG 1228C June 19, 2020

SECTION 16521 – EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior pole mounted luminaires 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays. 3. Poles and accessories. 4. Relocation of existing fixtures

B. See Division 16 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings.

C. Refer to Electrical Plans for circuit designations, conductor sizes, and grounding conductor

sizes and lighting system controls for on-site lighting fixtures. D Coordinate with the Owner & Owner’s security consultant on the installation of security

cameras on selected light poles. Furnish additional “data” conduit within selected light pole bases when/if requested by the Owner. The conduits shall provide a wiring pathway between the interior of the light pole and subgrade.

1.2 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports and supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

B. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

C. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire, calculated and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4.

1. Wind speed for calculating wind load for poles is a minimum of 120 mph. 2. Coordinate with the Owner on the installation of security cameras on selected poles, if

requested, and account for this equipment on the light pole & footing shop drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, footing, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

FVHD-5195 6:16521-2 EEG 1228C June 19, 2020


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. LUMINAIRES 1. Manufacturer shall warrant its commercial outdoor light emitting diode (LED) fixtures,

including the LED arrays and the LED drivers and integral control devices, to be free from defect in material and workmanship for a period of five (5) years from the date of Substantial Completion. a. The LED arrays in the Product(s) will be considered defective in material or

workmanship only if a total of 15% or more of the individual light emitting diodes in the Product(s) fail to illuminate.

b. The painted finish of the Product(s) will be considered defective in material or workmanship only if there is substantial deterioration, in the form of blistering, cracking, or peeling. The painted finish is not warranted against fading or chalking, as Product(s) may naturally fade or chalk over time due to normal aging.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRE & POLE MANUFACTURERS

A. In Exterior Lighting Schedule:

1. Pole Mounted Light fixture: Basis of design is “D-Series Area Size 1” DSX1 LED Area

Luminaire by Lithonia lighting, or approved equal. a. Model DSX 1 LED or APPROVED equal. b. Switching power supply (120V-277V) shall match available power in new building.

See Electrical plans for circuit designation, before ordering power supply. c. Pole mounted fixtures are mounted on a concrete base. d. Fixtures are mounted at 20’ from ground level. Each pole base will extend 24

inches above grade. e. The pole shall be the 4” square heavy duty square steel pole CPS-1-4011-18-BRZ

General Structures (as per plans), or approved equal. Poles are available from General Structures, Inc., Hapco Pole Co., Nova Pole International, or approved equal. (refer to drawings for more information)

f. Pole & Fixture color shall be bronze, or as approved by the Architect and Owner. g. Additional manufacturers for all light fixtures should be considered and may

include, but are not limited to Spalding, Gardco, Holophane, Kim, Cooper or Hubbell lighting or approved equal.

FVHD-5195 6:16521-3 EEG 1228C June 19, 2020

h. Contractor shall submit shop drawings of all light fixtures for review by the Engineer or the Owner prior to purchase and installation. Include delivery schedule of lighting to confirm product availability.

2.2 CONDUITS

A. All conduits shall be underground rated electrical conduits, minimum 1.5” diameter or as required by the local power utility. Also refer to Electrical Plans.

B. Additional (separate) conduits shall be run to selected light poles for security cameras, where noted on the plans. Include conduits inside light pole footing bases.

C. Refer to electrical plans for details & specifications for flexible conduit used for data cables inside site lighting poles.

D. See electrical drawings for specifications of flexible conduit used for data cables.

2.4 HAND HOLES FOR SITE LIGHTING & DATA CABLES

A. Underground Enclosures; Concrete polymer resin hand hole & junction box, Tier 22

1. Basis of Design: Hubbell Power Systems, Quazite Box or approved equal. a. Minimum Size Box: Model PD1324BG26, minimum 24 inches deep

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire as applicable. Install all wiring and connections per NEC.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the

application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming. Verify aiming of ground mounted LED flag pole lighting, before setting into concrete base.

D. Include all required conductors and grounding conductors sized in accordance with the NEC, latest edition, for the power requirements and distances shown on the plans. Maximum 3% voltage drop permitted. Minimum wire size for on-site luminaires is #10 AWG.

3.2 POLE INSTALLATION

A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.

FVHD-5195 6:16521-4 EEG 1228C June 19, 2020

B. Clearances: Verify the location of underground utilities before laying out the light pole bases. Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 3 feet 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 4 feet 3. Trees: 15 feet

C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer. 1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application

and approved by manufacturer. 2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrink or expanding concrete

grout firmly packed to fill space. 3. Install base covers, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

E. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.3 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or coating the concrete with an alkaline resistant coating/paint.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.

FVHD-5195 6:16521-5 EEG 1228C June 19, 2020

2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.

3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. Conduits shall be buried at a minimum of 24 inches below grade and deeper as needed to route around other underground utilities. PVC conduits shall be solvent welded.

B. Install traceable warning tape 12” above the conduit, at top of sand backfill.

C. Bank run sand shall be used 6” below and around conduits and 12” above.

D. Compact conduit trenches per earthwork and trenching specifications. E. Install additional conduits in light pole bases for security cameras if required by the Owner.

Camera installation & wiring will be by others.


FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL

1.1 GENERAL 1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK 1.3 INTENT OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.4 PROPOSAL PREPARATION 1.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 1.6 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 1.7 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS 1.8 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES 1.9 TESTS 1.10 CLEANING 1.11 INSTRUCTING OWNER'S PERSONNEL 1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 1.13 GUARANTEE 1.14 ENTRANCE OF EQUIPMENT 1.15 VISIT TO SITE 1.16 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION, RFI(s) 1.17 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 1.18 SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 1.19 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING 1.20 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES 1.21 CONTINUITY OF INTERIOR BUILDING SERVICE UTILITIES 1.22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND HEATING 1.23 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (GENERAL) 1.24 COORDINATION DRAWINGS 1.25 TRADE CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S AND SUB-CONTRACTORS LIST, KEYMEN RESUMES 2.2 SUBMITTALS 2.3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.4 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 2.5 VIBRATION ELIMINATION 2.6 NOISE CONTROL 2.7 INSERTS, HANGER SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, FASTENINGS 2.8 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 2.9 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS 2.10 PIPING AND CONDUIT SLEEVES 2.11 SMOKE/FIRESTOPPING (MATERIALS) 2.12 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, SMOKE DETECTORS/SMOKE DETECTOR CONTROL

PART 3 - EXECUTION

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 2 June 19, 2020

3.1 METHOD OF PROCEDURE 3.2 PROTECTION OF WORK 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.4 CONCRETE AND MASONRY 3.5 SUPPORTS 3.6 LINTELS 3.7 ESCUTCHEONS 3.8 MACHINERY GUARDS 3.9 ROOFING WORK 3.10 PAINTING AND FINISHING 3.11 LUBRICATION 3.12 ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION 3.13 ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS 3.14 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 3.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 3.16 ABANDONMENT, REMOVAL AND RELOCATION 3.17 SMOKE AND FIRESTOPPING (METHODS) 3.18 SUBSURFACE CONCEALED UNKNOWN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS 3.19 CONCRETE PATCHING (PROCEDURE) 3.20 TEMPORARY PARTITIONS 3.21 INITIAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.22 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 3.23 INDEMNIFICATION 3.24 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES 3.25 FORMS

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 3 June 19, 2020

PART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. The conditions of Division 01 apply to each and every Trade Contractor or other person

or persons supplying any material or labor entering this building, either directly or

indirectly. In the event of a conflict between Section 260010 and Division 01, the terms

of Division 01 shall govern.

B. One Building Trade, the Electrical Building Trade, will be covered by these General

Requirements Electrical.

C. For simplicity, this Building Trade will be referred to further herein as the Electrical Trade

Contractor. The Electrical Specifications and all Electrical Drawings, together with all

addenda make-up the Electrical Contract Documents, and are a part of the “Project

Contract Documents”, as described throughout these specifications.


Building Trade.





1.2 SCOPE AND OBJECTIVES OF THE ELECTRICAL WORK

A. The Scope and Objectives of the Electrical Work of this Project include, but are not

limited to:

1. Refer to Division 01 for Scope of Work and of Alternate Bids;

2. Periodic inspection of completed work and site conditions by the Electrical Trade

Contractor’s Project Manager to confirm compliance with contract documents and

verify suitability to receive subsequent work.

3. Provide electrical distribution, including panels, feeders and branch wiring;

4. Lighting fixtures, controls and wiring.

5. Provide convenience power outlets; and wiring

6. Prepare and submit as a shop drawing, minimum 1/4" to the foot scale sketches

indicating compliance with code clearance, and equipment manufacturer’s

recommended clearance for maintenance typical for all electrical equipment, gear

panels, electrical rooms and closets. Review clearance with owner’s maintenance

personnel prior to submitting shop drawing for review and prior to proceeding with

physical work.

7. Provide electrical system certification of inspection by an independent authorized

Electrical Inspection Agency.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 4 June 19, 2020

8. Emergency generator and auto-transfer switch.

9. Fire alarm and emergency lighting.

1.3 INTENT OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The intent of the Electrical Contract Documents is to include all items and labor

necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work of the Electrical Trade

Contractor. The Contract Documents of all Trades are complimentary to each other;

what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Performance of the

Electrical Trade Contractor is required only to the extent consistent with the Project

Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce

the desired results.





ambiguity or discrepancy, the Contractor shall comply with the higher cost product

(material plus labor), the more stringent requirement, and supply the better quality or

greater quantity of work.



following:


and labor necessary to install the equipment and systems specified. Use the


show all details which may affect the electrical bid proposal.

2. Include the work, as applicable, to remove and dispose of conduit, wiring, light

fixtures, devices, equipment and appurtenances, not required for new work, unless

otherwise indicated to be abandoned in place.






the following:


b. One Project Foreman.

5. Foreman must refine the detail, layout, coordination and fit of all of electrical




FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 5 June 19, 2020



7. Project Manager must organize, administrate, control and log the RFI process for

his trade. Where applicable, submit all RFI(s) for master RFI log maintained by

Lead/Prime Contractor.







By submitting a bid price, the Electrical Trade Contractor certifies that the Contract

Documents have been thoroughly reviewed and are sufficient for construction, and

that the Electrical Trade Contractor has adequate information to establish and

determine his responsibility for materials, methods, costs, and schedule.






Contract Documents.










whole.





peculiar to the machinery, apparatus or systems furnished and/or installed by the

Electrical Trade Contractor.



FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 6 June 19, 2020














A. The entire electrical system in all and/or in part must conform to all pertinent laws,





C. Electrical work performed by the Electrical Trade Contractor must comply with the






1. Qualifications: The EIA is to be an independent company from the Electrical Trade

Contractor, licensed by the NJ DCA Licensing Unit Division of Codes and

Standards, Electrical Sub-Code Area as an Electrical Inspector Industrial

Commercial Specialist (ICS) and a Master certified member of the International

Association of Electrical Inspectors.




levels.




FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 7 June 19, 2020




Electrical Trade Contractor at no additional cost to the Project.

1.9 TESTS







electrical work prior to completing the required tests, the Prime Contractor is responsible

for any additional costs related to completing the required tests.







jurisdiction.




F. Prove conclusively, by testing, that electrical systems operate properly, efficiently and



1.10 CLEANING



electrical work.

2. Cleaning drippings created by the electrical work, from finished work of other

Trades.

3. Cleaning, polishing, waxing of electrical work as required.


clean all electrical equipment and material to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 8 June 19, 2020



Owner in all details of operation of the equipment installed under the Electrical Contract

Documents.

B. Operate electrical equipment for sufficient length of time to satisfy Engineer that

requirements of Contract Documents have been fulfilled.

C. Prepare digital recording of each Owner training session on compact disc.






Operating and Maintenance Instructions, submit the final version of the form of three (3)

copies of printed instructions to the Owner. Bind instructions in separate, hardback, 3-

ring loose leaf binders.




"Operating and Maintenance Instructions - ELECTRICAL".





Engineer.


H. Provide copies of the as-built drawings in the manuals. (As-built drawings to be

submitted for review prior to O&M Submission).



Review Sheet.


K. Provide complete copy of the Fire alarm completion documentation. (Fire alarm

completion documentation to be submitted for review prior to O&M Submission).

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 9 June 19, 2020

L. Provide complete copy of the final Lighting Control System Operational Report. (Lighting

control system operational report to be submitted for review prior to O&M Submission).

M. Provide completer copy of the Electrical System Commissioning Report, if applicable.

N. All listed items are to be included in the O&M submission for the Engineer’s review.


1.13 GUARANTEE



letter written to the Electrical Trade Contractor.



repair or replace, at the Electrical Trade Contractor’s expense, any materials, equipment

or workmanship in which defects may develop and provide free service for all equipment


system by any of the Trade Contractors during construction does not constitute


guarantee period.




of the Owner.



for subject item.






not scale building openings, door widths and equipment or component sizes off the

drawings. Determine sizes from site measurements and the equipment manufacturer.






FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 10 June 19, 2020



B. Perform all necessary rigging required for completion of electrical work.











1.15 VISIT TO SITE



with the Owner.

















B. All RFI(s):

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 11 June 19, 2020

• Must be submitted in written form to the party designated at the construction phase

kick-off meeting;

• Must be consecutively numbered, dated, and logged as directed, during the kick-off

meeting;

• Those which are follow-up RFI(s), must use the same RFI number, with a sequential

submission number;

• Must list the RFI number of any reference RFI(s) used in the narrative;

• Must present: background; related drawings; specification articles; room, space




• Must be completed by the Electrical Trade Contractor’s Designated Project

Foreman, under the control and overview of the Electrical Trade Contractor’s

Project Manager;

• Must include Electrical Trade Contractor’s Project Foreman’s suggested resolution

to RFI;

• Must evidence a high level of fluency with the Contract Documents, all job


the Mechanical/Electrical Specifications including: Section 260010; the remaining

sections of Division 26; and other special system and equipment divisions of the

specifications.

C. The Electrical Trade Contractor’s designated Project Manager must demonstrate

familiarity with and responsibility for all RFI(s) prepared by the Project Foreman and must




discernable from the Contract Documents and/or clearly the responsibility of the

Electrical Trade Contractor must be answered by his Project Manager and resolved

between the Foreman and Project Manager prior to resorting to written RFI(s). The work

of the Project Manager must evidence: fluency with the methods and means anticipated

by the Electrical Trade Contractor during the bid phase to plan and complete the work;

fluency with the Contract Documents, and all administrative issues related thereto.












FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 12 June 19, 2020

commercial CAD drafting service if Electrical Trade Contractor does not have CAD

capabilities in-house. As an option, if requested by the Electrical Trade Contractor, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the Electrical Contract Drawings may be

provided by the Engineer at a cost of $55.00, billable to the requesting Contractor. In


conditions:

1. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground electrical

transmission and distribution equipment, and the like.



Owner. Include code and equipment service clearances.


equipment and materials installed.








intended.








1.19 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Electrical Trade Contractor must perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping

necessary for completion of work for which he is responsible. All excavation is

considered classified.

B. Remove from premises or deposit as directed by Professional all material excavated and

not required or suitable for backfilling.

C. Carefully remove and store soil until underground work is complete and trenches are

backfilled and then re-install.

D. Allow adequate cover over piping, ducts and conduit in trenches. Trench walls must be

perpendicular to the top of piping and ducts and trench bottoms must be instrument

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 13 June 19, 2020

graded in the direction of flow as required. Earth must be scooped out under pipe hubs to

provide a solid bearing for the pipe, duct or conduit on undisturbed earth. Cinder fill,

stones or bricks beneath piping are prohibited.

E. Electrical Trade Contractor must provide sheathing, shoring and bracing necessary to

complete his excavation and backfilling work and must exercise every precaution

necessary to prevent accident, injury or death to any human and damage to property of

others. Remove all debris, sheathing, shoring and bracing upon completion of work.

F. It is the responsibility of each Contractor to check with the various Utility Companies and

make the necessary arrangements to avoid damage to their property. Each Contractor is

responsible for damage during excavation to underground structures including, but not

limited to electric, structural, piping or equipment. Such damage must be repaired

promptly without cost to the Project. Do not dig until all underground utilities are

identified and located.

G. Backfill after inspection and approval. Backfill must be made with clean earth, free from

rocks, frozen particles, debris or other foreign materials. Deposit in uniform layers not

over six inches (6”) thick with each layer mechanically tamped before the next layer is

applied. When approved backfill material is not available from the site, each Contractor,

at his own expense, must provide additional select backfill to complete installation.

Partial backfill on piping leaving all joints exposed is mandatory for all underground gas

and underground domestic water systems. Final backfill only after testing procedures

have been approved.

H. All trenches that pass under wall foundations must be backfilled with lean concrete, full

height, directly under wall footing, and at a 1:1 slope away from wall or column footing.

Trenches that are parallel with and deeper than wall foundations must be backfilled with

lean concrete on a 1:1 slope away from the bottom of the wall or column footing.

I. Where rock is encountered during installation of underground piping systems, carry

trenches to a point six inches (6”) below invert of pipe and provide a six inch (6”) layer of

crushed stone or gravel as a cushion.

J. All excavation work must include all pumping equipment, materials and labor necessary

to keep all excavations free of water. Provide well points as required with disposition of

water as directed by Professional.

K. Each Contractor must provide suitable indemnity for all accidents to humans, animals or

equipment caused by his excavating and backfilling work. Provide suitable guards,

barricades, red lanterns, flares and take the necessary precaution for an approved and

safe installation. All trenches must be backfilled at the end of each working day. Where a

trench must be left open, provide coverings of adequate size and strength over entire

open area.


A. Generally, no actions can be taken by the Electrical Trade Contractor that will interrupt

any of the existing building services for these buildings or any other building until

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 14 June 19, 2020

previously arranged and scheduled with the Engineer and Owner. Provide temporary

generator and wiring to maintain services. Minimum size generator shall be 150KW.

B. Should any service be interrupted by the Electrical Trade Contractor, immediately

provide all labor, including overtime if necessary, and all material and equipment

necessary for restoration of such service, at no additional cost to the Project.


A. Continuity of Interior Building Service Utilities include, but are not limited to:









7. Control systems, complete;








specifications as:






by this project;






Services. Refer to the “Scope and Objectives of the Electrical Work,” of this Section for a






FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 15 June 19, 2020

to “General Requirements Electrical,” Article “Scope and Objectives of the Electrical

Work.”



















1. Pipe and conduit penetrations through above grade floor slabs and through “fire

and/or smoke”-rated partitions and fire walls.













FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 16 June 19, 2020


A. The HVAC Trade Contractor will initiate preparation of coordination drawings, control


Contractor and all other building trades relative to the 100% final submission of the

coordination drawings. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 01

to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of

electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and

building components. Use proposed equipment submittals, which include certified

dimensions, service clearances, etc., to prepare the coordination drawings. If equipment

is submitted for review after completion of the coordination drawings and rejected during

the submittal review process, because the equipment fails to meet the project

specifications, the HVAC Trade Contractor is responsible to revise the coordination

drawings and layout the work using equipment which meets the project specifications.

HVAC Trade Contractor will designate locations where space is limited for installation

and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to

the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Proposed locations of conduit, pull boxes, equipment, and materials. Include the

following:

a. Maximum physical separation to meet National Electrical Code requirements

for feeder and secondary transformer tap lengths.

b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including space for

equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.



e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetration.


2. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction.

3. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls and

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

4. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and

inlets, light fixtures, communication systems components, sprinklers, and other









drawings.

B. Coordinate with, and provide to the HVAC Trade Contractor, all electrical system and

equipment information, locations and clearances required to prepare the coordination

drawings.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 17 June 19, 2020








PART 2 - PRODUCTS







review.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 18 June 19, 2020


labor force required of the Electrical Trade Contractor. As part of the mobilization phase

of the work, submit resumes for each Keyman including the Project Manager and Project

Foreman.






completed.

2.2 SUBMITTALS



herein.




professional, the HVAC Trade Contractor, the Plumbing Trade Contractor and the

Fire Protection Trade Contractor shall submit all submittals which require electrical

power to the Project Electrical Trade Contractor for the HVAC Trade Contractor’s,

the Plumbing Trade Contractor’s, the Fire Protection Trade Contractor’s and the

Electrical Trade Contractor’s coordination and review. The Electrical Trade

Contractor shall provide approval of electrical power requirements for the HVAC,

Plumbing and Fire Protection Trade Contractors’ proposed equipment.


“HVAC AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS’ COORDINATION OF HVAC

EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TRANSMITTAL COVER SHEET”, the

“PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS’ COORDINATION OF

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS TRANSMITTAL COVER

SHEET” and the “FIRE PROTECTION AND ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS’

COORDINATION OF FIRE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS TRANSMITTAL COVER SHEET”, as applicable, all located at the

end of this section. Submittals without this Cover Sheet or an incomplete Cover

Sheet will be rejected without review.

4. All submittals must be accompanied by the “ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR’S



review.

5. All submittals must be accompanied by the “ELECTRICAL SUBMITTAL LOG”,

located at the end of this section. Submit log after final acceptance of the proposed



without review.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 19 June 19, 2020
















number.






Trade Contractor, where applicable, for his use in setting steel, supports, and

attachments.


connections. Data and diagrams shall be given to the Automatic Temperature

Control (ATC) Trade Sub-Contractor for their use and inclusion into their

submittals.

5. Listing of specific electrical performance, calculations and data.






submission.


(PNL-1, etc.).



E. Review Time:





FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 20 June 19, 2020




3. Voltage.

4. Phase.







11. Disconnect switches.

G. Submittals for automatic temperature controls must be coordinated with: 1) all electrical

equipment manufacturers’ and vendors’ submittals including review of electrical

submittals by ATC Sub-Contractor for conformance with sequences of operation for each

piece of equipment; 2) all electrical requirements of ATC System with Electrical Trade

Contractor; and 3) all fire and safety requirements of the Fire Alarm System. ATC

submittals shall include copies of all wiring diagrams for all electrical equipment with

points of connections clearly identified. ATC submittals shall be developed and

submitted to the Electrical Trade Contractor.

H. The Engineer’s recommendation of acceptance of the equipment proposed by the Trade

Contractor is conditional upon the Trade Contractor fulfilling all obligations of the

Contract Documents. By furnishing the proposed equipment, the Trade Contractor

acknowledges compliance with all of the following:



2. The Electrical Trade Contractor has reviewed and approved all submittals prior to






3) all items are approved by the Electrical Trade Contractor, and have been






3. Any and all exceptions requested by the Electrical Trade Contractor are provided in

writing with the submittals. All exceptions, deletions and additions that vary from

the Contract Documents have been specifically annotated and initialed. Failing to

provide initialed annotations for all deletions and additions, the Electrical Trade

Contractor accepts the condition that the Contract Documents will govern, and will

be used to resolve disputes.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 21 June 19, 2020

4. Submittals without the Electrical Trade Contractor's signed stamp of approval will

be returned without review. Initialed approval stamps are not acceptable.




designed performance requirements. By entering into this Contract, the Electrical

Trade Contractor agrees that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the

Engineer that the Electrical Trade Contractor understands the design concept and

that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which materials and

equipment he intends to furnish and install and use.




K. Corrections or comments made on submittals during review by the Engineer do not

relieve the Electrical Trade Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the





construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Electrical



deviations from the Contract Documents that are not clearly noted by the Electrical Trade


submissions for correlated items have not been received. The Electrical Trade Contractor

is responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities, clearance, and dimensions;



L. All submittals must be able to be reproduced. The Electrical Trade Contractor is

responsible for all reproduction and distribution to the General Construction Trade

Contractor and all other Trade Contractors as applicable.

M. If requested for the Electrical Trade Contractor’s use in the preparation of submittals, an

electronic copy (AutoCad .dwg format) of any of the Electrical Contract Drawings may be


$55.00, billable to the Electrical Trade Contractor.

N. For additional requirements regarding submittals, refer to Article “Additional Trade





FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 22 June 19, 2020





all equipment.



manufacturer.




must be suitable and operate satisfactorily for the purpose intended in the electrical

systems.







only when, through no fault of the Electrical Trade Contractor, none of the

specified products are available.

















F. Where Alternative Manufacturing Sources are listed for an item:

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 23 June 19, 2020







G. Each Trade Contractor is responsible to contact his proposed equipment manufacturer’s





final.











I. Specific products specified without use of the term: equivalent(s); comparable products;

or substitutions constitute a proprietary specification, and must be provided as specified,

unless a written request is submitted to the Engineer for approval up to ten (10) days after

the date of project award. Such requests must include a complete description of the

proposed product, along with sufficient documentation and other information necessary

for a complete evaluation of the proposed product. Such Trade Contractor Requests shall

include a letter, on the product manufacturer’s letterhead, certifying that the proposed

product is a Comparable Product and conforms to all the salient characteristics,

including: material of manufacture; independent testing agency certifications; quality;

function, design; and performance of the specified product. If approved, the proposed

product will be listed in an addendum to notify all bidders that such acceptance has been

granted by the Engineer. If not approved, provide the specified product.


in which the work is taking place, engaged by the Electrical Trade Contractor, confirming





Basis of Design. Provide such calculations for major pieces of equipment (emergency

generators, switchgear, transformers, etc.). The Engineer, whose decision will be final,

will determine which products will require calculations during the submittal review

process.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 24 June 19, 2020




























mounted by the equipment manufacturers. Provide equipment equal to Amber/Booth

Company or Korfund Company, Inc., installed in accordance with vibration isolation

manufacturer's recommendations unless specified otherwise herein.






equipment, such as motors, generators, transformers, and the like.

E. Rigid pipes, conduit or other extended machine assemblies connected to vibration


FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 25 June 19, 2020





2.6 NOISE CONTROL

A. Noise levels in all 8 octave bands due to equipment and systems shall not exceed NC 35

within the occupied room, except as follows:


Audio Suites, Audio Speech Pathology, Phono/Cardiology 25

Operating Rooms 40



Corridors (Public) 40

Corridors (Nurse Stations) 40


Laboratories 45

SPD, Dining Rooms, Food Service/Serving, Therapeutic Pools 45

Kitchens, Locker Rooms, Warehouses, Shop, Laundries,


X-Ray & General Work Rooms 40





CONTROL.










to: sound attenuators; acoustic enclosures; additional equipment insulation or vibration

isolators to conform to these specifications. Provide required material and labor at no

additional cost to the project.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 26 June 19, 2020








necessary for support of the electrical work. Select the types of all inserts, hanger

supports, fastenings, clamps and attachments to suit both new and existing building

construction conditions specifically for the purposes intended.





by the Engineer.










place concrete as directed by the Engineer. Anchor Basis of Design: Dynabolt, Ram-In

and/or Tru-Bolt masonry anchors as manufactured by Ramset. Select and install as

recommended by the anchor manufacturer for the various applications, stresses and




bolts.



the size used.




FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 27 June 19, 2020




concealed portions of electrical work requiring accessibility for operation and

maintenance. If project does not include a General Construction Trade Contractor,

provide access doors as required.

B. Access panels may not be installed without specific approval of the Architect/Engineer as

to location. The proposed location of access doors and panels must be reviewed with the

Architect/Engineer and the General Construction Trade Foreman, where applicable, and

the locations indicated on the coordination drawings prior to installation of equipment,

access doors or panels. Controversies must be resolved at no cost to the Project.

C. Minimum door size of 24" x 18" unless shown, specified or approved otherwise.

D. Sixteen (16) gauge minimum doors with screw fasteners and painted finish. Basis of

Design is Milcor as follows:

WALL OR CEILING SURFACES STYLE

Drywall DW

Hard Plaster & Ceramic Type K

Unplastered Masonry & Concrete M

Acoustic Tile AT

Comparable products by Karp or MIFAB may be submitted for review.

E. Underwriters "B" label access doors where required for access to shafts, corridors, and











filled with non-shrink cementitious grout. Grout Basis of Design: Crystex as

manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Comparable product by Master

Builders or BASF may be submitted for review.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 28 June 19, 2020


curbs, the Electrical Trade Contractor is responsible for all anchor bolts required by the



For projects wherein there is no General Construction Trade Contractor, the Electrical

Trade Contractor is responsible for pouring, locating, and setting equipment foundations,

bases and curbs and the location of anchor bolts for the equipment provided or installed

by him on this Project.




A. Provide all sleeves required for electrical work and be fully responsible for the final and




masonry walls.























FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 29 June 19, 2020


fault, at his own expense, must engage the trade which originally installed the work, to

cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

I. Provide mechanical seals and insert into voids between piping and conduits that pass-










84.



conditions.


5. Fire Resistance:








B. Smoke and firestopping material must be manufactured by Rectorshield, Inc., Hilti, or

3M. Refer to Division 07 of these specifications.


2.12 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS, SMOKE DETECTORS/SMOKE DETECTOR CONTROL

A. All fire/smoke dampers for the project will be provided by the HVAC Trade Contractor.

B. Refer to the Architectural Drawings, where applicable, for locations and classification

ratings for all smoke and fire rated walls, floors and assemblies, new and existing.

C. Duct mounted smoke detectors will be used to activate smoke dampers unless area

detectors are used to activate smoke damper. Tie detectors into the building’s fire alarm

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 30 June 19, 2020

system. HVAC Trade Contractor will tie detectors into the Building Automation System

(BAS) where applicable.

D. Electrical Trade Contractor shall provide area smoke detectors for operation of smoke

dampers as applicable and specified. Electrical Trade Contractor shall connect, then test

and check-out smoke detectors connected to the building’s fire alarm system as specified.

Electrical Trade Contractor to check-out smoke detectors tied into the Building

Automation System.

E. All new duct mounted smoke detectors shall be furnished by the Electrical Trade

Contractor and installed by the HVAC Trade Contractor, and shall be installed generally

as located on the HVAC drawings.

F. Connections for automatic shutdown of air handling units shall be provided by the HVAC

Trade Contractor, in compliance with the ATC Section of these specifications.

Connections for fire alarm system shall be provided by the Electrical Trade Contractor.

G. HVAC Trade Contractor shall clearly indicate location of all new smoke detectors

required in ductwork on sheet metal shop drawing submissions.

H. Smoke evacuation system control and actuation shall be provided by the HVAC Trade

Contractor, with detection and signal for the fire alarm system provided by the Electrical

Trade Contractor.

I. Area actuation signals and connections for smoke dampers shall be provided by the

Electrical Trade Contractor. Locate signal where visible to Building Personnel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION






practices.




of dirt.


sizing, measurements, including lines, grades, pipes, and conduit elevations at the

building, as applicable, and be responsible for the correctness thereof. No extra


FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 31 June 19, 2020






fixtures, conduit, and the like, included in Contract Documents, in strict accordance with

the intent expressed thereby; and all the physical conditions to be met at the building and

finished grade, and be responsible for accuracy thereof. The establishment of the

location of all work must be performed in consideration of the finished work. In case of

conflict, equipment and/or materials must be relocated without cost to the Project, as

directed by the Engineer, regardless of which equipment was installed first. Refer to

Article, “Coordination Drawings”, in Part 1 of this section.





such injury caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of his

workmen.





I. All piping, conduit and other materials and equipment shown to be mounted below

ceilings are to be kept as close to ceiling areas as possible unless otherwise noted.

J. Install and arrange all equipment, such as junction boxes, and the like, which will be

concealed in construction, to be fully accessible for adjustment, service and

maintenance. Furnish access doors where required for installation under the General

Construction Contract, where applicable. Otherwise, furnish and install all required

access doors.


A. All piping, equipment, materials and accessories having polished or plated surfaces,

machined finishes or unpainted surfaces must be given a thick coat of a neutral

protection grease and carefully covered with thick cloth or heavy building paper held

securely in place to protect the finish against damage during the entire period of

construction. Protect equipment by the use of canvas tarps, vinyl sheeting or similar

materials held securely in place.

B. Seal all openings in pipes, fittings, conduit and all other materials to exclude dirt, sand,

and other foreign materials.



FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 32 June 19, 2020

construction. Rooms and equipment contained therein must be swept vacuum cleaned

at regular intervals. All relays, meters and electrical equipment containing electrical

components must be protected with heavy paper held in place with approved mastic tape

to exclude fine dust and particles. Install and maintain sufficient electric heaters in

equipment rooms and transformer compartments to keep equipment dry during

construction.





the electrical work, and take responsibility for their final and permanent locations.




openings as required for the electrical work.


particular Trade Contractor must, at his own expense, engage the trade which

originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. For existing construction:

1. The General Construction Trade Contractor, where applicable, will perform all

cutting and patching required for the work of all trades. Otherwise, each Trade

Contractor is responsible for his own cutting and patching.



required for completion of the electrical work, including interior and exterior concrete

slabs.




floor.





FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 33 June 19, 2020

3.5 SUPPORTS




and materials installed under/or affected by the electrical work.






3.6 LINTELS

A. Lintel work to be performed in strict accordance with Division 01, and Architectural and

Structural drawings. Refer to Architectural and Structural Contract Documents for lintel

schedules and details.

B. Where lintels are not indicated as being provided by General Construction or Structural

Trade Contractors, the Electrical Trade Contractor must provide lintels required for the

installation and completion of electrical work.

3.7 ESCUTCHEONS


escutcheons with set screws and prime coat of paint on all conduit exposed to view

within structure where passing through floors, partitions, walls or ceilings. Escutcheons

are not required in equipment rooms, boiler rooms or other unfinished areas.

B. Provide nickel plated cast iron escutcheons where conduits pass through toilet rooms,

walls or ceilings.









FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 34 June 19, 2020

3.9 ROOFING WORK


Warranties. Electrical Trade Contractor shall have all roofing and flashing work

performed by warranted roofing installer. Contact Owner or original installer for further






where applicable, except where specifically noted otherwise in the Electrical

Specifications. Otherwise, each Trade Contractor is responsible for his own painting and

finishing.




3.11 LUBRICATION


equipment which is furnished, installed or which must operate as part of the electrical

system.


will be his responsibility to accomplish the lubrication.






lubricants prior to initial start-up and the equipment is damaged as a result of his

negligence, that Trade Contractor is required to provide all corrective action necessary

including replacement, if required, for the proper operation of equipment.



lubrication will apply individually to the driver and the driven.





FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 35 June 19, 2020











3.12 ELECTRICAL TRADE COORDINATION

A. Equipment by other Trade Contractors shall be furnished with electrical current

characteristics as shown on electrical drawings and specifications.




C. Other Trade Contractors must furnish all motors, motor starters, specialty motor



installed under their contract except where noted otherwise.

D. All electrical equipment furnished by other Trade Contractors must be as recommended

by the equipment manufacturers, in accordance with the Electrical Specifications for

similar items, and of such type as to work properly with automatic temperature control

sequences where required.

E. The Electrical Trade Contractor must provide all push-buttons, safety switches for motors,

and wiring from starters to motors and install all starters furnished to him by other Trade

Contractors unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.







H. Other Trade Contractors must set all motors and furnish, set and pipe as necessary, float

switches, temperature control and other special automatic temperature controls.

I. Other Trade Contractors must provide all power and control wiring required by their

respective section of the specification. The Electrical Trade Contractor must provide all

other wiring required for the completion of the work of the other Trade Contractors.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 36 June 19, 2020

J. Other Trade Contractors must furnish the Electrical Trade Contractor with complete


K. Any electrical work performed by the other Trade Contractors must be performed in








IEEE or NEMA.



























2. All 3-phase starters remotely controlled must have 120-volt coils and control




FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 37 June 19, 2020












switch.







3.14 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted in HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection Specifications, all

packaged equipment furnished by HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection Trade

Contractors must be complete with the following electrical provisions:









3.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all equipment as to nature, service and purpose by means of permanently




Inc. Milwaukee, WI (1-800-234-0135) or Brady Worldwide may be submitted for

review. Nameplates shall indicate equipment identification names and numbers as

approved by the Owner.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 38 June 19, 2020


A. Perform all abandonment, removal and relocation work required for completion of

electrical systems.

B. Removals shown on drawings are a general indication only, and may not necessarily


C. Where existing partitions, walls, ceilings and floors are to be removed, all piping,

conduits, materials and equipment attached or fastened thereto or within, as applicable,

must be carefully removed.

D. Where work under this contract interferes with the existing construction, ductwork,


obstruction. Provide additional piping, conduits, and material of the same design and

quality if the piping and/or conduit is to be continued in use.

E. Disconnect and remove all accessible piping, conduit, ductwork, materials, fixtures and


connection.

F. Removed materials not desired by the Owner and not to be reset and not specified nor

indicated to be reused, become the property of the Electrical Trade Contractor and must

be promptly removed from site.

G. All demolition work is subject to the direction and approval of the Engineer and must be


H. Relocate existing utilities and/or equipment that must remain to maintain operation of


I. Equipment Pad Removal:


Electrical Trade, not indicated or specified for reuse. Remove concrete pads to one

(1) inch below adjacent concrete floor surface. Exterior slabs shall be broken and






follows:


3/8" 100% ½" 100%

No. 4 95-100% 3/8" 30-50%

No. 8 65-80% No. 4 0-15%

No. 16 45-65% No. 8 0-5%

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 39 June 19, 2020

No. 30 25-45% No. 100 0-5%




topping.



Slump 8" maximum





ASTM E 814.

B. Install smoke and firestopping at locations required, shown, or specified in accordance











cables or conduits must comply with the requirements of NFPA No. 70.




other trim.




C. All areas of smoke and firestopping installation must be accessible until inspection by the




from those indicated in the Project Contract Documents; (2) affect electrical work; (3) do

not differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist, and which are generally

recognized as inherent in the electrical construction activities of the character provided

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 40 June 19, 2020

for in the Project Contract Documents, are to be anticipated by the Electrical Trade

Contractor, and included in the basic electrical work.


different in subsurface (otherwise concealed) physical conditions; which affect

mechanical and/or electrical work; which differ materially from those ordinarily found to

exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character

found in the Project Contract Documents, are the basis for and require notice by the

Electrical Trade Contractor, promptly, before such conditions are disturbed. Such

conditions may become the basis for a legitimate claim under “Changed Conditions,”

affecting the cost, and/or schedule of the work. During the work, the Electrical Trade

Contractor shall provide reasonable, incidental on-site review, survey and measurements

to assist in quantification of such conditions.













specifications.








A. Provide the following prior to the initial application for payment:

1. Copy of the Electrical Trade Contractor’s and Sub-Contractors’ license for the state

in which the work is being performed.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 41 June 19, 2020


3. List of independent agencies who will be engaged by the Electrical Trade

Contractor to perform tests, provide certifications, conduct inspections, etc. as

required by Contract Documents.


submitted.

C. Include line items for:


2. Lighting Control System Report.

3. Fire Alarm Testing Reports.

4. Short circuit coordination study.


A. Provide the following prior to the final application for payment:


2. Equipment Start-Up Reports for each piece of electrical equipment.

3. Electrical Inspection Agency’s written report.

4. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Data.

5. Electrical systems and equipment warranties.

6. Fire Alarm Completion Documentation.

7. Lighting Control System Operational Report.

8. Electrical System Commissioning Report.

9. Electrical Contractor Closeout Checklist indicating dates of submitted requirements.

10. Electrical Trade Contractor’s Punch List of incomplete work items with reason why

each work item is not complete and anticipated schedule for completion. Submit

at least one week prior to Engineer’s final Construction Observation Report site

visit.

11. Signed and dated Engineer’s final Construction Observations Report.

12. Electrical Trade Contractor’s notarized certification letter.




A. The drawings and specifications covering the work of Division 26 shall not be interpreted

by the Electrical Trade Contractor as quantification, and/or classification of the

construction methods, and/or construction means required to carry out the required

construction. There is no explicit or implicit representation that any portion of this work

can be installed and/or constructed through any particular normal, reasonable, abnormal,

or unusual means and methods. By submission of a pricing bid for this work, the

Electrical Trade Contractor shall accept sole and individual responsibility for the

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 42 June 19, 2020

determination and execution of the methods and means he/she selects to complete this

work.

B. The Electrical Trade Contractor, to the fullest extent permitted by law, agrees to

indemnify, hold harmless, and defend Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the

employees and agents of any of them from and against any and all claims, suits,

demands, liabilities, losses, damages, and costs (“Losses”), including but not limited to

costs of reasonable defense, arising in whole or in part out of the negligence of the

Electrical Trade Contractor, his Sub-Contractors, the officers, employees, agents, and Sub-

Contractors of any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,

regardless of whether or not such Losses are caused in part by a party indemnified

hereunder. Specifically excluded from the foregoing are Losses arising out of (1) the

preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders,

designs, or specifications, and (2) the giving of or failure to give directions by Gillan &

Hartmann, Inc., its consultants, and the agents and employees of any of them, provided

such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of Loss.

C. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall name Gillan & Hartmann, Inc., its agents and

consultants on the Electrical Trade Contractor’s policy or policies of comprehensive or






3.24 ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL TRADE CONTRACTOR PAID FEES AND EXPENSES

A. As a material part of the Electrical Trade Contractor’s Agreement to complete the work of

this Contract, the Electrical Trade Contractor agrees to reimburse Gillan & Hartmann, Inc.




2. Electrical Trade Contractor’s request(s) for substitution;





and;

c. The Electrical Trade Contractor’s request(s) for substitution must be submitted

in writing, and;

d. The Engineer will provide the Electrical Trade Contractor with a written

budget, not to exceed quotation for the Engineer’s billing, and;

e. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the


f. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to


FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 43 June 19, 2020




the Electrical Trade Contractor’s substitution request(s), and;



i. The Electrical Trade Contractor’s balance due for his beneficial contracted

work, unpaid beyond 60 days of due date, will be deducted from progress

payments due the Electrical Trade Contractor, and will include all additional

administrative costs incurred by the Owner, in affecting such deductions.

3. Extra Engineering work created by the Electrical Trade Contractor’s failure to

resolve the Engineer’s Items listed in the Construction Observation Report(s);



Report) requiring the Electrical Trade Contractor’s attention, reporting and

resolution;

b. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall provide written feedback and prompt


the Electrical Trade Contractor’s completion of these Items followed by a


c. Should the Electrical Trade Contractor fail to perform as described above,

and should such failure require, in the opinion of the Owner and the

Engineer, that the Engineer must expend extra work in bringing closure and

resolving the Electrical Trade Contractor’s open Items, the Electrical Trade

Contractor agrees pay the Engineer for all extra work required. The Engineer

will provide a written notice of the not to exceed budget for the Engineer’s

extra work in advance as a prudent notification that the extra work will be

initiated. Subsequent failure of the Electrical Trade Contractor to resolve

these outstanding issues will result in the Engineer’s completion of the extra

work, and billing the Electrical Trade Contractor accordingly. The Engineer’s

payment for this additional work shall be deducted from the Electrical Trade

Contractor’s final payment for his work under this Contract. Deductions from

the Final Payment will be made to cover all the Owner’s additional costs in

affecting such deductions.

4. The Electrical Trade Contractor’s request for substitution of specified equipment

when such specifications list a basis of design and at least one comparable product

such requests will be rejected.

5. Extra Engineering work created by the Electrical Trade Contractor’s multiple




the initial Electrical Trade Contractor’s submission of that submittal. The



FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 44 June 19, 2020


due to the Electrical Trade Contractor, the Engineer will provide the Electrical

Trade Contractor with a written budget, not to exceed quotation for the

Engineer’s extra work in reviewing the submittal.

c. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall render written acceptance of the


d. The Electrical Trade Contractor shall pay a retainer, in advance, equal to






g. The Electrical Trade Contractor’s balance, unpaid beyond 60 days of due

date, will be deducted from progress payments due the Electrical Trade

Contractor for work under this Contract and will include additional

administrative costs incurred by the Owner in affecting all such deductions.

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 45 June 19, 2020

3.25 FORMS

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 46 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 47 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 48 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 49 June 19, 2020

FVHD 5195 6:260010 - 50 June 19, 2020


FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Supporting devices for electrical components.

2. Electrical identification.

3. Electricity-metering components.

4. Concrete equipment bases.

5. Electrical demolition.

6. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

7. Touchup painting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-

metering equipment.

C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.



NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and

marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 2 June 19, 2020

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and

arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical

installations that follow.

1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other

structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment

requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility

companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities

and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility

company providing electrical power and other services.

D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are

concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in

Division 08 Section "Access Doors."

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces,

coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished

surface.

F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by

acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items

before ceiling installation.

G. Electrical devices and boxes are indicated on Drawings in approximate locations

unless dimensioned. Adjust box or device location up to 10 feet, if required to

accommodate intended purpose or owner request, with no additional cost to

contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-

mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.

1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.

2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel

supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps,

threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, and wall brackets.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain

ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in

riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as

required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with

hot-dip galvanized finish.

G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application

category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

B. Raceway and Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum

size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway and

cable size.

1. Type: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive, vinyl. Legend is over laminated

with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.

2. Color: Black letters on orange background.

3. Legend: Indicates voltage.

C. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive

vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm

thick).

D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed,

vinyl tape with the following features:

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 4 June 19, 2020

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).

2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.

3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.

4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type

with preprinted numbers and letters.

F. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding

scheme.

G. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine

plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-

mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-

mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on

white background.

H. Interior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part

1910.145. Preprinted, aluminum, baked-enamel-finish signs, punched or

drilled for mechanical fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the

application.

I. Exterior Warning and Caution Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part

1910.145. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs

with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing, with colors, legend, and size

appropriate to the application. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for

mounting.

J. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No.

10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.3 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

B. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 03

Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2.4 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment

finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 5 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,

arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other

building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other

installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel

system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of

at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical

components.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways.

Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies

and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25

percent minimum in the future.

E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or

clamps.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 6 June 19, 2020

F. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may

be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways

serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening

raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is

carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.

Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar

hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the

raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control

enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are

mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.

L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-

drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and

fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves

during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise

indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are

indicated:

1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.

2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid

masonry units.

3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.

4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.

5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided

with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.

6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe

straps, or other items.

8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.

9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of

its proof-test load.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.4 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and

maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for

electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the

Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

D. Identify raceways and cables with color banding as follows:

1. Bands: Pretensioned, snap-around, colored plastic sleeves or colored adhesive

marking tape. Make each color band 2 inches (51 mm) wide, completely encircling

conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors,

at 50- foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (8-

m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:

a. Fire Alarm System: Red.

b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.

c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.

d. Security System: Blue and yellow.

e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.

f. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.

E. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and

circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-

coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.

F. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for

exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located

directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200

mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench

or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single

line marker.

G. Color-code 208/120-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit

conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Black.

2. Phase B: Red.

3. Phase C: Blue.

4. Neutral: White.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 8 June 19, 2020

5. Ground: Green.

H. Color-code 480/277-V system secondary service, feeder, and branch-circuit

conductors throughout the secondary electrical system as follows:

1. Phase A: Yellow.

2. Phase B: Brown.

3. Phase C: Orange.

4. Neutral: White with a colored stripe or gray.

5. Ground: Green.

I. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29

CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145, and where needed to ensure safe operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install

engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where

instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-

backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

J. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red

background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency

instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit

of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes

power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified

with their own self- explanatory identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a

single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high lettering on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high

label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Use white

lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of

equipment using mechanical fasteners:

1. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.

2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

3. Electrical switchboards.

4. Disconnect switches.

5. Enclosed circuit breakers.

6. Motor starters.

7. Push-button stations

8. Contactors.

9. Control devices.

10. Transformers...

L. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior

underground power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous

underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches (150

to 200 mm) below finished grade. Where width of multiple lines installed in a

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 9 June 19, 2020

common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm)

overall, use a single line marker.

3.5 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding

and empty conduits as required by utility company.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies

to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation

requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Firestopping."

3.7 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)

larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's

anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless

otherwise indicated. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and

reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.8 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or

disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of

equal capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be

demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned

in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and

patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove demolished material from Project site.

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for

relocation.


A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required

to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

FVHD 5195 6:260050 - 10 June 19, 2020

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent

undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been

disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades

involved.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Raceways.

2. Building wire and connectors.

3. Supporting devices for electrical components.

4. Electrical identification.

5. Electricity-metering components.

6. Concrete bases.

7. Electrical demolition.

8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

9. Touchup painting.

3.11 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINT

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in

Division 09 Section "Painting."

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats

to suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for

timing and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating



A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed

finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings,

finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial

Completion.


FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding

requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of

systems described in other Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Ground rods.

C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article.

D. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports to include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or

a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is


1. Testing Agency’s Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and


FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 2 June 19, 2020

1. Comply with UL 467.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.

b. Boggs, Inc.

c. Chance/Hubbell.

d. Copperweld Corp.

e. Dossert Corp.

f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.

g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.

h. Galvan Industries, Inc.

i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.

j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.

k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.

l. Ideal Industries, Inc.

m. ILSCO.

n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.

o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.

p. Lightning Master Corp.

q. Lyncole XIT Grounding.

r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.

s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.

t. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co.

v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.

w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section “Conductors and Cables.”

B. Material: Cooper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe.

On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow

tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 3 June 19, 2020

E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:

1. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in

diameter.

2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.

3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated

with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors,

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and

combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per

manufacturer’s written instructions.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, Stainless steel

1. Size: 3/4-inch diameter by 120 inches long

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct

contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for

underground connections, except those at test wells.

FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 4 June 19, 2020

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing

service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the

doorway, and down to the specified height above the floor.

G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG

minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when

installed as part of the duct bank.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment

grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than

required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.

C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic

raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

D. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond

conductor to each unit and to air duct.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Ground Rods:

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless


2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic

welds, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without

exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless

otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be

subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 5 June 19, 2020

C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration

isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use

exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type

connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic

structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations

accessible for maintenance.

D. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding

conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use

braided-type bonding straps.

E. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff

valve.

F. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service

entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals

in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to

make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent

future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are

not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-

type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated

with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal

housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each

conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding

conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous

conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors,


E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make

bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

FVHD 5195 6:260060 - 6 June 19, 2020

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according

to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are

not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended

by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to

make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on

grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or

grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration

of insulation and cable.

3.5 FENCE GROUNDING

A. Fences enclosing electrical generator within 100 feet of buildings, structures, walkways

and road ways: ground at maximum interval 750 feet or less if the grounding resistance is

high.

B. Metallic Fence: Comply grounding with requirements of IEEE C2.

C. Grounding Conductor: Bare tinned copper, not less than No. 6 AWG.

D. Gates: Shall be bonded between the gate post and gate frame with flexible bonding

jumper.

E. Grounding Method: At each grounding location drive a grounding rod vertically until the

top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor.

Connect conductor to each fence component at grounding location.

3.6 GRADING AND PLANTING

A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.

Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace

it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,

storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include

application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Division

02 Section “Landscaping.” Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as

indicated.


FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and section 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, rated 600 V or less.

3. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable-frequency controller.






A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying

conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 2 June 19, 2020

B. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and

marked for intended location and use.

2. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to

UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with

ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

D. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

2. Type THW and Type THW-2: Comply with NEMA WC-70/ICEA S-95-658 and

UL 83.

E. Shield:

1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked

polyethylene insulation, dual spirally wrapped copper tape shields and three bare

symmetrically applied ground wires, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC

jacket.

2.2 METAL-CLAD CABLE, TYPE MC

A. Description: A factory assembly of one or more current-carrying insulated conductors in

an overall metallic sheath.

B. Standards:


marked for intended location and use.

2. Comply with UL 1569.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to

UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

C. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with

ASTM B 8 for stranded conductors.

D. Ground Conductor: Insulated.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type TFN/THHN/THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

F. Armor: Steel, interlocked.

FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 3 June 19, 2020

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating,

material, type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

use.

B. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.

2. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper; solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG

and larger.

C. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.

D. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

D. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway. Type MC cable can be provided in lieu of wires in

raceways where acceptable to applicable codes and to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with dual tape shield.

FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 4 June 19, 2020

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points

according to Section 260130 "Raceways and Boxes" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound

used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's

recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips,

that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260050 "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those

specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260050 "Basic

Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end

of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

Comply with requirements in Section 260050 "Basic for Electrical Materials and

Methods."

FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.



1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been

energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with

requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and

correct connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.

2) Calibrated torque wrench.

3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and

indentation.

d. Inspect for correct identification.

e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent

conductors. Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-

V dc for 600-V rated cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and

larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable

scanner. Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

4. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

FVHD 5195 6:260120 - 6 June 19, 2020

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.


FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical

wiring.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section “Underground Ducts and Utility Structures” for exterior

ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 2 June 19, 2020

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets.

2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes.

b. Frame and cover design.

c. Grounding details.

d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

e. Joint details.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and

suspension systems with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by

them, including but not limited to lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression

system, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction

elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


following:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Electri-Flex Co.

4. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

5. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 3 June 19, 2020

D. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

E. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

F. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:

NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and

environment in which installed.

1. Fittings for EMT: Steel, set-screw or compression type.

H. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector

assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints

from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING



the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX Inc.

5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.

6. Condux International, Inc.

7. ElecSYS, Inc.

8. Electri-Flex Co.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.

11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS



the following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 4 June 19, 2020

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type, unless


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as

required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard

enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS



the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. Hoffman.

5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.

6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.

7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.

8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.

9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.

10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).

13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed

cover.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 5 June 19, 2020

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Cast-Metal Access Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast-iron, unless


F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge cover with flush

latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

G. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and

removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.6 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel,

plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated “wall pipe,” equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.052-or-0.138

inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

2.7 SLEEVE SEALS



the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Metraflex Co.

4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between sleeve and cable.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 6 June 19, 2020

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit.

Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure

plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed: EMT

2. Exposed and Subject to Sever Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit, IMC. Includes

raceways in the following locations:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling

units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC

in damp or wet locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings


FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in

Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water

pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods.”

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except

for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise

indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before

rising above floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions:

Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow

compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating

bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line

with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of

pull wire.

L. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install raceways, metallic and

nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 1-inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.

2. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of

raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or

junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to

comply with these requirements.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 8 June 19, 2020

M. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill

them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush

steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or

surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of

refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

N. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for

recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry

block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare

trench bottom as specified in Division 02 Section “Earthwork” for pipe less than 6

inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 02 Section “Earthwork.”

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward

end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and

contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill

around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled

backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end

of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division

02 Section “Earthwork.”

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at

building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for

stub-up ducts throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment

and at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and

encase coupling with 3-inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel

conduit horizontally a minimum of 60-inches from edge of equipment pad or

foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at

equipment.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 9 June 19, 2020

3.4 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping

specified in Division 07 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or

formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50-inches and no side greater

than 16-inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches

and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than. 16-inches, thickness shall be 0.138

inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall

assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during

construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2-inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway

unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and

with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between

sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

Refer to Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop

materials. Comply with Division 07 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems.”

L. Roof-Penetrations Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-

type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

M. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical

sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and

sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron “wall pipes” for sleeves. Size

sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway and sleeve for installing

mechanical sleeve seals.

FVHD 5195 6:260130 - 10 June 19, 2020

3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway

material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals

and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure

plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to

restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation

requirements are specified in Division 07 Section “Through-Penetration Firestop

Systems.”

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and

cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating



FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers’

packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through

one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring

devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 2 June 19, 2020





1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers’ Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers’ names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Duplex receptacle with side terminal screws.

Receptacles with only ‘stab’ type terminals are not acceptable. Combination side terminal

screws with ‘stab’ type terminals are acceptable but use of the ‘stab’ terminals is not

acceptable.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5352 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; CR5352 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5352 (duplex).

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.



a. Cooper; TR8300.

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 3 June 19, 2020

b. Hubbell; HBL8300SG.

c. Leviton; 8300-SGG.

d. Pass & Seymour; 63H.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted

when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:



a. Cooper; GF20.

b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: Heavy-Duty grade, quiet type. Rated for 20 ampere.



a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four

way).

b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way),

CS1224 (four way).

c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2

(four way).

d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

C. Pilot-Light Switches: 20 A:



a. Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 227 V.

b. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 10 V and 277 V.

c. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is

“ON.”.

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 4 June 19, 2020

D. Key-Operated Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A.



a. Cooper; 2221L.

b. Hubbell; HPL1221L.

c. Leviton; 1221-2L.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A;

for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995.

b. Hubbell; HPL1557.

c. Leviton; 1257.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:

120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-

supplied key in lieu of switch handle.



2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; 1995L.

b. Hubbell; HPL1557L.

c. Leviton; 1257L.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inchthick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless

steel

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and

listed and labeled for use in “wet locations.”

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates:

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 5 June 19, 2020

1. NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant.

2. All locations: Hinged cast aluminum weatherproof cover weather protection for a

standard of GFCI type receptacle. The cover shall include a weatherproof

cover/base assembly, a gasket, mounting hardware and lockable hasp. The outlet

cover shall meet or exceed UL requirements for wet locations while in use. The

weatherproof cover shall be designed to meet requirements of NEC Article 410-

57(b) and shall be NEMA 3R rated. Basis of design: INTERMATIC catalog

#WP1010H0MC.

3. Special locations where specifically indicated: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded

lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in “wet locations.”

2.6 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be


1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a

complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory unless otherwise

indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless


B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall

finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that

are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 6 June 19, 2020

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement,

concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system,

conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a

joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or

terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.

Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of

NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large

enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that

show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were

complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to

connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the

last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in

length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap

solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around

terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by

manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits,

splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

10. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding.”

11. Wire terminations on receptacles must be on screw type terminals. Use of ‘stab’

type terminals on receptacles is not acceptable.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

FVHD 5195 6:260140 - 7 June 19, 2020

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally

mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and

remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough

wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches

under single, multi-gang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,

stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate,

and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

3. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

4. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices,

or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and

replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.


FVHD 5195 6:260410 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following individually mounted, enclosed switches and circuit

breakers:

1. Fusible switches.

2. Molded-case circuit breakers for installation in existing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GD: General duty.


C. HD: Heavy duty.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and

component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and

manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,

and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current rating.

4. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

FVHD 5195 6:260410 - 2 June 19, 2020

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and

circuit breakers.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA




1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with

other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access

doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 FUSIBLE AND NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

2. Square D/Group Schneider.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Or approved Equal.

B. Fusible Switch, 600 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips or bolt pads to

accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks,

and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

FVHD 5195 6:260410 - 3 June 19, 2020

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum

ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded, and

bonded; and labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR INSTALLATION IN EXISTING PANELS

A. Manufacturers: Provide units compatible with the existing panel in which installed.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available

fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Lugs: Mechanical style with compression lug kits suitable for number, size, trip

ratings, and conductor material.

4. Application Listing: Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type

HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location

2.5 BOILER EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH

A. Provide emergency shut down switches for each boiler in accordance with NFPA

Requirements.

B. Emergency switches shall be push button type with break glass cover. Basis of Design

Square D Model No. 9001-KYK-117, Eaton Model No.10250TGR, or Pilla Model No.

ST120SNIS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for

compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


FVHD 5195 6:260410 - 4 June 19, 2020

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 1, NEMA PB 1.1, and NEMA PB 2.1 for

installation of enclosed switches.

B. Mount individual wall-mounting switches with tops at uniform height, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section “260120 Conductors and Cables."

B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate as specified in Division 26 Section "260050 Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods."


A. Prepare for acceptance testing as follows:

1. Inspect mechanical and electrical connections.

2. Verify switch and relay type and labeling verification.

3. Verify rating of installed fuses.

4. Inspect proper installation of type, size, quantity, and arrangement of mounting or

anchorage devices complying with manufacturer's certification.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA

ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers.

Exclude electrical test in 7.5. Exclude the following NETA ATS (1999) items for

breakers with trip settings of 400A or less:7.6.1.1.2.5; 7.6.1.1.2.6; 7.6.1.1.2.7;

7.6.1.1.2.8; 7.6.1.1.2.9. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

FVHD 5195 6:260410 - 5 June 19, 2020

3.6 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, vacuum dirt and debris from interiors; do not use

compressed air to assist in cleaning.

B. Inspect exposed surfaces and repair damaged finishes.


FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section Includes the following:

1. Power panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.


C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

D. RMS: Root mean square.

E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient

voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions

and manufacturers’ technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,

ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective

devices.

d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 2 June 19, 2020

e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.


C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Field quality-control test reports including the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply

with requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Division 01 Sections include the following:

1. Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components,

and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA



D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions, unless otherwise indicated:

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 3 June 19, 2020

1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities


only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of

electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written

permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other

construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other

types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance

requirements.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



contents.

1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



the following:

1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Contactors, and Accessories:

a. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div.

c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 4 June 19, 2020

d. Square D.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1.

1. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover.

2. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front

with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

3. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure;

integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or

primer coat.

5. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside

panelboard door.

B. Phase and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground

conductors; bonded to box.

3. Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 100 percent of phase bus.

C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material.

1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type.

3. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

D. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

2.3 PANELBOARDS SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.4 POWER PANELBOARDS

A. Doors: Secured with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

B. Mains Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 5 June 19, 2020

2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers Plug-

in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical

release for removal.

2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.6 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES

A. Location: Provide to panels as shown on Drawings.

B. Surge Protection Device: IEEE C62.41, integrally mounted, bolt-on-style, solid-state,

parallel-connected, sine-wave tracking suppression and filtering modules.

1. Minimum Single-Impulse Current Ratings:

a. Line to Neutral: 100,000 A.

b. Line to Ground: 100,000 A.

c. Neutral to Ground: 50,000 A.

2. Protection modes shall be as follows:

a. Line to neutral.

b. Line to ground.

c. Neutral to ground.

3. EMI/RFI Noise Attenuation Using 50-ohm Insertion Loss Test: 55 dB at 100 kHz.

4. Maximum Category C Combination Wave Clamping Voltage: 600 V, line to

neutral and line to ground on 120/208 V 1000 V, line to neutral and line to ground

on 277/480 V systems.

5. Maximum UL 1449 Clamping Levels: 400 V, line to neutral and line to ground on

120/208 V 800 V, line to neutral and line to ground on 277/480 V systems.

6. Withstand Capabilities: 3000 Category C surges with less than 5 percent change in

clamping voltage.

7. Accessories:

a. Form-C contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, for remote

monitoring of system operation. Contacts to reverse position on failure of

any surge diversion module.

b. Audible alarm activated on failure of any surge diversion module.

c. Six-digit transient-counter set to total transient surges that deviate from the

sine-wave envelope by more than 125 V.

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 6 June 19, 2020

2.7 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault

currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip-unit for circuit breakers larger than 800 A; shall have RMS sensing;

field-replaceable rating plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip

sensitivity.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings,

and number of poles.

1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and

refrigerating equipment.

3. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory-assembled to operate as a

single unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

E. Retrofit existing panels in accordance with new panels, provide new interiors and doors

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 7 June 19, 2020

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after

completing load balancing.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads.

Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory;

handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic

nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding.”

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Conductors and Cables.”


A. Perform for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA

ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers.

Exclude electrical test in 7.5. Exclude the following NETA ATS (1999) items for

breakers with trip settings of 400A or less: 7.6.1.1.2.5; 7.6.1.1.2.6; 7.6.1.1.2.7;

7.6.1.1.2.8; 7.6.1.1.2.9. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as direct during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working

schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour

services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing,

transmitting, and receiving equipment.

FVHD 5195 6:260442 - 8 June 19, 2020

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load

readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a

panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this

minimum requirement.

D. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scanning of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so

joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards

checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in

cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.


FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE FAULT CURRENT AND COORDINATION STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for a computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device coordination study. The study and its required shop drawings shall confirm and provide written confirmation that “Selective Coordination down to 0.1 seconds Has Been Provided” between the following circuit breakers:

1. Between the electric service normal power circuit breaker feeding the transfer switch and the branch circuit breaker in the Life Safety panelboard.

2. Between the generator power circuit breaker feeding the transfer switch and the branch circuit breaker in the Life Safety panelboard.

B. This required coordination study shall be performed by the Manufacturer of the Overcurrent Protection Devices and shall be submitted with the initial Shop Drawing submittal for Panelboards, circuit breakers and fuses. Panelboard shop drawings submitted in advance of the completion of this study and confirmation that selective coordination has been achieved, shall be rejected.

C. This study shall provide the required adjustable circuit breaker settings to achieve that coordination and comply with the code. This study shall also provide the required settings for all adjustable trip circuit breakers that are provided on this project. For circuit breakers that do not feed Life Safety panelboards (that are provided as a part of this project), provide adjustable trip settings that achieve the best possible level of selective coordination.

D. The coordination study shall confirm in writing whether selective coordination has been achieved for the Life Safety circuit breakers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

C. All submittals shall be in digital form.

FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 2 June 19, 2020

D. Coordination Study Submittals:

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports to be submitted with the Panelboard Shop Drawings.

3. Coordination-Study Report to be submitted with the Panelboard Shop Drawings. 4. Copies of the manufacturer’s time-current coordination curves for all overcurrent

protection devices requiring a manual time-current adjustment setting to be provided with the Panelboard Shop Drawings.

5. A table submitted with the Coordination Study listing each overcurrent protection device requiring manual time-current adjustments (listed for each panelboard) and the required adjustment settings as determined by the fault current and coordination study.

6. The shop drawing shall clearly state the result that selective coordination is being provided for the overcurrent protection devices used on the Life Safety Power Distribution System.

7. The Shop Drawing submittal for the Coordination Study shall be submitted simultaneously with the Circuit breaker Panelboard, Circuit Breaker, and Fuse Panelboard shop drawings.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual and/or hand calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in this application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

E. Comply with NEC Article 700 and 701 requirements for selective coordination.

1.5 REFERENCES

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

1. IEEE 241 – Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings.

2. IEEE 242 – Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 3 June 19, 2020

3. IEEE 1015 – Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C37.13 – Standard for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures. 2. ANSI Z535.4 – Identification of AFIE and appropriate Personal Protective

Equipment Classes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include “mandatory,” “very desirable,” and “desirable” features as listed in IEEE 399.

C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated include all overcurrent devices shown on the single line diagram and in panel schedules.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 16 Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 4 June 19, 2020

2. Contact the utility company to confirm actual available AIC rating of the service and obtain electrical characteristics of the utility transformer. The Coordination Study is to be based on the service entrance AIC provided by the utility company.

3. Obtain electrical characteristics of the emergency generator. 4. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection

type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

5. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company’s overcurrent protective

devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboard interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the branch circuit panelboards and enclosed circuit breakers.

B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 5 June 19, 2020

C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply with IEEE 242.

1. Transformers:

a. ANSI C57.12.22. b. IEEE C57.12.00. c. IEEE C57.96.

2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1. 3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.

E. Study Report:

1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2 cycle) fault currents on electrical distribution system diagram.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.

1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents. 2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds)

short-circuit currents. 3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.

C. Comply with NEC Article 700 for Selective Coordination for Life Safety Systems requirements. Include all components of the emergency system including the breakers in the emergency generator.

FVHD 5195 6:260573 - 6 June 19, 2020

D. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

E. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of coordination study:

1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:

a. Device tag. b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-pickup

values. c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous

settings. d. Fuse-current rating and type. e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.

2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company’s upstream devices.

a. Prepare separate sets of curves for:

1) Normal utility operation. 2) Switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source

is local generation. 3) Separate curve for the Emergency System “Equipment Branch”

(showing NEC required selective coordination). 4) Separate curve for the Emergency System “Life Safety Branch” (showing

NEC required selective coordination).

b. Show the following information:

1) Device tag. 2) Voltage and current ratio for curves. 3) Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer. 4) No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses. 5) Cable damage curves. 6) Transformer inrush points. 7) Maximum fault-current cutoff point.

F. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.


FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

Section Includes:

1. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching and dimming controls.

2. Indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

3. Switchbox-mounted occupancy sensors.

4. High-bay occupancy sensors.

5. Emergency shunt relays.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative (for each of the lighting control

devices required as a part of this project, including the lighting control devices used to

perform daylight harvesting controls as well as occupancy and vacancy sensing) to

perform the following tasks:

1. Conduct a preconstruction coordination meeting to instruct the Contractors

personnel on how to properly locate, install, wire, adjust, and test each of the

devices required to perform lighting control functions.

2. Visit the construction site to inspect, adjust, test, and operate the lighting control

devices provided as a part of this project.

3. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to install, wire, adjust, operate, and

maintain lighting control devices required in this project, whether included as a

part of this specification or shown/specified on the drawings.

C. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a factory authorized representative to conduct

a minimum two hour pre-construction and pre-installation coordination and training ses-

sion to instruct the Contractor on how all of the lighting control devices provided as a

part of this project (both analog and digital lighting control devices) are required to in-

stalled, wired, programmed, and tested.

D. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a factory authorized representative to conduct

a post installation test of each of the lighting control devices provided as a part of this

project (analog and digital lighting control devices) as a part of this project. After testing is

complete and it has been confirmed that the devices fulfill the requirements listed in the

General Section of this specification, the Contractor shall provide a written report to the

Architect and Engineer confirming the results of the tests with a written description of any

necessary corrective actions.

FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 2 June 19, 2020



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show installation details for the following:

a. Occupancy sensors.

b. Vacancy sensors.

c. Dimming and Daylight harvesting control equipment, including photo

sensors, occupancy sensors, normal and emergency relay devices and

manual control switches.

2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.

3. Provide a lighting plan that shows the locations, orientations, and coverage area of

each sensor.



A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and elevations, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from

installers of the items involved:


2. Structural members to which equipment will be attached.


a. Luminaires.


c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Control modules.


C. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranties.

D. Provide Riser Diagrams for each of the rooms (Typical drawings are acceptable for class-

rooms and offices) illustrating how the lighting control system components in each room

are wired. The diagrams shall include 120V or 277V (as applicable) power wiring, dim-

ming control wiring, and the low voltage control wiring. The diagrams shall also include

the sequence of operation to confirm that the devices will provide the sequence of opera-

tions listed..

E. Provide computer generated floorplan for each of the rooms (Typical drawings are ac-

ceptable for classrooms and offices) showing the quantities and locations of the pro-

FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 3 June 19, 2020

grammed lighting control devices. Coordinate the locations of the devices with the loca-

tions of all ceiling mounted electrical devices and HVAC diffusers to insure the locations

comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations for the minimum spacing from HVAC

diffusers.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace lighting

control devices that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Faulty operation of lighting control software.

b. Faulty operation of lighting control devices.

2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS

A. General Requirements for Sensors:

1. Ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy and vacancy sensors.

2. Passive infrared or Ultrasonic as described for each symbol on the drawing Symbol

Legend.with aux dry contact for HVAC connection

3. Hardwi red connection to switch.



5. Operation:

a. Occupancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage

area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for

turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 20 minutes.

b. Vacancy Sensor: Unless otherwise indicated, lights are manually turned on

and sensor turns lights off when the room is unoccupied; with a time delay

for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 20 minutes.

6. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.

FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 4 June 19, 2020

b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard

electrical enclosure.

c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind

hinged door.

7. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and

normal operation of sensor.

8. Provide all required equipment, labor, and material to provide an additional spare

dry contact at each occupancy sensor location that shall be used by the HVAC

contractor for HVAC controls.

B. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and

movement.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any

portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.

2. Detection Coverage (Room, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy anywhere in a

circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch (8 foot) -high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Corridor, Ceiling Mounted): Detect occupancy within 90 feet

when mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling.

C. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern

changes of reflected ultrasonic energy.

1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less

than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed

of 12 inches/s.

2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular

area of 600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a

circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch-high ceiling.

4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular

area of 2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.

5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when

mounted on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m).

2.2 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Requirements for Sensors: Equal to the basis of design unit listed on the Symbol Legend

description for a Switchbox Mounted Vacancy Sensor.”

2.3 HIGH-BAY OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. General Description: Solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the lamp and

ballasts indicated.



FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 5 June 19, 2020

2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when

unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable

over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours,

automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of

continuous dimming.

4. Power: Line voltage.

5. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F.

6. Mounting: Threaded pipe.

7. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

8. Detector Technology: PIR.

B. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting

heights from 12 to 50 feet.

C. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment

tool for sensor positioning and power port connectors.

2.4 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY

A. Description: NC, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual or

automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924. See drawings for requirements

1. Coil Rating: 277 V.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine lighting control devices before installation. Reject lighting control devices that

are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Examine walls and ceilings for suitable conditions where lighting control devices will be

installed.


3.2 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction

that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC

equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 6 June 19, 2020

C. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90-percent coverage of areas

indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 260519

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and non-power

limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions


E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in

junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260510

1. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at

each sensor.




B. In addition to the requirements listed in Part 1.3 of this specification, perform the

following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.



C. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


FVHD 5195 6:260923 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting lighting control devices to suit actual

occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal

occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector

range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's

operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.


FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 263213 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specification sections “General Conditions of Contract”, “Special Conditions” and

“Division 01 – General Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto

and shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.




1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for exterior standby power supply generators with the

following features:

1. Natural Gas fueled engine with all required piping and accessories to automatically

transfer to a liquid propane fuel source upon loss of the natural gas utility service

fuel source.

2. The starting and running kW/kVA capacity of the generator shall be based on

natural gas fuel.

3. Refer to the drawings for additional requirements including those listed on the

single line diagram for minimum kW/kVA rating, minimum starting kVA

requirement at 30% instantaneous voltage drop.

4. Unit-mounted cooling system.

5. Provide a PMG Exciter.

6. Remote control, monitoring, and emergency stop.

7. Outdoor skintight sound attenuated enclosure that limits the average db sound

output of the generator at full load to 74dbA at 7 meters.

8. Battery charger located on the generator skid.

9. Provide 120V engine coolant block heater.

10. The engine exhaust muffler shall be internally mounted within the enclosure.

11. The generator shall include provisions to be monitored and controlled from an

Owner’s computer connected to the building’s data network using a software

package provided with the generator that allows the generator to communicate the

current generator voltage, load amperes, load kVA, load kW, load kVAR, oil

pressure, coolant temperature, RPM, battery voltage and also allow remote control

of the generator. The generator shall include provisions to connect a data network

cable at the generator with a 4-pair #24 data cable extended in raceway from the

exterior of the building into the building interior and then concealed above the

dropped ceilings and extended to the Owner’s data rack.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 2 June 19, 2020

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 263600 “Transfer Switches” for transfer switches including sensors and

relays to initiate automatic-starting and stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.4 DEFINTIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a

parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the

nominal value of the parameter.

B. LP: Liquid Petroleum.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated

capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In

addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator.

2. Provide the Starting kVA versus Voltage Drop locked rotor curve for the Alternator

that shows the available starting kVA for the generator at 30% voltage drop.

3. Time-current characteristic curves for generator overcurrent protective devices.

4. Coordinate with the Short Circuit and Coordination Study requirements and

include a listed circuit breaker recommended in that study for the Life Safety Power

Distribution System that achieves selective coordination.

5. Include the maximum dbA output of the generator when it is installed in the sound

attenuated enclosure that wil be provided with the generator, indicating

compliance with the requirement for a maximum sound output of 74dbA at 7

meters.

6. Failure to provide any of the above items will result in a rejected shop drawing

submittal.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of

each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and

other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and

for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and

to supported equipment. Include base weights.


FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 3 June 19, 2020

1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For installer and testing agency.

B. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit.

3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements.

4. Report of sound generation.

5. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.

6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in


1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready

access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of

supply.




contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.

2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of

each.

3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s authorized representative who is trained and

approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours’ normal travel time from

Installer’s place of business to Project site.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 4 June 19, 2020

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators, including

Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s

standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of

Project site, a service center capable of providing training parts, and emergency

maintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the National

Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and

that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in

Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through

one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA



F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

J. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government

requirements.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities


only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than three (3) days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect’s written

permission.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 5 June 19, 2020

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast

anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are

specified with concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months full

maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer’s designated service organization.

Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under

load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and

adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used

in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers are

limited to, the following:

1. MTU Onsite Energy.

2. Kohler.

3. Onan Cummins.

4. Caterpillar.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on

concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to

operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 6 June 19, 2020

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.

3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer’s name

and address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage

from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent

step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-

state operating band within three seconds.

3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency

from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load

within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-

state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-

load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-

state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to

neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics.

Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not

exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output

terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current

for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage

to generator system components.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Natural Gas fueled engine with all required piping and accessories to automatically

transfer to a liquid propane fuel source upon loss of the natural gas utility service fuel

source.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and

smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil

temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable

container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or

appliances.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 7 June 19, 2020

E. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.

Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

F. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

G. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-

generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent

water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold

start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant

flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as

recommended by engine manufacturer.

4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer

covering of aging, ultraviolet, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and

non-collapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges and steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and

equipment connections.

H. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and

selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer’s engine

backpressure requirements.

1. Provide sound attenuated muffler that facilitates the maximum dbA sound output

requirements of the engine and generator as listed in this specification.

I. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter

element and “blocked filter” indicator.

J. Starting System: 12-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking

cycle.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from

engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.

4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1

“Project Conditions” Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times

without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length

indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection

accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and

thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain

battery above 10 deg C regardless of typical external ambient temperature range in

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 8 June 19, 2020

the project site location. Include accessories required to support and fasten

batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage

regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type.

Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically

after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved

at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower

float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery

is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for

variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to

prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low

temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of

input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate

charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts

providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel.

Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery

charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger

malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the

control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one

or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator

set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The

off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is

running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut

down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch

also shuts down generator set.

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system

controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel

mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from

generator-set vibration.

C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1

system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter.

2. AC ammeter.

3. AC frequency meter.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 9 June 19, 2020

4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).

5. Engine-coolant temperature gage.

6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.

7. Running-time meter.

8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).

9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.

10. Start-stop switch.

11. Over speed shutdown device.

12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device.

13. Coolant low-level shutdown device.

14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device.

D. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and

include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting

items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1

systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.

1. Over crank shutdown.

2. Coolant low-temperature alarm.

3. Control switch not in auto position.

4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm.

5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below

without differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced,

clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown.

2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown.

3. Over speed shutdown.

4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown.

5. Engine high-temperature pre-alarm.

6. Lube-oil, low-pressure pre-alarm.

7. Low coolant level.

G. Remote Alarm Annunciator: An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify

each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition.

Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication.

Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate

alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting

type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

H. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled.

Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 10 June 19, 2020

2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Provide molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent

rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.

2. COMPLY WITH THE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE TYPE

OF CIRCUIT BREAKER REQUIRED THAT ACHIEVES SELECTIVE COORDINATION

FOR THE LIFE SAFETY POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.

3. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.

4. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices.

5. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

2.6 GENERATOR, PMG-EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. The PMG Exciter shall

be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other

voltages if required.

E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,

over speed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated

capacity.

F. Enclosure: Drip proof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as

specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5

percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above

dew point.

2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Outdoor skintight sound attenuated enclosure that limits the average db

sound output of the generator at full load to 74dbA at 7 meters. Vandal-resistant,

weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. multiple panels shall be

lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 11 June 19, 2020

shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be

mounted within enclosure.

1. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.

2. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation

when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.

3. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.

4. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within

operating limits required by engine-generator-set components.

5. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system

components within required limits when unit operates.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable

louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer’s standard finish over

corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model,

constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or

equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and

other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project.

Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical

to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run.

3. Maximum power.

4. Voltage regulation.

5. Transient and steady-state governing.

6. Single-step load pickup.

7. Safety shutdown.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 12 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-

generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations

of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturer’s written installation and

alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or

accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply

with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in other sections.

D. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffle.

Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffle outlet.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not

specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and heat exchanger with

flexible connectors.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260060 “Grounding and Bonding.”

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260120 “Conductors and Cables.”

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 13 June 19, 2020

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials

and Methods”.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including

connections. Report results in writing.


1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual

and mechanical inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for “AC

Generators and for Emergency Systems” specified in NETA Acceptance Testing

Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are

additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load

pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer’s written

instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals

for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and

specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and

a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.

d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer’s specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-

charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and

integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system

operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.

7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to

measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load

increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

8. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25

percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is

within specified limits.

9. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set

installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four

locations on the property line, and compare measured levels with required values.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

FVHD 5195 6:263213 - 14 June 19, 2020

D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to

standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make

calibration records available for examination on request.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until

no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm


G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified

requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a

label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

K. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus

connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11

months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations

and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of

deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial

action.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.


FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 263600 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATION

A. The specification sections “General Conditions”, “Special Requirements” and “General

Requirements” form a part of this section by this reference thereto and shall have the

same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.




1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Provide automatic transfer switches with the interrupting rating shown on the

drawings. Provide the frame size or current limiting fuse protection as required to

achieve the required interrupting rating as shown on the drawings.

2. Provide an Ethernet Communication Module (Basis of design is an Asco 72EE2 or

equal) in the transfer switch and a 4-pair#24 data cable connected to the transfer

switch and to the owner’s Data Network System to provide transfer switch position

information to the Owner’s data network system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties,

and accessories. Provide the Short Circuit Interrupting Rating of the Transfer Switch on

the shop drawing. Coordinate with the requirements listed in the Short Circuit and

Coordination Study and provide a Transfer Switch with a minimum interrupting rating

required in that study.

B. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for transfer switches and differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished comply

with requirements and that switches have been tested for load ratings and short-circuit

closing and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in “Quality Assurance” Article.

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 2 June 19, 2020

E. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test and inspection results for compliance with

performance requirements.

F. Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in maintenance manuals

specified in Division 01. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic,

and manual. List all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration

instructions, including software, where applicable.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing emergency

maintenance repairs at Project site with an eight-hour maximum response time.


70, Article 100, for emergency service under UL 1002, by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Conventional Transfer Switches:

a. Emerson Electric Co.; Automatic Switch Co. Subsidiary.

b. Kohler Co.

c. Onan Corp; Electrical Products Division.

d. Russelectric, Inc.

e. Or approved equal.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total

system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of

switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by

protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated,

based on testing according to UL 1008.

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 3 June 19, 2020

C. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer

switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or

annunciator and control panels have communication capability matched with remote

device.

D. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or

better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-

surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41.

Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

F. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Enclosures: Provide Nema-1 enclosure. The enclosures shall comply with NEMA ICS 6

and UL 508.

H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop

Drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers

at terminations.

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type suitable for types and sizes of field wiring

indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or

bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

I. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or

electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both

directions.

J. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated

current between active power sources.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position

stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from

electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or

annunciator and control panel.

E. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when

the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 4 June 19, 2020

frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when

both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only is transfer can be completed

within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of

normal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

F. Provide an Ethernet Communication Module (Basis of design is an Asco 72EE2 or equal)

in the transfer switch and a 4-pair#24 data cable connected to the transfer switch and to

the owner’s Data Network System to provide transfer switch position information to the

Owner’s data network system

2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES

A. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Senses low phase-to-ground

voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal,

and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for

pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

B. Time delay for override of normal-source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine start

signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer to generator. Pickup

voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90

percent. Pickup frequency is adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set

for pickup at 95 percent.

D. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and

factory set for 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of delay on loss of voltage or

sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

E. Test Switch: Simulates normal-source failure.

F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicates source to which load is connected.

G. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved “Normal Source

Available.”

2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved “Emergency

Source Available.”

H. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each

switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

I. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and

normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

J. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote

engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 5 June 19, 2020

K. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory

set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls

after retransfer of load to normal source.

L. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine

generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers

and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset

intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30

minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-

minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

1. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without

load transfer.

2. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.

3. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Enclosures: Manufacturer’s standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and

primer.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment.

Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay

settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test

complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Switch

B. Identify components according to Division 26 Section “Basic Electrical Materials and

Methods.”

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment as indicated and as required by NFPA70.

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 6 June 19, 2020


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing under the supervision of the

manufacturer’s factory-authorized service representative in addition to tests

recommended by the manufacturer:

1. Before energizing equipment, after transfer-switch products have been installed:

a. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with

insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control

circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer.

Meet manufacturer’s specified minimum resistance.

b. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

c. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity

of barriers, covers, and safety features.

d. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

e. Perform manual transfer operation.

2. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational

function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and

of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-

switch operations.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting,

transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and

engine cool-down and shutdown.

B. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and

measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to

each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation, inspect unit components. Remove pain splatters

and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean equipment internally, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer’s

written instructions.

FVHD 5195 6:263600 - 7 June 19, 2020

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Institution’s personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below:

1. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

2. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to the applicable Division 01 Sections.


FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 265119 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 STIPULATIONS

A. The specifications section “General Conditions”, “Special Requirements” and

“General Requirements” form a part of this Section by this reference thereto and

shall have the same force and effect as if printed herewith in full.

B. The light fixtures provided for this project shall include a listing/approval by either

“Energy Star” or the “Design Light Consortium” so that these light fixtures are

qualified for the Owner to receive rebates from the New Jersey Smart Start program.

The proof of this listing shall be provided with the light fixture shop drawings.


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to

this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY


1. Interior LED lighting fixtures.

2. Exit signs.

3. Lighting fixture supports.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 2 June 19, 2020

1.5 SUBMITTALS .

A. LED Light Fixture Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in

order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and

the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. The shop drawing shall include the “L70 Rating” for each light

fixture, indicating compliance with a minimum L70 of 50,000

hours.

3. The shop drawing shall indicate, for exterior light fixtures, a rated

ambient temperature of 15 degrees-C or lower.

4. The shop drawing shall include photometric data and adjustment factors

based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements

Testing and Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The

adjustment factors shall be for fixtures identical to those required for this

project.

5. The shop drawing shall include, for each fixture, the rated driver

current, indicating compliance with a maximum value of 2 mA.

6. The shop drawing shall indicate the minimum delivered lumens

indicating compliance with the minimum value listed in the light fixture

schedule.

7. The shop drawing shall indicate the CRI = Color Rendering Index of the

light fixture indicating compliance with the CRI value listed in the light

fixture schedule.

8. Shop drawings that do not include each of the above light fixture

ratings shall be rejected.

9. Provide information clearly showing that each light fixture includes a

listing/approval by either “Energy Star” or the “Design Light Consortium” as

required to be qualified for the Owner to receive rebates from the New

Jersey Smart Start program.

B. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale,

on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based

on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures.


3. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will

be attached.

4. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.

b. Speakers.

c. Sprinklers.

d. Smoke and fire detectors.

e. Occupancy sensors.

f. Access panels.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include

FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 3 June 19, 2020

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with

other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including

HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

B. The light fixture catalog number indicated on the project documents is to

establish the intent of design but does not necessarily include all required

accessories and hardware for a complete installation. Prior to shop drawing

submission and fixture purchase, coordinate the final requirements for each light

fixture with: ceiling construction; and finish types as required by the Professional

and/or the Institution. Coordination to include but not be limited to: ceiling type;

supporting methods & hardware; trim; accessories; fixture finish and color.

Submission of bid indicates inclusion of all material and installation as required

by these coordination requirements.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Fluorescent Light Fixture Ballasts: Manufacturer's

standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of

Substantial Completion.

B. LED light fixtures provided as a part of this project shall be provided with a 5 year

warranty.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following

requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 4 June 19, 2020

include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on

the product named in the Lighting Fixture Schedule shown on drawings.

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named

product, a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers

specified, or an approved equal.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for

recessed fixtures.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to

prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage

under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of

tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components

from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating

position.

E. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless

otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

F. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High

resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,

and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different

thickness is indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and

lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

2. See drawing light fixture schedule for requirements.

FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 5 June 19, 2020

2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and

ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed

to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and

equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.5 REQUIREMENTS FOR INDIVIDUAL LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Fixtures Characteristics: As shown on Lighting Fixture Schedule.

2.6 LED LIGHT FIXTURES

A. LED light fixtures provided as a part of this project shall have a minimum L70 rated

life of 50,000 hours. The shop drawing submitted for these fixtures shall include

this information.

B. The maximum driver current for each fixture shall not exceed 2mA.

C. The power factor of the load for each light fixture shall not exceed a value to cause

a 60% loaded 277V light fixture branch circuit to have a power factor less than

0.85.

D. The LED fixtures shall be provided with the special warranty listed in

this specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install

lamps in each fixture.

B. Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as

the primary support element.

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for

each fixture from the building structure to tabs on the light fixture

located not more than 6 inches from the light fixture corner. The wire

FVHD 5195 6:265119 - 6 June 19, 2020

or rod shall have a breaking strength of the weight of the fixture at a

safety factor of 3.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at

or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the

application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on

reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support

fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels

spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing

or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one

at each end.

D. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper

operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications

indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system,

retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.


FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 1 June 19, 2020

SECTION 283111 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for fire alarm systems for Galloway New Maintenance

and Operations Building

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FACP: Fire alarm control panel.

B. LED: Light-emitting diode.

C. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

D. Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.

1.4 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, addressable systems; multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm

service only.

B. Coordinate with the Owner to identify the actual room numbers for each location shown

on the floorplan. Program systems using Owner’s final room numbers and room names.


A. Comply with NFPA 72.

B. Fire alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

C. Fire alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Alarm notification appliances shall operate continuously.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 2 June 19, 2020

2. Identify alarm at the FACP and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire alarm

mode.

7. Record events in the system memory.

8. Record events by the system printer.

D. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or actions:

1. Operation of a fire-protection system valve tamper.

E. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices or

actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts and grounds of wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and

notification-appliance circuits.

2. Opening, tampering, or removal of alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of primary power at the FACP.

4. Ground or a single break in FACP internal circuits.

5. Abnormal ac voltage at the FACP.

6. A break in standby battery circuitry.

7. Failure of battery charging.

8. Abnormal position of any switch at the FACP or annunciator.

F. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Ring trouble bell and annunciate at the

FACP and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire alarm system design.

b. Fire alarm certified by NICET, minimum Level III.

2. Every sheet of the fire alarm shop drawings, including the floor plans and wiring

diagrams shall be signed and sealed by a qualified Professional Engineer who is

responsible for their preparation.

3. In addition to distribution requirements for submittals specified in Division 1

Section "Submittals," submit a copy of the Shop Drawings to Authorities Having

Jurisdiction.

4. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including

method of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 3 June 19, 2020

operations for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs.

Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

5. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.

6. System riser diagram with device addresses, conduit sizes, and cable and wire

types and sizes.

7. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Include diagrams for

equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Show

wiring color code.

8. Floor Plans: Indicate all final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

9. Battery Calculations: Provide detailed battery calculations indicating the types of

devices connected to each alarm indicating circuit, the individual ampere load for

each of the types of devices on each circuit, the number of each type of device on

each circuit, the no load ampere load for each circuit, the 24 hour no load amp

hour load for each circuit, the total amp hours for the 24 hour no load period and 5

minute alarm indicating period, and the amp hours of battery capacity provided for

each circuit.

10. Duct Smoke Detectors: Performance parameters and installation details for each

detector, verifying that each detector is listed for the complete range of air velocity,

temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Ductwork Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations of ducts, drawn

to scale and coordinating the installation of duct smoke detectors and access to

them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling

tubes, the detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate

detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Provide wall mounted lockable fire alarm documents enclosure/box as required by

NFPA 72 at the location designated by the Owner with a copy of the fire alarm as

built record shop drawings contained within.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire alarm system to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. Comply with NFPA 72, Appendix A,

recommendations for Owner's manual. Include abbreviated operating instructions for

mounting at the FACP.

F. Submittals to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submittal to

Authorities Having Jurisdiction. To facilitate review, include copies of annotated

Contract Drawings as needed to depict component locations. Resubmit if required to

make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from

Authorities Having Jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.

G. Documentation:

1. Approval and Acceptance: Provide the "Record of Completion" form according to

NFPA 72 to the Engineer and to the Owner.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 4 June 19, 2020

2. Record of Completion Documents: Provide the "Permanent Records" according to

NFPA 72 to Owner and Authorities Having Jurisdiction. Format of the written

sequence of operation shall be the optional input/output matrix.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel certified by NICET as Fire Alarm Level III.





A. Interruption of Existing Fire Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire alarm service to facilities


only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements

indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of fire

alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire alarm service without Owner's written

permission.

1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has been

tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is

accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and label existing

fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing

disconnected fire alarm equipment.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS



contents.

1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount

installed, but not less than 1 unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not

less than 1 unit.

3. Smoke and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type

installed, but not less than 1 unit of each type.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 5 June 19, 2020

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but

not less than 1 unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed

components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: Five of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Alarm System Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

1. Honeywell international, Inc. (Silent Knight). Basis of design

2. Edwards Systems Technology Inc.

3. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.

4. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

2.2 FACP

A. General Description:

1. Modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, UL 864 listed.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the

sensitivity range of the device.

3. Addressable control circuits for operation of mechanical equipment.

4. Capable of expansion to support 100% increase in the number of initiating and

notification devices.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human

operator at the FACP and addressable system components including annunciation and

supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the

programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and

control commands.

3. Regarding alarm indication for duct mounted smoke detctors: The fire alarm system

shall be programmed to allow the remote annunciator to identify the specific

mechanical device/RTU in alarm and its location.

C. Circuits:

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 6 June 19, 2020

1. Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style 4.

a. System Layout: The number of addressable devices connected to each

signaling line circuit does not exceed 75% circuit capacity.

2. Notification-Appliance Circuits: NFPA 72, Class B, Style Y.

3. Actuation of alarm notification appliances, annunciation, and elevator recall shall

occur within 10 seconds after the activation of an initiating device.

4. Electrical monitoring for the integrity of wiring external to the FACP for mechanical

equipment shutdown and magnetic door-holding circuits is not required, provided

a break in the circuit will cause doors to close and mechanical equipment to shut

down.

D. Notification-Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern, complying

with ANSI S3.41.

E. Power Supply for Supervision Equipment: Supply for audible and visual equipment for

supervision of the ac power shall be from a dedicated dc power supply, and power for

the dc component shall be from the ac supply.

F. Alarm Silencing, Trouble, and Supervisory Alarm Reset: Manual reset at the FACP after

initiating devices are restored to normal.

1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and

activates an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is

retained.

2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification

appliances until silencing switch is operated again.

3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,

notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.

G. Walk Test: A test mode to allow one person to test alarm and supervisory features of

initiating devices. Enabling of this mode shall require the entry of a password. The FACP

and annunciators shall display a test indication while the test is underway. If testing

ceases while in walk-test mode, after a preset delay, the system shall automatically return

to normal.

H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, trouble,

and supervisory signals to a remote alarm station through a digital alarm communicator

transmitter and telephone lines.

I. Service Modem: Ports shall be RS-232 for system printer and for connection to a dial-in

terminal unit.

1. The dial-in port shall allow remote access to the FACP for programming changes

and system diagnostic routines. Access by a remote terminal shall be by encrypted

password algorithm.

J. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.

Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 7 June 19, 2020

trouble), and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other

printed indications. Also print system reset event, including the same information for

device, location, date, and time. Commands initiate the printing of a list of existing

alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system and a historical log of events.

K. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module.

Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signal, supervisory and

digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be powered by the 24-V dc source.

1. The alarm current draw of the entire fire alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent

of the power-supply module rating.

2. Power supply shall have a dedicated fused safety switch for this connection at the

service entrance equipment. Paint the switch box red and identify it with "FIRE

ALARM SYSTEM POWER."

L. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries and automatic battery charger

and an automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed, valve-regulated, recombinant lead acid.

2. Battery and Charger Capacity: Comply with NFPA 72.

M. Surge Protection:

1. Install surge protection on normal ac power for the FACP and its accessories.

N. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic

or glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe

appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of

the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

O. Middle School FACP: Provide hardware, software and programing necessary to bring the

existing Farenhyt IFP-2000 panel in compliance with requirements of this specification.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE ALARM BOXES

A. Description: UL 38 listed; finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating

instructions in contrasting color. Station shall show visible indication of operation.

Mounted on recessed outlet box; if indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's

surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever

type. With integral addressable module, arranged to communicate manual-station

status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

2. Station Reset: Provide Key operated switch on all pull stations.

3. Indoor Protective Shield: At all pull station locations. Factory-fabricated clear

plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to

discourage false-alarm operation.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 8 June 19, 2020

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Description:

1. UL 268 listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.

3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be

mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in

the fixed base for connection of building wiring.

4. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and

power-on status.

6. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable

type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

2. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot (0.008 and 0.011

percent/mm) smoke obscuration when tested according to UL 268A.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

a. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

b. Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration

when tested according to UL 268A.

2. UL 268A listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.



4. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be

mounted in a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be

designed for mounting directly to the air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base

for connection to building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: UL listed for use with the supplied

detector. The enclosure shall comply with NEMA 250 requirements for Type

4X.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation

to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicating detector has operated and

power-on status. Provide remote status and alarm indicator and test station where

indicated.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 9 June 19, 2020

7. Locate duct smoke detector test/alarm indicating stations below the unit recessed in

nearest classroom, office, or corridor ceiling 10 feet high or lower. In locations

where ceilings below the unit are higher than 10 feet, provide a recessed wall

mounted device minimum 80" above finished floor.

8. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable

type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.

9. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for the

specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

10. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. The Contractor

shall remove and maintain the existing fan shutdown circuits from the existing duct

mounted smoke detectors and shall extend and reinstall the existing shutdown

wires to the new relays.

11. The fire alarm system shall be programmed to allow the remote annunciator to

identify the specific mechanical device/RTU in alarm and location.

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General: UL 521 listed.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F

or rate-of-rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F per minute, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLICANCES

A. Description: Equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system

connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly.

2. Provide wire guards (that are listed specifically for the appliance protected) for the

pull stations and notification devices in gymnasium.

3. Provide weatherproof devices where indicated at exterior locations on the

drawings.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the

operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90

dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn.

C. Visible Alarm Devices: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971, with clear or nominal

white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is

engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 10 June 19, 2020

1. Rated Light Candela Output: Multiple taps for selection between 15 and 110

candela. Setting selection as required to satisfy NFPA 72 and ADA requirements for

each location.

2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

2.7 SPRINKLER SYSTEM REMOTE INDICATORS

A. Remote status and alarm indicator and test stations, with LED indicating lights. Light is

connected to flash when the associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is

flush mounted in a single-gang wall plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification

plate at the indicating light identifies, in engraved white letters, device initiating the

signal and room where the smoke detector or valve is located. For water-flow switches,

the identification plate also designates protected spaces downstream from the water-flow

switch.

2.8 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: This project shall provide power to existing door holders from the fire alarm

system.

2.9 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Duplicate annunciator functions of the FACP for alarm, supervisory, and

trouble indications. Also duplicate manual switching functions of the FACP, including

acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Class 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display same as the FACP.

Controls with associated LEDs permit acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing

functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals identical to those in the FACP.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a system address

for listed alarm-initiating devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to associated control systems.

2.11 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Listed and labeled according to UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit receives an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from the

FACP, and automatically captures one or two telephone lines and dials a preset number

for a remote central station. When contact is made with the central station(s), the signal

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 11 June 19, 2020

is transmitted. The unit supervises up to two telephone lines. Where supervising 2 lines,

if service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, the unit initiates a local

trouble signal and transmits a signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm

receiving station over the remaining line. When telephone service is restored, unit

automatically reports that event to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone

lines, the local trouble signal is initiated.

C. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger. Battery capacity

is adequate to comply with NFPA 72 requirements.

D. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central

station.

2.12 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system.

2.13 GUARDS FOR PHYSICAL PROTECTION

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke

detector, audio/visual alarm, or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by manufacturer of the device.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

2.14 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Wire and cable for fire alarm systems shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with

NFPA 70, Article 760.

B. Fire Alarm Circuits: Wires in metallic raceway. Red colored exterior metal jacket, UL

listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, MC cable may be used for

concealed wiring in lieu of wires in conduit where allowed by local and national codes.

In unconcealed locations in occupied spaces, provide wiring in surface mounted metal

raceway that is painted to match the wall or ceiling.

C. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors in raceway with 600-V rated, 75

deg C, color-coded insulation.

1. Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum.

2. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.

3. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70 Type MC, copper conductors,

TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer

jacket with red identifier stripe, UL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 12 June 19, 2020

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Smoke or Heat Detector Spacing:

1. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

2. Spacing of heat detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and

for high ceiling areas, shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72.

3. Spacing of heat detectors shall be determined based on guidelines and

recommendations in NFPA 72.

B. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so

they extend the full width of the duct.

D. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each duct detector and each sprinkler

water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing

position.

E. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling.

Install horns on flush-mounted back boxes.

F. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install with bottom of the lens 80 inches above the

finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower.

G. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

H. FACP: Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished

floor.

I. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring according to the following:

1. NECA 1.

2. TIA/EIA 568-A.

B. Wiring Method:

1. Copper, solid insulated wire installed in metallic conduit; red MC cable with

dedicated ground wire, UL listed for use in fire alarm systems may be used in

concealed spaces.

2. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring

associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable.

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 13 June 19, 2020

3. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables may be installed in the

same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to

sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points

with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any

enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal

according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-

on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets,

or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.

E. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building

power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for

supervisory circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-

initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire

alarm system junction boxes and covers red.

F. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FACP and the

transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring

as needed to suit monitoring function.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26

Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

B. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.

C. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground the FACP and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire

from main service ground to the FACP.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,

including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the

following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

FVHD 5195 6:283111 - 14 June 19, 2020

1. Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using

the form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.

2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA

72. Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under

the direct supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems

program at Level III.

3. Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built

drawings and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly

located, damaged, or nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.

4. Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in

NFPA 72.

5. Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including

demonstration of sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in

Appendix A in NFPA 70.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial


conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this

purpose.

B. Follow-Up Tests and Inspections: After date of Substantial Completion, test the fire alarm

system complying with testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Perform

tests and inspections listed for three monthly, and one quarterly, periods.

C. Semiannual Test and Inspection: Six months after date of Substantial Completion, test the

fire alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA

72. Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods.

Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

D. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test the fire

alarm system complying with the testing and visual inspection requirements in NFPA 72.

Perform tests and inspections listed for monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual

periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the fire alarm system, appliances, and devices.
